NEC NEAX2400 ICS Programming Manual Download Page 719

Page: 719 / 1089

NEAX2400 IPX Feature Programming Manual

Page 676

NDA-24297, Issue 1

S-10

Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)

Service Conditions (cont’d)

Example 5

•

Node A collects the billing information of Node B and Node C via FCCS, using the polling method (Billing
information of Node B cannot be collected).

•

Node B sends the billing information to Node D via CCIS, ignoring polling from Node A.

•

Node B deletes the Point Code (CCIS) for Node D when Node B wants to send billing information for
polling from Node A.

CCIS - Center Node

non IPX

SMDR

Equipment

FCCS Network

IPX

Billing information of Node B

Node D

CCIS

: Fusion Call Control Signal (FCCS)
: Common Channel Inter-Office Signaling (CCIS)

FCCS - Center Node

36456
26546
55214
75213

Polling

FCCS

SMDR

Equipment

DPC0:

Node D

ignores

Node A

Node C

IPX

Node C

oll

illin

g i

ati

Node C

IPX

Node B

Summary of Contents for NEAX2400 ICS

Page 1: ...OCTOBER 2000 NEC America Inc NDA 24297 ISSUE 1 STOCK 200775 Feature Programming Manual ...

Page 2: ...ut notice NEC America Inc has prepared this document for use by its employees and customers The information contained herein is the property of NEC America Inc and shall not be reproduced without prior written approval from NEC America Inc NEAX and Dterm are registered trademarks of NEC Corporation Cisco is a registered trademark of Cisco Systems Inc Documentation references to Cisco products refe...

Page 3: ...1 ii 1 iii 1 iv 1 v 1 vi 1 vii 1 viii 1 ix 1 x 1 xi 1 xii 1 xiii 1 xiv 1 xv 1 xvi 1 xvii 1 xviii 1 xix 1 xx 1 xxi 1 xxii 1 xxiii 1 xxiv 1 xxv 1 xxvi 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6 1 7 1 8 1 9 1 10 1 11 1 12 1 13 1 14 1 15 1 16 1 17 1 18 1 19 1 20 1 21 1 22 1 23 1 24 1 25 1 26 1 27 1 28 1 29 1 30 1 31 1 32 1 33 1 34 1 35 1 36 1 37 1 38 1 39 1 40 1 41 1 42 1 43 1 44 1 45 1 46 1 47 1 48 1 49 1 50 1 PAGE No ...

Page 4: ... 1 60 1 61 1 62 1 63 1 64 1 65 1 66 1 67 1 68 1 69 1 70 1 71 1 72 1 73 1 74 1 75 1 76 1 77 1 78 1 79 1 80 1 81 1 82 1 83 1 84 1 85 1 86 1 87 1 88 1 PAGE No ISSUE No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 89 1 90 1 91 1 92 1 93 1 94 1 95 1 96 1 97 1 98 1 99 1 100 1 101 1 102 1 103 1 104 1 105 1 106 1 107 1 108 1 109 1 110 1 111 1 112 1 113 1 114 1 115 1 116 1 117 1 118 1 119 1 120 1 121 1 122 1 123 1 124 1 125 1 126 1 PA...

Page 5: ...138 1 139 1 140 1 141 1 142 1 143 1 144 1 145 1 146 1 147 1 148 1 149 1 150 1 151 1 152 1 153 1 154 1 155 1 156 1 157 1 158 1 159 1 160 1 161 1 162 1 163 1 164 1 PAGE No ISSUE No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 165 1 166 1 167 1 168 1 169 1 170 1 171 1 172 1 173 1 174 1 175 1 176 1 177 1 178 1 179 1 180 1 181 1 182 1 183 1 184 1 185 1 186 1 187 1 188 1 189 1 190 1 191 1 192 1 193 1 194 1 195 1 196 1 197 1 198 1 1...

Page 6: ...214 1 215 1 216 1 217 1 218 1 219 1 220 1 221 1 222 1 223 1 224 1 225 1 226 1 227 1 228 1 229 1 230 1 231 1 232 1 233 1 234 1 235 1 236 1 237 1 238 1 239 1 240 1 PAGE No ISSUE No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 241 1 242 1 243 1 244 1 245 1 246 1 247 1 248 1 249 1 250 1 251 1 252 1 253 1 254 1 255 1 256 1 257 1 258 1 259 1 260 1 261 1 262 1 263 1 264 1 265 1 266 1 267 1 268 1 269 1 270 1 271 1 272 1 273 1 274 1 2...

Page 7: ...290 1 291 1 292 1 293 1 294 1 295 1 296 1 297 1 298 1 299 1 300 1 301 1 302 1 303 1 304 1 305 1 306 1 307 1 308 1 309 1 310 1 311 1 312 1 313 1 314 1 315 1 316 1 PAGE No ISSUE No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 317 1 318 1 319 1 320 1 321 1 322 1 323 1 324 1 325 1 326 1 327 1 328 1 329 1 330 1 331 1 332 1 333 1 334 1 335 1 336 1 337 1 338 1 339 1 340 1 341 1 342 1 343 1 344 1 345 1 346 1 347 1 348 1 349 1 350 1 3...

Page 8: ...366 1 367 1 368 1 369 1 370 1 371 1 372 1 373 1 374 1 375 1 376 1 377 1 378 1 379 1 380 1 381 1 382 1 383 1 384 1 385 1 386 1 387 1 388 1 389 1 390 1 391 1 392 1 PAGE No ISSUE No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 393 1 394 1 395 1 396 1 397 1 398 1 399 1 400 1 401 1 402 1 403 1 404 1 405 1 406 1 407 1 408 1 409 1 410 1 411 1 412 1 413 1 414 1 415 1 416 1 417 1 418 1 419 1 420 1 421 1 422 1 423 1 424 1 425 1 426 1 4...

Page 9: ...442 1 443 1 444 1 445 1 446 1 447 1 448 1 449 1 450 1 451 1 452 1 453 1 454 1 455 1 456 1 457 1 458 1 459 1 460 1 461 1 462 1 463 1 464 1 465 1 466 1 467 1 468 1 PAGE No ISSUE No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 469 1 470 1 471 1 472 1 473 1 474 1 475 1 476 1 477 1 478 1 479 1 480 1 481 1 482 1 483 1 484 1 485 1 486 1 487 1 488 1 489 1 490 1 491 1 492 1 493 1 494 1 495 1 496 1 497 1 498 1 499 1 500 1 501 1 502 1 5...

Page 10: ...518 1 519 1 520 1 521 1 522 1 523 1 524 1 525 1 526 1 527 1 528 1 529 1 530 1 531 1 532 1 533 1 534 1 535 1 536 1 537 1 538 1 539 1 540 1 541 1 542 1 543 1 544 1 PAGE No ISSUE No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 545 1 546 1 547 1 548 1 549 1 550 1 551 1 552 1 553 1 554 1 555 1 556 1 557 1 558 1 559 1 560 1 561 1 562 1 563 1 564 1 565 1 566 1 567 1 568 1 569 1 570 1 571 1 572 1 573 1 574 1 575 1 576 1 577 1 578 1 5...

Page 11: ...594 1 595 1 596 1 597 1 598 1 599 1 600 1 601 1 602 1 603 1 604 1 605 1 606 1 607 1 608 1 609 1 610 1 611 1 612 1 613 1 614 1 615 1 616 1 617 1 618 1 619 1 620 1 PAGE No ISSUE No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 621 1 622 1 623 1 624 1 625 1 626 1 627 1 628 1 629 1 630 1 631 1 632 1 633 1 634 1 635 1 636 1 637 1 638 1 639 1 640 1 641 1 642 1 643 1 644 1 645 1 646 1 647 1 648 1 649 1 650 1 651 1 652 1 653 1 654 1 6...

Page 12: ...670 1 671 1 672 1 673 1 674 1 675 1 676 1 677 1 678 1 679 1 680 1 681 1 682 1 683 1 684 1 685 1 686 1 687 1 688 1 689 1 690 1 691 1 692 1 693 1 694 1 695 1 696 1 PAGE No ISSUE No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 697 1 698 1 699 1 700 1 701 1 702 1 703 1 704 1 705 1 706 1 707 1 708 1 709 1 710 1 711 1 712 1 713 1 714 1 715 1 716 1 717 1 718 1 719 1 720 1 721 1 722 1 723 1 724 1 725 1 726 1 727 1 728 1 729 1 730 1 7...

Page 13: ...746 1 747 1 748 1 749 1 750 1 751 1 752 1 753 1 754 1 755 1 756 1 757 1 758 1 759 1 760 1 761 1 762 1 763 1 764 1 765 1 766 1 767 1 768 1 769 1 770 1 771 1 772 1 PAGE No ISSUE No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 773 1 774 1 775 1 776 1 777 1 778 1 779 1 780 1 781 1 782 1 783 1 784 1 785 1 786 1 787 1 788 1 789 1 790 1 791 1 792 1 793 1 794 1 795 1 796 1 797 1 798 1 799 1 800 1 801 1 802 1 803 1 804 1 805 1 806 1 8...

Page 14: ...822 1 823 1 824 1 825 1 826 1 827 1 828 1 829 1 830 1 831 1 832 1 833 1 834 1 835 1 836 1 837 1 838 1 839 1 840 1 841 1 842 1 843 1 844 1 845 1 846 1 847 1 848 1 PAGE No ISSUE No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 849 1 850 1 851 1 852 1 853 1 854 1 855 1 856 1 857 1 858 1 859 1 860 1 861 1 862 1 863 1 864 1 865 1 866 1 867 1 868 1 869 1 870 1 871 1 872 1 873 1 874 1 875 1 876 1 877 1 878 1 879 1 880 1 881 1 882 1 8...

Page 15: ...898 1 899 1 900 1 901 1 902 1 903 1 904 1 905 1 906 1 907 1 908 1 909 1 910 1 911 1 912 1 913 1 914 1 915 1 916 1 917 1 918 1 919 1 920 1 921 1 922 1 923 1 924 1 PAGE No ISSUE No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 925 1 926 1 927 1 928 1 929 1 930 1 931 1 932 1 933 1 934 1 935 1 936 1 937 1 938 1 939 1 940 1 941 1 942 1 943 1 944 1 945 1 946 1 947 1 948 1 949 1 950 1 951 1 952 1 953 1 954 1 955 1 956 1 957 1 958 1 9...

Page 16: ...77 1 978 1 979 1 980 1 981 1 982 1 983 1 984 1 985 1 986 1 987 1 988 1 989 1 990 1 991 1 992 1 993 1 994 1 995 1 996 1 997 1 998 1 999 1 1000 1 PAGE No ISSUE No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1001 1 1002 1 1003 1 1004 1 1005 1 1006 1 1007 1 1008 1 1009 1 1010 1 1011 1 1012 1 1013 1 1014 1 1015 1 1016 1 1017 1 1018 1 1019 1 1020 1 1021 1 1022 1 1023 1 1024 1 1025 1 1026 1 1027 1 1028 1 1029 1 1030 1 1031 1 1032 1...

Page 17: ... DATE DATE ISSUE 5 ISSUE 6 ISSUE 7 ISSUE 8 DATE DATE DATE DATE NEAX2400 IPX Feature Programming Manual Revision Sheet 15 15 NDA 24297 1039 1 1040 1 1041 1 1042 1 1043 1 1044 1 1045 1 1046 1 PAGE No ISSUE No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 PAGE No ISSUE No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ...

Page 18: ... Transfer 27 A 20 Authorization Code 29 A 21 Automatic Trunk Test 35 A 29 Authorization Code Tie Line Incoming Routes 37 A 30 Automatic Manual Intercom 42 A 52 Account Code Attendant 46 A 53 All Zone Paging 48 A 59 Announcement Service Attendant 50 A 60 Attendant To Attendant Calling 53 A 69 Automatic Idle Return 55 A 78 Automatic Number Identification ANI 56 A 82 Automated Attendant 58 A 98 Answe...

Page 19: ...er Attendant 158 C 11 Call Transfer All Calls 160 C 11D Call Transfer All Calls Dterm 165 C 12 Call Waiting Terminating 172 C 13 Call Waiting Lamp 175 C 14 CCSA Access 177 C 15 Class Of Service Individual 178 C 17 Consultation Hold All Calls 181 C 17D Consultation Hold All Calls Dterm 184 C 20 Centralized Attendant Service CAS 187 C 21 Code Calling Access 193 C 22D Called Station Status Display Dt...

Page 20: ...isplay Station 273 D 6 Digital Display Trunk 275 D 7 Direct In Termination DIT 277 D 8 Direct Inward Dialing DID 280 D 9 Direct Outward Dialing DOD 282 D 10 Distinctive Ringing 284 D 11D Do Not Disturb Dterm 286 D 13D Dial Monitor Dterm 288 D 15 Day Night Class of Service 289 D 16 Direct Digital Interface 292 D 31 Delay Announcement UCD 296 D 32D Dual Hold Dterm 299 D 87 Dial Intercom 301 D 90D De...

Page 21: ...e Line Connection 389 I 4 Individual Trunk Access 392 I 5 Inter position Transfer 394 I 6 Individual Attendant Access 396 I 7D I Hold Indication Dterm 397 I 8D I Use Indication Dterm 398 I 9 Intercom Calling 399 I 10D Intermediate Station Number Display Dterm 402 I 11 Inter Office Off Hook Queuing 403 I 20 Immediate Ringback Tone 406 I 21 Internal Zone Paging 407 L 1 Lamp Check 422 L 3 Line Lockou...

Page 22: ...on 511 M 44 Multiple Call Forwarding All Calls 515 M 47 Manual Signaling 521 M 48 Multi Channel Recording DAT 523 M 84 MF Signaling DID 532 M 85D Message Waiting Indication Dterm 535 M 101 MF ANI to SMDR 536 N 1 Night Connection Fixed 539 N 2 Night Connection Flexible 542 N 3 Non delay Operation 543 N 7D Non exclusive Hold Dterm 545 N 8D Non square Line Assignment Dterm 547 N 17 Night Connection O...

Page 23: ...intenance 623 R 16 Radio Paging 625 R 27 Route Restriction Announcement 629 R 37 RS 464A PAD 630 R 49 Ringer Mute 634 R 51 Route Name Display 635 R 54 Remote Call Forwarding Control 637 S 1 Single Digit Station Calling 640 S 2 Special Dial Tone 641 S 3 Speed Calling System 642 S 3D Speed Calling System Dterm 644 S 4 Splitting 646 S 4D Splitting Dterm 648 S 6 Station Controlled Conference 649 S 7 S...

Page 24: ...hing of TIE Trunks 2 4 Wire 733 T 2 Three Way Calling 736 T 2D Three Way Calling Dterm 738 T 3 TIE Line Access 741 T 5 TIE Line Connection With Pad Control 743 T 6 Toll Denial Toll Diversion 745 T 7 Toll Restriction 3 6 Digit 748 T 8 Trunk Answer from Any Station TAS 756 T 9 Trunk Group Busy Lamp 759 T 10 Trunk to Trunk Connection 761 T 12 Tenant Service 764 T 18D Time Display Dterm 767 T 23 Trunk...

Page 25: ...alling Called Number Display CCIS 857 C 53 Call Processing Indication CCIS 859 C 54 Call Transfer Attendant CCIS 860 C 55 Centralized Billing CCIS 862 C 56 Centralized Day Night Mode Change CCIS 866 C 57 Centralized System Management Report CCIS 868 C 58 Consultation Hold All Calls CCIS 872 C 94 Call Forwarding Assignment Attendant CCIS 875 C 163 CCIS Networking via IP 877 C 167 Centralized Mainte...

Page 26: ...IS 945 M 39 Modem Pooling CCIS 946 M 40 Multiple Call Forwarding All Calls CCIS 949 M 41 Multiple Call Forwarding Busy Line CCIS 960 M 42 Multiple Call Forwarding Don t Answer CCIS 970 M 43 Multiple Console Operation CCIS 981 M 67 Message Center Interface CCIS 983 N 15 Night Connection Fixed CCIS 988 N 16 Night Connection Flexible CCIS 990 N 37 Name Display System CCIS 991 N 46 Number Portability ...

Page 27: ...00 IPX Feature Programming Manual Page x NDA 24297 Issue 1 Feature List Continued CCIS Features Page T 27 Trunk Answer from Any Station CCIS 1039 U 5 Uniform Numbering Plan CCIS 1041 V 7 Voice Call CCIS 1044 ...

Page 28: ... Automatic Recall Dterm X A 15 Announcement Service X X A 16 Alternate Routing X X A 17 Audible Indication Control X A 18 Account Code X X A 19 Attendant Night Transfer X N A 20 Authorization Code X X A 21 Automatic Trunk Test X N A 29 Authorization Code Tie Line Incoming Routes X X A 30 Automatic Manual Intercom X N A 52 Account Code Attendant X X A 53 All Zone Paging X X A 59 Announcement Servic...

Page 29: ...D Call Back Dterm X X C 2 Call Forwarding Busy Line X X C 2D Call Forwarding Busy Line Dterm X X C 3 Call Forwarding Don t Answer X X C 3D Call Forwarding Don t Answer Dterm X X C 5 Call Forwarding All Calls X X C 5D Call Forwarding All Calls Dterm X X C 6 Call Hold X X C 6D Call Hold Dterm X X C 7 Call Pickup Group X X C 7D Call Pickup Group Dterm X X C 8 Call Processing Indication X X C 9 Call Q...

Page 30: ...swer Dterm X X C 28 Call Forwarding All Calls Outside X X C 29 Call Park X X C 30 Call Pickup Direct X X C 31 Call Waiting Originating X X C 33 Consecutive Dialing Attendant X C 59 Called Number Display Attendant X C 60 Call Forwarding Busy Line Outside X X C 62 Consecutive Speed Calling System X C 69 Call Forwarding All Calls Announcement X C 73 Call Back Delayed X X C 74 Call Forwarding Don t An...

Page 31: ...X D 8 Direct Inward Dialing DID X X D 9 Direct Outward Dialing DOD X X D 10 Distinctive Ringing X D 11D Do Not Disturb Dterm X D 13D Dial Monitor Dterm X D 15 Day Night Class of Service X X D 16 Direct Digital Interface X D 31 Delay Announcement UCD X X D 32D Dual Hold Dterm X X D 87 Dial Intercom X N D 90D Delayed Ringing Dterm X N D 114 Delay Announcement Attendant X X D 149 Direct Station Selec...

Page 32: ...erm X F 5D Flexible Ringing Assignment Dterm X F 6 Faulty Trunk Report X F 7 Forced Account Code X F 17 Flexible Assignment of Function Buttons X F 31 Follow Phone X N F 35 Flexible Routing FCCS X X F 36 FCCS Networking via IP X X G 2 Group Calling X X H 1 Hotline X X H 2 House Phone X X H 4D Hands free Answer Back Dterm X H 5D Hands free Dialing Monitoring Dterm X H 9 Hotline Outside X X I 1 Imme...

Page 33: ...ng X N L 1 Lamp Check X L 3 Line Lockout X L 5 Least Cost Routing 3 6 Digit X X L 6 Last Number Called Single Line Station X X L 6D Last Number Called Dterm X L 7D Line Reconnect Same Line Dterm X X L 8D Line Reconnect Other Line Dterm X X L 9D Line Pre selection Dterm X X L 10 LCR Time Of Day Routing X X L 11 Line Load Control X L 20 Line Load Control Automatic X L 21 Line Load Control MAT X L 24...

Page 34: ...ltiple Call Forwarding Don t Answer X X M 26 Message Center Interface X X M 30 Message Waiting Lamp Setting Station X X M 44 Multiple Call Forwarding All Calls X X M 47 Manual Signaling X N M 48 Multi Channel Recording DAT X N M 84 MF Signaling DID X X M 85D Message Waiting Indication Dterm X X M 101 MF ANI to SMDR X X N 1 Night Connection Fixed X X N 2 Night Connection Flexible X X N 3 Non delay ...

Page 35: ...ial Tone X X P 3 Power Failure Transfer X P 4 Pushbutton Calling X P 5 Pushbutton Calling Attendant Only X P 6 Pushbutton to Rotary Conversion X X P 7 Peg Count X X P 9 Priority Call X X P 10 Paging Transfer X X P 11 Periodic Time Indication Tone X P 13D Prime Line Pickup Dterm X P 14D Privacy Dterm X P 15D Privacy On All Lines Dterm X P 18 Privacy Release X N P 30 Priority Paging X N P 57 Pad Loc...

Page 36: ...e X S 3 Speed Calling System X X S 3D Speed Calling System Dterm X X S 4 Splitting X S 4D Splitting Dterm X S 6 Station Controlled Conference X S 7 Station Hunting Circular X X S 8 Station Hunting Secretarial X X S 9 Station Hunting Terminal X X S 10 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR X X S 11 Station to Station Calling X X S 12 Station to Station Calling Operator Assistance X X S 13 Step Call ...

Page 37: ...tput Expansion ANI CPN X X T 1 Tandem Switching of TIE Trunks 2 4 Wire X X T 2 Three Way Calling X X T 2D Three Way Calling Dterm X X T 3 TIE Line Access X X T 5 TIE Line Connection With Pad Control X X T 6 Toll Denial Toll Diversion X X T 7 Toll Restriction 3 6 Digit X X T 8 Trunk Answer from Any Station TAS X T 9 Trunk Group Busy Lamp X X T 10 Trunk to Trunk Connection X X T 12 Tenant Service X ...

Page 38: ... U 3 Universal Sender X V 1 Variable Timing Parameters X V 2 Voice Call X X V 2D Voice Call Dterm X X V 3D Volume Control Dterm X W 1 WATS Access X NEAX2400 IPX Business Features Continued LEGEND X Available Not Applicable N Not Available E Enhanced Or Changed Feature Carried Over To Next Software Series INDEX FEATURE DESCRIPTION NON NETWORK FCCS ...

Page 39: ...rage Hotline CCIS X X X C 44 Call Back CCIS X X X C 45 Call Forwarding All Calls CCIS X X X C 46 Call Forwarding Busy Line CCIS X X X C 47 Call Forwarding Don t Answer CCIS X X X C 48 Call Forwarding Intercept CCIS X X X C 49 Call Forwarding Override CCIS X X X C 50 Call Transfer All Calls CCIS X X X C 51 Called Station Status Display CCIS X X X C 52 Calling Called Number Display CCIS X X X C 53 C...

Page 40: ...istinctive Ringing CCIS X X X D 76D Do Not Disturb Dterm CCIS X X X D 86 Data Hotline CCIS X N N D 91 Dialed Number Display Recall CCIS X X X D 93D Dual Hold Dterm CCIS X X E 8 Executive Right of Way CCIS X X E 9 Elapsed Time Display CCIS X X E 20 E911 ANI Unified Number of Digits CCIS X X X F 12 Flexible Numbering of Stations CCIS X X X H 10D Hands free Answerback Dterm CCIS X X H 11 House Phone ...

Page 41: ...N M 40 Multiple Call Forwarding All Calls CCIS X X X M 41 Multiple Call Forwarding Busy Line CCIS X X X M 42 Multiple Call Forwarding Don t Answer CCIS X X X M 43 Multiple Console Operation CCIS X X X M 67 Message Center Interface CCIS X X X N 15 Night Connection Fixed CCIS X X X N 16 Night Connection Flexible CCIS X X X N 37 Name Display System CCIS X X X N 46 Number Portability CCIS X X X O 11 O...

Page 42: ...mission CCIS X X N S 55 Single Digit Station Calling CCIS X X X S 56 Station Controlled Conference CCIS X X X S 57 Station to Station Calling CCIS X X X S 58 Station to Station Calling Operator Assistance CCIS X X X S 59 Step Call CCIS X X S 60 Synchronous Data Switching CCIS X X X S 73 Supervisory Call CCIS X X N T 26 Toll Restriction 3 6 Digit CCIS X X X T 27 Trunk Answer from Any Station CCIS X...

Page 43: ...NEAX2400 IPX Feature Programming Manual Page xxvi NDA 24297 Issue 1 This page is for your notes ...

Page 44: ...s 1 Camp On is controlled entirely from the ATTENDANT CONSOLE A 3 2 Only one incoming call may be camped on to a particular station at any given time Multiple Camp On is not allowed 3 Calls that remain camped on for longer than the predetermined timing will initiate AUTOMATIC RECALL A 8 See VARIABLE TIMING PARAMETERS V 1 4 The camped on station can answer a Camp On call using the CALL HOLD C 6 fea...

Page 45: ...at prevents a call from terminating directly at a station also prevents a call from waiting at that station 12 DATA LINE SECURITY D 12 Attendant Camp On is denied to a station with this restriction 13 STATION HUNTING S 7 8 9 This feature takes precedence over Attendant Camp On If all stations in the hunt group are busy the call will wait at the called station 14 LINE LOCKOUT L 3 A call is not allo...

Page 46: ...utually exclusive 8 ATTENDANT CAMP ON WITH TONE INDICATION is usually denied to a station connected to Value Added Modules VAM 9 ATTENDANT CAMP ON WITH TONE INDICATION is applicable only with incoming C O or TIE Line calls to a busy station Attendant assisted station to station calls cannot be camped on Programming STEP 1 ASFC Assign to the telephone a Service Feature Class that allows SFI 11 Data...

Page 47: ...ption Service Conditions 1 Conference units are designed to provide adequate amplification but the condition of the Central Office connections will affect transmission 2 Conference extension numbers should be placed in a STATION HUNTING TERMINAL S 9 group with only the pilot number being published 3 If the conference leader connected to the conference unit dials digit during the course of the conf...

Page 48: ...PA CFTB card Circuit 0 of all PA CFTBs to be used for 8 party conference should be put into a Circular Hunt ASHC STEP 3 ASFC Assign SFI 11 Data Line Security as 0 FCCS Programming This data setting describes only the additional or replacement commands used to activate FCCS services When used as an FCCS feature these commands replace the non network commands for example AAED is replaced by AAEDN No...

Page 49: ...1 IMG System 16 4 IMG System 60 IPX U System 60 5 The ATTENDANT CONSOLE is equipped with a digital time display 6 The ATTENDANT CONSOLE is equipped with a numerical call waiting display 7 When answering a CALL FORWARDING C 2 3 5 25 call the Attendant can identify the called telephone number on display area instead of the trunk number by assigned system data 8 The Desk Console for Business System c...

Page 50: ...Call Waiting lamp display System Data 2 Index 8 and 9 Bit 0 7 FCCS Programming This data setting describes only the additional or replacement commands used to activate FCCS services When used as an FCCS feature these commands replace the non network commands for example AAED is replaced by AAEDN Note that the data setting for FCCS service varies depending on the node Note 1 STEP 1 ASYDL This data ...

Page 51: ...arious service features They are as follows a Pushbutton Calling P 4 b Pushbutton Calling Attendant only P 5 c Rotary Dial Calling R 5 3 The ATTENDANT KEY PAD generates DC signals which in turn are converted to either DP or DTMF signals by the Attendant interface circuit 4 The key pad consists of twelve 12 keys used to generate digits 0 through 9 plus the and keys Programming ASYD System Data 2 In...

Page 52: ... where answer supervision is returned on TRUNK TO TRUNK CONNECTIONS T 10 the Attendant can override the busy condition by using the ATTENDANT OVERRIDE A 7 feature 2 TRUNK TO TRUNK CONNECTION T 10 Privacy is automatically disabled for TRUNK TO TRUNK calls if the release signal is not provided from the distant end 3 SPLITTING S 4 The Privacy feature works with the SPLITTING S 4 feature to cause auto...

Page 53: ...to incoming trunk calls extended to an unanswered station or busy station Camped On 7 Calls that are held by the Attendant using the HOLD key cannot be released from the ATTENDANT CONSOLE A 3 These calls remain on the switched loop until they are either extended by the Attendant or abandoned by the calling party 8 After the ATTENDANT LOOP RELEASE is activated the Attendant cannot interact with the...

Page 54: ...Attendant Loop Release A 6 Interactions cont d 6 Calls processed via SERIAL CALL S 15 are not released from the Attendant Console These calls remain in the loop until completion Programming ASYD System Data 2 Index 2 Bit 5 Assign as data 1 Assign on a per tenant basis ...

Page 55: ...s feature cannot be activated when the connected station trunk is a dialing b connected to a three way connection c when a PRIVACY P 14D P 15D feature is activated d connected to a route programmed for Line Trunk Privacy CDN 44 PRV e listening to a tone Dial Reorder Service Set Busy Ringback f protected by DATA LINE SECURITY D 12 g being connected to an Attendant loop h activating any conflicting ...

Page 56: ...ANT CAMP ON WITH TONE INDICATION A 1 If the called trunk is camped on to a busy station e SERIAL CALL S 15 ATTENDANT OVERRIDE is denied to the parties held on the console f ATTENDANT INTERACTION During the normal operation of PBX features situations may arise whereby a trunk may be connected to an ATTENDANT CONSOLE A 3 While the trunk is connected to the ATTENDANT CONSOLE A 3 or is in queue at an ...

Page 57: ...a busy station line when the user activates this feature Programming STEP 1 ASYD System Data 1 Index 78 Bit 0 1 System Data 1 Index 60 Bit 5 Is the two burst Warning Tone to be disabled No Yes System Data 1 Index 68 Bit 4 Trunk select TKSL key must be enabled Assign data 1 System Data 2 Index 0 Bit 3 assign as data 1 System Data 1 Index 158 timer between tones STEP 2 ATRK Assign the LEN as Route 9...

Page 58: ...PBX via a CENTRALIZED ATTENDANT SERVICE C 20 CAS position 2 System Data 2 Index 6 Bit 7 On a per tenant basis allow this Bit for CALL FORWARD DON T ANSWER C 2 via the Attendant Console During this operation the call will ring at the called station for the time interval set in System Data 1 Index 141 ASYD 145 must be longer than 141 The call is then forwarded and rings at the forwarded station for ...

Page 59: ... call that uses AUTOMATIC RECALL keeps one of the Attendant Console switched loops busy Since there are six loops per Attendant console the maximum use of this feature is limited to that number The AUTOMATIC RECALL interval normally set for 30 seconds is a system option System Data 1 Index 145 and can be varied from two seconds to two minutes in increments of two seconds System Data 1 Index 73 Bit...

Page 60: ...The signal occurs whether the Dterm is on hook or off hook 4 When an unattended transfer returns to the originator of the transfer the Dterm will ring normally for 30 seconds VARIABLE TIMING PARAMETERS V 1 if the release signal is not provided from the distant end The LCD displays Transferred Transferring Station Station Trunk Note When the telephone number of the transferred transferring station ...

Page 61: ...on a per announcement trunk basis 5 Before connection to the announcement machine is made the system can be programmed to send ringback tone 6 When this feature is activated from a tie line an answer supervision signal will be sent to the far end PBX 7 ANNOUNCEMENT SERVICE can be provided for a maximum of 127 trunks which include the announcement trunks for CALL FORWARDING INTERCEPT ANNOUNCEMENT C...

Page 62: ...sign announcement equipment Dead Level Assign TN Tenant Number EQP Announcement Equipment Number 0 Dead Level For example level 8 is not assigned an announcement is returned rather than a reorder tone RT TK Route and Trunk number of the trunk connected to the announcement equipment Unused Number Assign TN Tenant Number EQP 1 Unused Number For example EXT 7836 is not in the system An Announcement i...

Page 63: ...d Level 1 Unused Number 2 15 Announcement service C Duration of Connection 0 Disconnection occurs in 30 seconds 1 Connection is held until the station releases See the requirements of the application for the announcement equipment For Dead level applications data 0 is assigned R Sending RBT 0 1 Yes No A Answer Signal Sending Answer from the incoming trunk 0 No Yes Normally assign data 1 M Multiple...

Page 64: ...occurs only when the dialed code accesses the first choice trunk group in the ALTERNATE ROUTING list 9 The outgoing call to the trunk belonging to the different node in the FCCS network is available For more detailed information see the NEAX2400 IPX Fusion Network System Manual Interactions 1 ALTERNATE ROUTING may be affected by TOLL RESTRICTION 3 6 DIGIT T 7 For example two routes of WATS provide...

Page 65: ...NEAX2400 IPX Feature Programming Manual Page 22 NDA 24297 Issue 1 A 16 Alternate Routing FCCS Programming Refer to the NEAX2400 IPX Fusion Network System Manual ...

Page 66: ... 3 Operating Procedure The Attendant Console is equipped with a volume control that can raise or lower the internal speaker level The volume control is located on the left side of the Attendant Console The audible indication may also be turned off when required Service Conditions Each Attendant Console can adjust the audible indications to the ambient noise level or completely disable this feature...

Page 67: ... of account codes used per system Note Service set tone after the feature access code can be eliminated by system data System data is common for ACCOUNT CODE AUTHORIZATION CODE A 20 and FORCED ACCOUNT CODE F 7 2 A user can enter an ACCOUNT CODE of fewer digits than the maximum length defined and indicate the end of entry by pressing the key 3 The user may decide if ACCOUNT CODE follows the AUTHORI...

Page 68: ...Busy B applicable to any service feature assigned to this level Assign NND in accordance with a predetermined numbering plan STEP 3 ASPA For SRV SSC Service Code SID 41 assign the access code Assign the number of digits in the ASPA service feature access code plus the number of digits that will appear in the ACCOUNT CODE for the NND parameter When ACCOUNT CODE operates with AUTHORIZATION CODE A 20...

Page 69: ...any service feature assigned to this level Assign NND in accordance with a predetermined numbering plan STEP 2 ASPAL For SRV SSC Service Code SID 41 assign the access code Assign the number of digits in the ASPAL service feature access code plus the number of digits that will appear in the ACCOUNT CODE for the NND parameter When ACCOUNT CODE operates with AUTHORIZATION CODE A 20 the above assignme...

Page 70: ...ned as a Night Station for ATTENDANT NIGHT TRANSFER 3 If the Night Station is set for CALL FORWARDING ALL CALLS C 5 operator calls terminated to that station will be forwarded to the designated station 4 The Night Station can be assigned as a station in a STATION HUNTING S 7 8 9 group 5 One Night Station per tenant is available in multi tenant arrangements 6 The Night Station can set CALL FORWARDI...

Page 71: ...telephone number cannot be used must be Physical Station Number Interactions 1 There can be only one ATTENDANT NIGHT TRANSFER station per tenant 2 The ATTENDANT NIGHT TRANSFER telephone number must be programmed using the MAINTENANCE ADMINISTRATION TERMINAL M 18 MAT This telephone number may be the same number as the NIGHT CONNECTION FIXED FLEXIBLE N 1 N 2 number but each must be individually assi...

Page 72: ...e The feature access code for AUTHORIZATION CODE will be a maximum of three digits With an ACCOUNT CODE A 18 1 Lift the handset and receive dial tone 2 Enter the feature Access Code and receive service set tone 3 Enter the AUTHORIZATION CODE and receive second service set tone 4 Enter the ACCOUNT CODE A 18 and receive dial tone 5 Enter the number to be called Procedure 2 only for LEAST COST ROUTIN...

Page 73: ...also effective with CONSULTATION HOLD C 17 Special dial tone is received instead of dial tone after AUTHORIZATION CODE 6 Procedure 2 is effective only for LEAST COST ROUTING 3 6 DIGIT L 5 calls 7 Stations must be assigned for Procedure 1 and 2 via CLASS OF SERVICE INDIVIDUAL C 5 programming in system data 8 In Procedure 1 system data can determine on a per tenant basis whether or not an ACCOUNT CO...

Page 74: ...dant Console 11 PEG COUNTS P 7 of invalid AUTHORIZATION CODES are not available 12 AUTHORIZATION CODES can be dialed by a user when establishing a CONSULTATION HOLD C 17 connection 13 For Procedure 2 LCR S must be provided Programming Note There are two methods of Authorization Code assignment Full Implementation and the Checksum methods In the Full Implementation method the whole AUTHORIZATION CO...

Page 75: ...obtained as any whole number greater than 4 that ends with a 7 the decimal value as determined in System Data 1 Index 14 Bits 0 to 3 In AATC 26428 has been assigned In System Data 1 Index 13 Bits 4 and 1 were chosen 26428 8 6 14 The decimal value of Index 14 Bits 4 7 is 3 14 N 23 N 9 23 is obtained as any whole number greater than 14 that ends with a 3 the decimal value determined in System Data 1...

Page 76: ...m method STEP 6 AATC Assign the TN Digit Code DC the actual code itself the AUTHORIZATION CODE RESTRICTION ACR as data 1 and Service Feature Class SFC and Route Restriction Class RSC If ACR is assigned as data 2 Allowed RSC and SFC parameters are not programmed SFC parameters are not operational STEP 7 LATC List up all the AUTHORIZATION CODES This is the simplest way to determine what digits have ...

Page 77: ... List up all the AUTHORIZATION CODES This is the simplest way to determine what digits have been added to the system with the Checksum method This is not required if the Checksum method is not used Note When using ASYDL or ASYDN to program an FCCS feature the basic programming of ASYD is required in addition to ASYDL or ASYDN ...

Page 78: ...e printed out after all trunks have been tested Service Conditions 1 Additional hardware required consists of one LTST PH M16 card one 8TLT card and one line circuit and LTST cable 2 Trunks are tested in conjunction with the connecting office through the selected trunk on a one at a time basis The following different trunk functions can be tested on all trunks in a specified group a trunk selectio...

Page 79: ...FI 39 Individual Trunk Selection STEP 5 ASDT A Test Station must be assigned using the RSC and SFC previously constructed This station will be a TEC 3 STEP 6 ATTD Assignment of Trunk Test Data is used to order the ATT STEP 7 TTLC This command will designate the Start route and the End route and trunk numbers It will be these trunks that will be tested Assign the following TEST TEST TYPE 1 IMMEDIAT...

Page 80: ...he AUTHORIZATION CODE is entered and validated 5 Through programming the system defines the AUTHORIZATION CODE A 20 to be required for all TIE Line incoming calls or when a restriction is encountered This is assigned on a per tenant basis Note There are two methods of AUTHORIZATION CODE assignment Full Implementation and the Checksum In the Full Implementation method the whole AUTHORIZATION CODE i...

Page 81: ...NND command must be programmed for senderized TIE Lines If other services such as STATION MESSAGE DETAIL RECORDING S 10 and LEAST COST ROUTING L 5 the AMND command will be programmed If digit translation is required go to the ASTP and AOSP command 15 MISCELLANEOUS TRUNK RESTRICTION M 3 Restrictions to TIE trunks are determined by the Route Service Class RSC assigned to the AUTHORIZATION CODE Progr...

Page 82: ...9 23 is obtained as any whole number greater than 14 that ends with a 3 the decimal value determined in System Data 1 Index 14 Bits 4 7 The AUTHORIZATION CODE will be 26428 39 Note Digits 39 determined by the Checksum method will be unique to the AUTHORIZATION CODE 26428 26428 will not be followed by any digits other than 39 ASYD System Data 1 Index 43 Bit 2 is service set tone sent after AUTHORIZ...

Page 83: ...programmed SFC parameters are not operational STEP 7 LATC List all the AUTHORIZATION CODES This is the simplest way to determine what digits have been added to the system with the Checksum method This is not required if the Checksum method is not used TIE Line Programming STEP 8 ARTD Assign the TIE Line routes as shown below RT 1 1 OSGS 2 2 ONSG 3 5 TF 1 6 TCL 1 7 L T 1 8 RLP 2 15 LSG 1 STEP 9 ATR...

Page 84: ...umber dialed assign data 1 to the AH parameter when programming the LCR S access code Therefore operating Procedure 2 is only available with LEAST COST ROUTING 3 6 DIGIT L 5 STEP 3 LATCL List all the AUTHORIZATION CODES This is the simplest way to determine what digits have been added to the system with the Checksum method This is not required if the Checksum method is not used TIE Line Programmin...

Page 85: ... station To answer an Automatic Intercom call 1 The AICM key will flash indicating an incoming INTERCOM call The called station will also ring according to the preassigned system parameters 2 If the called station is already engaged in a conversation with a non INTERCOM call the station may press the AICM key after pressing the HOLD key Ringing will stop To bridge into an Automatic Intercom call 1...

Page 86: ...NTERCOM group can be assigned as both a Manual and Automatic INTERCOM member of two different groups 4 No more than one connection can be established at the same time in one INTERCOM group 5 A three party conference can be established in an INTERCOM group if INTERCOM Bridge service is available If a fourth party tries to activate INTERCOM Bridge service the connection will be denied 6 A maximum of...

Page 87: ...amming STEP 1 ASYD System Data 1 Index 59 Bit 7 Is AICM MICM in service 0 1 No Yes System Data 1 Index 69 Bit 6 Is a Warning Tone required when creating a 3 Way AICM MICM call 0 1 No Yes System Data 3 Index 3 Assign the data 20H for the burst ringing for Automatic Intercom if necessary System Data 3 Index 7 Assign the Ringing Pattern for Automatic Intercom if necessary STEP 2 AICD Assign the follo...

Page 88: ...es RG parameter PRI Form of Line Preference 0 3 KYN Key Number 1 40 KYI Service Index 0 Key not used 1 Feature Key 2 Multi line Key KD Kind of Line 0 Multi line 1 INTERCOM Line ICM Kind of INTERCOM 0 AUTOMATIC INTERCOM 1 MANUAL INTERCOM 2 DIAL INTERCOM If Manual Signaling is used assign a programmable Line Feature key as Type Function MANUAL SIGNALING KEY 60 Note AKYD A M Data must be deleted befo...

Page 89: ...ts than the maximum length defined indicating the end of entry by the pound key Programming STEP 1 ASYD System Data 1 Index 43 bit 2 Is service set tone sent after the ASPA access code for ACCOUNT CODE 0 1 No Yes Assign data 1 System Data 2 Index 3 bit 4 Is ACCOUNT CODE used with Authorization Code 0 1 No Yes System Data 1 Index 93 bit 6 0 STEP 2 ANPD Reserve a number level for service feature acc...

Page 90: ...twork commands for example AAED is replaced by AAEDN Note that the data setting for FCCS service varies depending on the node Note STEP 1 ANPDL Reserve a number level for service feature access Assign Connection Index CI N H B Normal Hooking and Busy applicable to any service feature assigned to this level Assign NND in accordance with a predetermined numbering plan STEP 2 ASPAL For SRV SSC Servic...

Page 91: ...akers must be customer provided 7 Where TENANT SERVICE T 12 is provided separate access codes and hardware should be provided for each tenant 8 The ALL ZONE PAGING access code is three digits maximum Outgoing Call Alternative OGCA 9 Both the COT card and the TLT card can be used as the paging trunk 10 Loop signaling is the recommended signaling type 11 This feature can be activated via FCCS Intera...

Page 92: ...ection Programming STEP 1 ASYD System Data 1 Index 73 Bits 0 1 For the Page function only assign Data 00 STEP 2 ARTD Assign the Paging route as shown below RT 1 1 OSGS 2 2 ONSG 3 5 TF 1 6 TCL 8 7 L T 1 8 RLP 2 15 LSG 1 STEP 3 ATRK Assign the LEN Number Paging trunk Route Number Trunk Number and Tenant Number STEP 4 MBTK Assign the Make Idle status to the Paging Trunks STEP 5 ANPD Assign a level fo...

Page 93: ...mmed to return ringback tone This is selected on a per tenant and per announcement basis 5 This service can be provided for a maximum of 127 announcements per tenant which includes the announcement trunks for ANNOUNCEMENT SERVICE A 15 CALL FORWARDING ALL CALLS ANNOUNCEMENT C 69 CALL FORWARDING INTERCEPT ANNOUNCEMENT C 25 6 ANNOUNCEMENT SERVICE is provided to FCCS nodes that have no announcement tr...

Page 94: ...nouncement Service Assign TN Tenant Number EQP 2 15 RT TK Route and Trunk number of the trunk connected to the announcement equipment C Duration of Connection 0 1 Disconnection occurs in 30 seconds Connection is held until the station releases See the requirements of the application for the announcement equipment For Dead Level applications data 0 is assigned R Sending RBT 0 1 sending RBT not send...

Page 95: ...applications data 0 is assigned R Sending RBT 0 1 Yes No A Answer Signal Sending Answer from the incoming trunk 0 No Yes Normally assign data 1 M Multiple Connection 0 1 Single Connection Multiple Connection LGRT Logical Route TK Trunk Number Not necessary for M 1 STEP 3 ARRCN This data must be assigned to the NCN Release the restriction between the terminating trunk and the announcement trunk STE...

Page 96: ...an be designated for receipt of TF INTER POSITION TRANSFER CALLs and ATTENDANT TO ATTENDANT CALLs 7 An Attendant cannot extend ATTENDANT TO ATTENDANT CALL to any other destination 8 With an Individual Attendant Identification Number an Attendant Console Desk Console within an FCCS network can be specified 9 When the operator call code is dialed the call is routed to the predetermined Attendant Con...

Page 97: ...rogramming cont d STEP 3 ALGNN This command must be set to the NCN STEP 4 ASATN This command must be set to the NCN Assign identification numbers to the specific Attendant Consoles Note When using ASYDL or ASYDN to program an FCCS feature the basic programming of ASYD is required in addition to ASYDL or ASYDN ...

Page 98: ...according to System Data 1 Index 401 Bits 0 through 3 When the data is set to 0 no tone is connected For stations not allowed this service reorder tone is connected 30 seconds after Interactions 1 OFF HOOK ALARM O 6 AUTOMATIC IDLE RETURN cannot be activated when OFF HOOK ALARM has already been set However when the transferred station assigned by OFF HOOK ALARM is in the LINE LOCKOUT L 3 status or ...

Page 99: ... OF DIGITS E 18 is NXX XXXX where NXX determined for each system XXXX telephone number 3 Sending digit patterns in Enhanced 911 E911 ANI UNIFIED NUMBER OF DIGITS E 18 a Outgoing call from a station If ANI data is assigned KP 0 NXX XXXX ST If ANI data is not assigned KP 2 ST b Outgoing call from ATTENDANT CONSOLE A 3 Individual ATTENDANT CONSOLE A 3 access available and ANI data is assigned KP 0 NX...

Page 100: ...r and the number of digits of the caller s number When AT 0 RT Route Number AT 0 1 STA outgoing ATT outgoing CC 0 KT Expansion of Station Number Length 0 1 OFF ON STNL Station Number Length When KT 1 SKIP Call Originator Digit to be Skipped ADD ANI Information Additional Number of Digits DC ANI Sending Number Note When 0 has been assigned to parameter KT and when the Station Numbers used consist o...

Page 101: ...e calling party hears ringback tone from the NEAX2400 IPX 4 When a Ringdown incoming call encounters announcement trunk busy blockout for the first announcement status the calling party hears ringback tone from the originating office until the call is connected to the announcement trunk When a TIE Line incoming call encounters announcement trunk busy blockout for the first announcement status the ...

Page 102: ...en tandem connection or AUTHORIZATION CODE A 20 service is required this service is activated by changing the incoming routes to that of REMOTE ACCESS TO SYSTEM R 2 12 If the calling party does not dial the desired telephone number after the first announcement the call can be transferred to the Attendant after a predetermined period of time prepause time out and the calling party receives ringback...

Page 103: ...ign the Announcement Equipment for AUTOMATED ATTENDANT Announcement Equipment for sending the first announcement EQP 34 C 0 R 1 A 1 M 0 Announcement Equipment for sending the second announcement Note 1 EQP 35 C 0 R 1 A 1 M _ Note 2 Note 1 When ASYD SYS1 Index 7 b 5 0 assign the Announcement Equipment to send the second announcement Note 2 When selecting M 0 Single 1 Multi for the second announceme...

Page 104: ...RT 1 1 OSGS 2 4 INSG 2 or 7 6 TCL 4 Assign the route data of the Digital Announcement Trunk STEP 2 AAEDN Assign the Announcement Equipment for AUTOMATED ATTENDANT Announcement Equipment for sending the first announcement EQP 34 C 0 R 1 A 1 M 0 Announcement Equipment for sending the second announcement EQP 35 C 0 R 1 A 1 M _ STEP 3 ARRCN Cancel the restrictions on the trunk route for AUTOMATED ATTE...

Page 105: ...he parties formerly connected to the Attendant remain connected to each other 3 The LEDs of ICI key and the ATND key light The Attendant is connected to the incoming call Service Conditions 1 Activation of this service is determined in individual two party call or three way call system data 2 When the Attendant is engaged in a two party call a If there is no idle loop when the Attendant presses AN...

Page 106: ...all 2 The Attendant will be released from the current call and attendant consoles will be idle 3 No change 4 AUTOMATIC RECALL A 8 is available for a call held by the Attendant Programming ASYD System 1 Index 246 Bit 0 Answer Hold Attendant from a two party connection 0 1 Out In Service System 1 Index 246 Bit 1 Answer Hold Attendant from a three way connection 0 1 Out In Service Assign the data of ...

Page 107: ...PEAT Dterm S 24D features keep dialed information but display Xs when these feature keys are pressed 3 SPEED CALLING SYSTEM Dterm S 3D feature keeps dialed digits and all digits are displayed at the same time when this feature key is pressed 4 ACCOUNT CODE A 18 is displayed on Dterm 5 This feature applies only to the calling party s Dterm 6 This feature applies for the following dialing procedures...

Page 108: ... incoming ringdown trunk and Direct Inward Dialing D 8 DID Listed Directory Number L 24 LDN trunk calls directed to the ATTENDANT CONSOLE A 3 2 This feature is available only while the system is in Day mode not available for Night mode 3 For DIRECT IN TERMINATION D 7 DIT calls this feature is available when the receiving station has set CALL FORWARDING ALL CALLS BUSY LINE C 5 2 to the Attendant 4 ...

Page 109: ...erflow capabilities when CSI 4 3 ATTENDANT OVERFLOW and DELAY ANNOUNCEMENT ATTENDANT D 114 are mutually exclusive features DELAY ANNOUNCEMENT ATTENDANT D 114 takes priority over ATTENDANT OVERFLOW A 105 Programming STEP 1 ASYD System Data 1 Index 140 This determines the timer value at which the incoming call will overflow to the destination station System Data 2 Index 15 Bit 1 Set to data 1 This e...

Page 110: ... Point Code Only ALGSN LENS Line Equipment Numbers of the destination Station Number TYPE 2 STN is used to specify the Telephone station number UGN User Group Number Fixed to 1 TELN Telephone Number max 16 digit FPC Fusion Point Code Only ALGSN TN Tenant Number 1 255 STN Station Number of destination STEP 7 ACSIL Assign overflowing destination of Attendant Console LGRT Logical Route Number 1 899 T...

Page 111: ... the conference by the outside parties trunks can be continued In the other cases as when the station is not a Dterm RETAIN CONF key is not assigned or there is only one outside party connected the conference trunk is released automatically When conference has multiple outside parties trunks only Dterms can keep multiple outside parties still in conference but it releases by pressing RETAIN CONF k...

Page 112: ...e following cases 8 party conference service via CONF key is not available a when the service is not set in system data b when the service is restricted c when the 8 party conference trunk is not assigned not accommodated or busy In the cases above if Three Way Calling service is available and the three way conference trunk is provided this service is provided by pressing the CONF key The LCD of t...

Page 113: ... second digit of the pilot number System data 1 index 433 bits 0 3 Assign the third digit of the pilot number System data 1 index 433 bits 4 7 Assign the fourth digit of the pilot number System data 1 index 434 bits 0 3 Assign the fifth digit of the pilot number Note 1 through 5 digits may be used assign the bits accordingly If a digit is not used assign those bits as 0 If a bit is used for 0 see ...

Page 114: ...ion to each soft key STEP 8 ARSC assign Restriction data between routes and the RSC used by the CFTB STEP 9 ATNR assign restriction data between tenants FCCS Programming This data setting describes only the additional or replacement commands used to activate FCCS services When used as an FCCS feature these commands replace the non network commands for example AAED is replaced by AAEDN Note that th...

Page 115: ... REPEAT S 24D service The calling number received may not be saved 8 A maximum of 256 calls per LP are available at the same time 9 When an incoming call is sent as a test the LCD does not display both the number and the name 10 Display conditions are shown below Also the ID display of ISDN service has the same conditions a It is assigned by system data in which display of the calling number or na...

Page 116: ...g Name has priority System Data 1 Index 390 Bit 2 When using Dterm 2 line LCD the lower LCD can be used for displaying Caller ID 0 1 Out In Service When Calling Number is output to SMDR the following expanded format is used Time Display 1234567 ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVW Calling Number Calling Name Time Display 4567890 DEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ Calling Number Calling Name Time Display ABCDEFG 123456789...

Page 117: ...s that allows SFI 146 to analog stations allowed this service STEP 3 ARTD Assign route class data for the C O trunk 15 LSG 3 50 DPLY 1 When Calling Number is output to SMDR 10 SMDR 1 STEP 4 ATRK Assign trunk data for the C O trunk STEP 5 MBTK Cancel the make busy of the C O trunk STEP 6 AKYD Assign Call ID Change Display key Assign Type Function 113 STEP 7 ADSL Assign ID CHG key SN 4 Communication...

Page 118: ... a call terminates via another station the number of intermediate station will be sent After that station hangs up the number of the originating party will not be sent CALLER ID of the first termination is only sent 4 If a calling number exceeds 10 digits the first or last exceeded digits will be deleted according to system data 5 This service is not provided if a call does not terminate directly ...

Page 119: ...CALL PICKUP GROUP C 7 C 7D CALL WAITING TERMINATING C 12 CALL WAITING ORIGINATING C 31 EXECUTIVE RIGHT OF WAY E 1 Also the caller ID notification is not provided to the boss station for Boss Secretary service i The system starts to count for No Answer timer when the caller ID notification process is complete j The incoming call using this service is also counted as the maximum number of calls term...

Page 120: ...ending Modem signal RT 937 ATRK should be accommodated in the all nodes where the stations providing the service is installed Interactions 1 The following circuit cards are required for this service PA 8RSTY PA 16LCBY Note Note 16LCBY and 8RSTY must be used together for Caller ID 2 Only one route number can be assigned for each sender and register in a PA 8RSTY card 3 This service is not provided ...

Page 121: ... will provide visual indication of the status of each station in the selected group 2 For 4 digit telephone numbers the digital display will show the first two digits of the group being monitored 1100 s 1200 s etc Lamps 00 99 will provide visual indication of the status of each station in the selected group 3 For an Attendant Console the Busy Lamp Field BLF display is applicable for 2 through 5 di...

Page 122: ...etc whose first digit is the same number In this case only a station whose Number of Necessary Digits NND values are the same in the ASPA and ANPD command can be displayed in the Busy Lamp Field on ATTs The remaining stations which do not meet the above condition cannot be displayed Programming for the IPX U BLF data can be collected transmitted from to all the Local Nodes by the circuit card DLMX...

Page 123: ...4297 Issue 1 B 2 Busy Lamp Field Flexible Programming cont d STEP 5 ANPD ANPDN Assign the Busy Lamp Field Display Activation on an Attendant Console BLF 1ST DC Dial Code Station Number BLF 1 BLF is in service Note Use ANPDN for IPX U Use ANPD for IPX UMG ...

Page 124: ...nt can monitor the connection BV lamp lights 3 Press the TALK key A Warning Tone is sent and a three way call is established TALK lamp lights If the called station is a Dterm the LCD displays OPE BV for 5 seconds then CONF 4 Press the CANCEL key to disengage Attendant returns to the incoming call The originally connected parties remain connected Service Conditions 1 This feature may be used during...

Page 125: ...ons in a Hunt Group are busy BUSY VERIFICATION takes place on the dialed station 9 The BUSY VERIFICATION feature is assigned to Attendant Consoles only 10 ATTENDANT LOCKOUT A 5 The Attendant is prevented from busy verifying a station line that is connected to a loop held on the ATTENDANT CONSOLE A 3 Because the LOCKOUT feature applies only to calls held on the Attendant Console loop BUSY VERIFICAT...

Page 126: ... 23 The node accommodating the Attendant Console requires CFT function for FCCS service Interactions 1 This feature is allowed whenever the destination telephone set is engaged in any state other than a a three way connection b a PRIVACY P 14D 15D feature is activated c connected to a route programmed to have Line Trunk Privacy CDN 44 PRV d listening to a tone dial tone reorder tone service set to...

Page 127: ...hen this feature is used 11 DICTATION ACCESS D 3 Dictation Access trunks cannot be busy verified by the Attendant The Attendant will hear the reorder tone 12 PAGING ACCESS P 1 Paging Access trunks cannot be busy verified by the Attendant Programming STEP 1 ASYD System Data 1 Index 60 bit 5 Is the two burst Warning Tone to be disabled 0 1 No Yes System Data 1 Index 68 bit 4 Trunk Select TKSL key mu...

Page 128: ...up boss speaks with Trunk B Case 2 1 Boss presses the ANSWER key and converses with secretary Trunk A is placed on hold 2 Boss presses 201 key and converses with Trunk B secretary hears reorder tone 3 Boss presses ANSWER to reconnect with Trunk A Trunk B is placed on hold Case 3 1 If boss does not respond to 3 bursts of waiting tone secretary presses RECALL key to resume talking to Trunk B Case 4 ...

Page 129: ... E 1 E 1D NON EXCLUSIVE HOLD Dterm N 7D OFF HOOK QUEUING O 7 OUTGOING TRUNK QUEUING O 2 O 2D PRIVACY Dterm P 14D PRIVACY RELEASE P 18 THREE WAY CALLING T 2 T 2D VOICE CALL Dterm V 2D 11 FCCS link is not available for this feature Programming STEP 1 ASYD System Data 2 Index 1 bits 0 1 Consultation Hold allowed or denied 00 denied 01 Originating and Terminating Calls allowed Tandem Call Denied 11 Al...

Page 130: ...L HOLD 10 The operation of TRANSFER key and access code is also available Optional Assign to a programmable Line Feature key a CALL WAITING ORIGINATING C 31 key Assign Type Function CALL WAITING 4 The operation of TRANSFER key and access code is also available STEP 6 ADSL Assign SN 5 Consultation Hold and FKY 10 Call Hold C Hld and FKY 4 Call Waiting CW This command is required only for assigning ...

Page 131: ...VICE DISPLAY S 25 of hot line 5 This hot line feature is applicable for intra office connection within the system 6 My Line of a Dterm cannot be assigned as a Hot Line feature button 7 Destinations must be stations or an ATTENDANT CONSOLE A 3 of the system 8 When a destination is an ATTENDANT CONSOLE A 3 the Hot Line call terminates as an ATND call 9 ATTENDANT CAMP ON A 1 EXECUTIVE RIGHT OF WAY E ...

Page 132: ... activated via FCCS 18 Only the station assigned a telephone number is available for the station assignment when activating this feature via FCCS 19 The station the Attendant Console Desk Console operator call and the trunk can be a destination for Hotline 20 When Call Forwarding All Calls Busy Line Don t Answer service has been set to the called station these features are available for the call t...

Page 133: ...n used as an FCCS feature these commands replace the non network commands for example AAED is replaced by AAEDN Note that the data setting for FCCS service varies depending on the node AHLSN This data must be assigned to the NCN UGN User Group Number TELN Telephone Number of the calling party TYPE 1 the called party is a station CON UGN User Group Number of the called party CON TELN Telephone Numb...

Page 134: ...4 Secretary will not hear service set tone Procedure 2 1 Secretary releases the call after taking the message and presses the RECALL key Dial tone is heard 2 Secretary presses the MW SET line feature key LCD will indicate MW SET Secretary will hear service set tone 3 MW is set to Boss station Call Indicator Lamp or the MW display is ON To cancel Message Waiting indication Procedure 1 1 While remai...

Page 135: ... ATTENDANT CONSOLE A 3 and any other station at the same time The controlled station cannot identify the controlling party 9 The MW indication on the boss station appears as follows 10 The LCD on the secretary s station displays the following messages 11 MW cannot be activated on a virtual line The LCD displays MW REST and the reorder tone is heard when activation from a virtual line is attempted ...

Page 136: ...cation connected to the interrupted party to go off when the interrupting party presses the MW CANCEL button When using a soft key press the MW OFF to cancel 16 FCCS link is not available for this feature Interactions 1 Use of the following features has no effect on this feature BOSS SECRETARY MW LAMP CONTROL can be set cancelled to a station that has previously activated any of the following feat...

Page 137: ...SET 9 and a MW Lamp Cancel key Type Function BOSS SECRETARY MSG WAIT CNCL 11 STEP 2 ADSL Assign SN 4 Communication in Progress when operating Procedure 1 SN 2 Originating when operating Procedure 2 Assign FKY 9 MW Lamp Set key MWSET and FKY 11 MW Lamp Cancel key MWOFF This command is required only for assigning the function to each soft key STEP 3 ASFC Assign the stations a feature class that allo...

Page 138: ... To transfer from Dterm to a single line telephone 1 Call terminates to Boss line 2 Secretary answers the call on the sub line of Secretary s Dterm 3 Secretary presses the line key of the answered call Boss station rings LCD displays Secretary 4 Boss answers the call 5 Secretary hangs up calling party talks to Boss To cancel 1 Secretary presses the line key 2 Secretary talks to the calling party S...

Page 139: ... calling party is not available 10 A BOSS SECRETARY TRANSFER call cannot be picked up by CALL PICKUP C 7 30 11 Name Display service is not available when the secretary is calling the boss or when the secretary is talking to the boss 12 When the boss is using a Dterm the boss must always press the line key in order to answer the call transferred from the secretary 13 FCCS link is not available for ...

Page 140: ... station 5 BROKERAGE HOT LINE OUTSIDE uses SPEED CALLING SYSTEM S 3 memory The total number of BROKERAGE HOT LINE OUTSIDE destinations is limited by the capacity of the SPEED CALLING SYSTEM S 3 6 ATTENDANT CAMP ON A 1 CALL BACK C 1 CALL WAITING C 31 and EXECUTIVE RIGHT OF WAY E 1 can be prohibited to the BROKERAGE HOT LINE OUTSIDE connection through CLASS OF SERVICE INDIVIDUAL C 15 7 A hot line st...

Page 141: ...P 10 pps 2 PB 3 DP PB 12 Dterm 13 Data terminal via Dterm 14 Hotline 15 CAS Line 18 Virtual circuit Note RSC Route Restriction Class 0 15 SFC Service Feature Class 0 15 STEP 2 ASPD Assign ADC code maximum of 3 digits assign CD telephone number maximum 24 digits corresponding to the ADC STEP 3 AHLS Assign the station number programmed above for the following parameters HOT TN Hotline Tenant STN Hot...

Page 142: ... Group Number of the calling party TELN Telephone Number of the calling party TYPE 2 the called party is an outside line 3 the called party is a trunk CON UGN User Group Number of the called party for TYPE 2 CON ADC Abbreviated digits code assigned by the ASPD command for TYPE 2 CON LRN Logical Route Number of the called party for TYPE 3 CON TK Trunk Number of the called party for TYPE 3 Note The ...

Page 143: ... Reorder tone will be sent to the station if an attempt is made to transfer to an Attendant in night mode 2 This feature is not available on a tenant basis 3 If the Attendant does not answer the transferred call within the predetermined time set for Transfer Call Recall the transferring station will not be recalled 4 This feature is allowed only when a station is engaged in a two party connection ...

Page 144: ...PA 0 Hooking H SRV SSC Service Code SID 2 FCCS Programming This data setting describes only the additional or replacement commands used to activate FCCS services When used as an FCCS feature these commands replace the non network commands for example AAED is replaced by AAEDN Note that the data setting for FCCS service varies depending on the node Note STEP 1 ANPDL 0 Hooking H NND 1 STEP 2 ASPAL 0...

Page 145: ... in a two party connection station or trunk 2 Samples of connection patterns available under BLIND TRANSFER service are as follows a Station A blind transfers incoming trunk station to Station B b Station A blind transfers incoming trunk station call to the Attendant c Station A blind transfers incoming trunk station call to Station B which has set CALL FORWARDING DON T ANSWER to Station C the cal...

Page 146: ... to Station STEP 2 ASFC Assign the following data to the SFC of the station SFI 103 Assign the timer value of No Answer Timer for BLIND TRANSFER TO STATION RES 0 1 Index 140 Timer value assigned by ASYD SYS 1 Index 247 0 Index 140 1 Index 247 Also when ASYD SYS 1 Index 69 b0 1 has been assigned assign the following data to the SFC of the station SFI 104 Processing in a case when the transfer desti...

Page 147: ...CALL BACK to a busy station won t occur if that station is in the LINE LOCKOUT L 3 mode 4 There is no time limit for CALL BACK Once activated it will remain in status memory until completed or manually cancelled 5 A station cannot activate CALL BACK to more than one station at a time 6 A station cannot use CALL BACK and OUTGOING TRUNK QUEUING O 2 at the same time 7 When the calling station is call...

Page 148: ...t basis 0 1 No Yes System Data 2 Index 4 Bit 0 CALL BACK and OUTGOING TRUNK QUEUING O 2 access codes are same or separate 0 1 Separate Same System Data 3 Index 3 Bit 5 Enable Ringer pattern 5 for CALL BACK See DISTINCTIVE RINGING D 10 System Data 3 Index 7 Assign data 24H for 4 seconds On 2 seconds Off System Data 1 Index 5 Bit 7 CALL BACK Delay Timer 0 1 Out In Service System Data 1 Index 5 Bits ...

Page 149: ... Service Code SID 3 and a Connection Status Index CI for Busy B service For CALL BACK Cancel SRV SSC Service Code SID 6 Assign a Connection Status Index CI for Normal N service Note 1 When using ASYDL or ASYDN to program an FCCS feature the basic programming of ASYD is required in addition to ASYDL or ASYDN Note 2 System timers may be set on a network basis in ASYDN ...

Page 150: ...en the desired station becomes idle the calling station will ring The LCD displays Called Station Flashing 5 Upon answering the called station will be rung 6 Called Dterm s LCD displays Calling Station To cancel 1 Lift the handset or press the SPEAKER key receive dial tone 2 Press the CALL BACK key receive service set tone Call Back is cancelled 3 The LCD displays Service Conditions 1 If CALL BACK...

Page 151: ...has already been set is automatically cancelled when FCCS links are all busy at the moment the target station becomes idle Programming STEP 1 ASYD System Data 1 Index 139 No Answer Timer for CALL BACK Assign 00H RAM data is 3FH 30 seconds System Data 1 Index 68 Bit 0 0 1 SHF and access code last digit of telephone number access code System Data 2 Index 0 Bit 0 Is CALL BACK enabled on a per tenant ...

Page 152: ...te 1 STEP 1 ANPDL Reserve a number level for service feature access and cancel Assign for Normal N and Busy B Assign NND in accordance with a predetermined numbering plan STEP 2 ASPAL Assign an access code to CALL BACK Entry SRV SSC Service Code SID 3 and a Connection Status Index CI for Busy B service For CALL BACK Cancel SRV SSC Service Code SID 6 Assign a Connection Status Index CI for Normal N...

Page 153: ...Dial the originating telephone number 5 Dial the desired target telephone number receive service set tone To cancel from the ATTENDANT CONSOLE A 3 1 Press an idle loop key 2 Dial the specific CALL FORWARDING BUSY LINE cancel code 3 Dial the TENANT SERVICE T 12 number 2 3 digits 4 Dial the originating telephone number receive service set tone Service Conditions 1 This feature may be set and cancell...

Page 154: ...ervices will be activated to the calling station 14 There is no limitation to the number of stations that can set CALL FORWARDING BUSY LINE simultaneously 15 The operator answering a Call Forwarded call can identify the called telephone number on the ATTENDANT CONSOLE A 3 display 16 When a user places a call to a busy station which has been set CALL FORWARDING BUSY LINE C 2 the calling party can o...

Page 155: ...CAMP ON A 1 Station A has CALL FORWARDING BUSY LINE set to Station B and Station B is both busy and a member of a STATION HUNTING S 7 8 9 Group the call will Camp On at Station A and not hunt ASYD System Data 1 Index 69 Bit 5 0 3 If CALL WAITING C 12 31 ATTENDANT CAMP ON A 1 and or CALL BACK C 1 is directed toward Station A Station A has CALL FORWARDING BUSY LINE set to Station B and Station B is ...

Page 156: ...ws SFI 9 STEP 5 AKYD For Dterm sets CALL FORWARDING BUSY LINE may be assigned to a programmable line feature key Assign Type Function CALL FORWARDING BUSY LINE 1 STEP 6 ATNR Allow tenant to tenant connection for Inter and Intra tenant connections Assign Tenant Restriction Index TRI 1 For this feature to be set by the Attendant Console assignment assign TRI 3 for Inter and Intra Tenant connection v...

Page 157: ...NG BUSY LINE FORWARD BY key receive special dial tone 3 Dial the desired target telephone number receive service set tone The LED of the associated feature key lights and the LCD displays Target Station 4 Replace the handset or press the SPEAKER key 5 If the target station is the Attendant Console the LCD displays To monitor 1 Press the CALL FORWARDING BUSY LINE FORWARD BY feature key The LCD disp...

Page 158: ...Dterm multi line 1 Press the multi line key for which CALL FORWARDING BUSY LINE Dterm is to be monitored 2 Press the FORWARD BY key The LCD displays Target Station If the target station is the Attendant Console To cancel CALL FORWARDING BUSY LINE to a Dterm multi line 1 Press the multi line key for which CALL FORWARDING BUSY LINE Dterm feature is to be cancelled 2 Lift the handset or press the SPE...

Page 159: ...d However a maximum of 16 digits calling called telephone number can be displayed on the middle line of LCD depending on the system data 11 CALL FORWARDING BUSY LINE Dterm supersedes STATION HUNTING S 7 8 9 12 The operator answering a forwarded call can identify the called number on the ATTENDANT CONSOLE A 3 display 13 If the called station is the pilot of a UCD U 1 group and activates CALL FORWAR...

Page 160: ...Y LINE Dterm for station 201 The associated feature button LED on station 201 will illuminate Note The FORWARD BY key is same as the CALL FORWARDING BUSY LINE feature key Even when a sub line of Dterm is assigned as the destination station the call is not forwarded if the MY Line of that Dterm is not allowed CALL FORWARDING DON T ANSWER Dterm 21 This feature is applicable to CALL FORWARDING OUTSID...

Page 161: ...An ATTENDANT CAMP ON A 1 call is terminated at Station A and Station A has CALL FORWARDING BUSY LINE Dterm set to Station B If Station B is busy and part of a STATION HUNTING S 7 8 9 Group the call will Camp On at Station A and will not Hunt 3 When CALL WAITING C 12 31 ATTENDANT CAMP ON A 1 and CALL BACK C 1 is directed toward Station A which has call forwarding set to Station B and Station B is b...

Page 162: ...signing the function to each soft key STEP 7 ATNR Allow tenant to tenant connection for Inter and Intra tenant connections Assign Tenant Restriction Index TRI 1 For this feature to be set assign Inter and Intra Tenant connection TRI 3 from the Attendant Console This allows a station in one tenant group to be call forwarded to a station in the same or different tenant group Also assign TRI 0 statio...

Page 163: ...iginating telephone number 5 Dial the desired target telephone number receive service set tone To cancel from the ATTENDANT CONSOLE A 3 1 Press an idle loop key 2 Dial the specific CALL FORWARDING DON T ANSWER cancel code receive special dial tone 3 Dial the TENANT T 12 number 2 3 digits 4 Dial the originating telephone number receive service set tone To assign individual Call Forwarding Don t Ans...

Page 164: ...ing CALL FORWARDING DON T ANSWER b when a station holding an original call station or trunk on CONSULTATION HOLD C 17 places a call to a station setting CALL FORWARDING DON T ANSWER 13 Call Transfer Attendant Trunk Trunk calls transferred by the Attendant are assigned this feature when the called station does not answer for a predetermined time interval according to Route Restriction Class of the ...

Page 165: ...TRANSFER A 19 is provided the call is forwarded to the ATTENDANT NIGHT TRANSFER A 19 station 5 If the CALL FORWARDING DON T ANSWER target station is a Dterm that has activated DO NOT DISTURB D 21D call forwarding is not activated 6 The CALL FORWARDING DON T ANSWER feature is set from Station A to Station B if Station A is idle and Station B is busy 7 When a call is Call Forwarded the destination s...

Page 166: ...ture key Assign Type Function CALL FORWARD DON T ANSWER 22 STEP 6 ATNR Allow tenant to tenant connection for Inter and Intra tenant connections Assign Tenant Restriction Index TRI 1 For this service feature to be set by the Attendant Console assign Inter and Intra Tenant connection via the Attendant Console TRI 3 Also assign TRI 0 station to station calling CFI of either the Attendant Console or a...

Page 167: ... special dial tone 3 Dial the desired target telephone number receive service set tone The LCD displays Target Station To monitor CALL FORWARDING DON T ANSWER from a Dterm from MY Line 1 Press the CALL FORWARDING DON T ANSWER FORWARD NA key The LCD displays OR To set CALL FORWARDING DON T ANSWER for a multi line appearance other than the MY Line 1 Lift the handset or press the SPEAKER key 2 Press ...

Page 168: ...The associated LED that is lit at another station goes out 3 Replace the handset or press the SPEAKER key Service Conditions 1 This feature may be set and cancelled by the Dterm user or the Attendant 2 AUTOMATIC RECALL A 8 supersedes the timing for CALL FORWARDING DON T ANSWER Dterm Therefore if the programmed timing for AUTOMATIC RECALL A 8 is shorter than the programmed timing for CALL FORWARDIN...

Page 169: ...DING DON T ANSWER Dterm for station 201 The associated feature button LED on station 201 will illuminate Note FORWARD NA key is same as the CALL FORWARDING DON T ANSWER feature key Even when a sub line of Dterm is assigned as the destination station the call is not forwarded if the MY Line of that Dterm is not allowed CALL FORWARDING DON T ANSWER Dterm 10 This feature is applicable to CALL FORWARD...

Page 170: ...ime interval When restricted by TENANT SERVICE class this feature is not activated and the called station continues to ring 15 Speed Calling List numbers may be programmed as the destination telephone number This permits the sent digits to exceed the 12 digit maximum 16 CALL FORWARDING DON T ANSWER data remains in the data memory even if the system or LP is reinitialized 17 When a call is transfer...

Page 171: ...t will then be forwarded to the next station according to System Data 1 Index 145 timer For 10 seconds assign 00H RAM data is 3FH System Data 1 Index 145 Assign the time an incoming call via the Attendant Console will ring at the CALL FORWARD DON T ANSWER Dterm station before recalling to the Attendant Console For 30 seconds assign 00H RAM data is 9FH Index 145 must be longer than Index 141 System...

Page 172: ...n used as an FCCS feature these commands replace the non network commands for example AAED is replaced by AAEDN Note that the data setting for FCCS service varies depending on the node Note 1 STEP 1 ASYDL This data must be assigned to the node set Call Forwarding service System Data 1 Index 640 Assign the Fusion Point Code FPC of the node providing the attendant console Note 1 When using ASYDL or ...

Page 173: ...l the desired target telephone number receive service set tone To cancel from the ATTENDANT CONSOLE A 3 1 Press an idle LOOP key 2 Dial the specific CALL FORWARDING ALL CALLS cancellation code receive special dial tone 3 Dial the TENANT T 12 number 3 digits 4 Dial the originating telephone number receive service set tone Service Conditions 1 Stations with this feature set may originate any calls a...

Page 174: ...nt Console must be the same Interactions 1 Users are unaccustomed to hearing ringback tone when responding to their own station s ring Inform users when providing ringback tone with CALL FORWARDING ALL CALLS in System Data 1 Index 69 Bit 1 2 Call Forwarding can only be activated from an idle station 3 When CALL WAITING C 12 31 ATTENDANT CAMP ON A 1 and CALL BACK C 1 are directed toward Station A w...

Page 175: ...Assign Connection Index CI N H B Normal Hooking and Busy applicable to any feature assigned to this level Assign NND in accordance with a predetermined numbering plan STEP 3 ASPA Assign an access code to CALL FORWARDING ALL CALLS entry SID 8 and to CALL FORWARDING ALL CALLS cancel SID 9 Assign CI for Normal N service STEP 4 ASFC Assign a Service Feature Class that allows SFI 7 to stations that wil...

Page 176: ...ALLS feature key receive special dial tone 3 Dial the desired target telephone number receive service set tone The LED will light The LCD displays Target Station 4 Replace the handset or press the SPEAKER key To monitor from MY Line 1 Press the CALL FORWARDING ALL CALLS feature key The LCD displays Target Station OR Operator To cancel from MY Line 1 Lift the handset or press the SPEAKER key receiv...

Page 177: ...ress the SPEAKER key receive dial tone 2 Press the multi line appearance receive dial tone Press the CALL FORWARDING ALL CALLS feature key receive service set tone The LCD displays The associated LED that is lit at another station goes out 3 Replace the handset or press the SPEAKER key Service Conditions 1 Stations with this feature set may originate any calls and access the CALL FORWARDING ALL CA...

Page 178: ...e station on a Dterm s LCD panel may be allowed or denied according to system data This assignment is done on a system basis The LCD displays Intermediate Station Calling Called Party Note When the telephone number of the intermediate or calling called station exceeds 8 digits the last 8 digits are displayed However a maximum of 16 digits calling called telephone number can be displayed on the mid...

Page 179: ...tivate CALL FORWARDING C 5 With this station call forwarded only calls that are directly dialed to this station are call forwarded The member station is removed from the UCD group under the conditions of this call forwarding feature 6 If an Attendant attempts BUSY VERIFICATION B 3 to Station A which has CALL FORWARDING ALL CALLS set to Station B BUSY VERIFICATION B 3 proceeds as if the Attendant h...

Page 180: ... ALL CALLS Dterm may be assigned to a programmable line feature key Assign Type Function CALL FORWARDING ALL CALLS 2 STEP 6 ADSL Assign SN 1 Originating and FKY 2 Call Forwarding All Calls FDA This command is required only for assigning the function to each soft key STEP 7 ATNR Allow tenant to tenant connection for Inter and Intra tenant connections Assign Tenant Restriction Index TRI 1 For this s...

Page 181: ...ng incoming calls via the CALL PICKUP GROUP C 7 or TRUNK ANSWER FROM ANY STATION T 8 features 2 If the controlling user does not dial any further digits after the CALL HOLD code removal of dial tone will occur after 12 seconds reorder tone is then applied for 30 seconds followed by muting of the station set 3 Calls will remain on hold until the controlling user either replaces the handset causing ...

Page 182: ...C 11 CALL PICKUP C 7 THREE WAY CALLING T 2 etc 2 A station can CALL HOLD only one call at a time 3 CALL WAITING C 12 31 When a station has a call on CALL HOLD CALL WAITING C 12 31 features are denied to both the holding and the held station 4 CALL BACK C 1 a A user cannot activate CALL HOLD when CALL BACK C 1 has already been activated b A user cannot use the CALL HOLD feature while CALL BACK C 1 ...

Page 183: ...P 3 ASPA Assign an access code for CALL HOLD SID 1 for Connection Status Index CI of Hooking H STEP 4 ASFC Assign a Service Feature Class that allows SFI 10 to stations that are allowed CALL HOLD STEP 5 AKYD Optional Assign CALL HOLD to a programmable Line Feature key Assign Type Function CALL HOLD 10 The operation of TRANSFER key and access code is also available Type Function FLASH BUTTON 21 FCC...

Page 184: ...n HOLD the original call is automatically returned Note By repeating the above steps user can converse alternately with two parties A feature line key may be programmed as a HOLD key 1 While a call is in progress press the HOLD key 2 The call is placed on HOLD dial tone is restored 3 A new call may be dialed 4 To return to the original call press the RECALL key On a Dterm a SPEED CALLING ONE TOUCH...

Page 185: ...system data programming 7 The station having a camped on call cannot activate the CALL HOLD feature Interactions 1 CALL WAITING C 12 31 cannot be activated if the target station has a call on hold 2 CALL BACK C 1 a A user cannot activate CALL HOLD Dterm when CALL BACK has already been activated b A user cannot use the CALL HOLD Dterm feature while CALL BACK is in effect toward it c A station with ...

Page 186: ...eature Class that allows SFI 10 to stations that are allowed CALL HOLD STEP 5 AKYD Assign Call Hold to a programmable Line Feature key Assign Type Function CALL HOLD 10 The operation of TRANSFER key and access code is also available Type Function FLASH BUTTON 21 STEP 6 ADSL Assign SN 5 Consultation Hold and FKY 10 Call Hold HLD This command is required only for assigning the function to each soft ...

Page 187: ...ided on a per line basis via system data 2 Any station assigned a fully restricted CLASS OF SERVICE INDIVIDUAL C 15 will be unable to answer incoming Central Office calls using this feature 3 A CALL PICKUP GROUP is defined as those stations having the ability to pick up each other s calls using the CALL PICKUP feature 4 A maximum of 100 stations can be assigned to each group There is no limit to t...

Page 188: ...assigned order However if ringing stations belong to different nodes the user cannot pick up the call in assigned order or terminated order The user will first pick up the call terminated to the station belonging to the same node of the user s station See the figures below Node A Node B No 3 No 4 No 5 No 1 No 2 CALL PICKUP GROUP The number below the station is the assigned order Example All the St...

Page 189: ...de If any of the stations belong s to a different node this service is not activated 19 The CALL PICKUP GROUP CALL PICKUP EXPAND GROUP can be set on a node basis even in the use of telephone numbers In other words the features are available via the data written on the Local Data Memory LDM not only on the Data Memory DM or the Network Data Memory NDM The following are conditions in this case a The...

Page 190: ...rammed on LDM a call in recall state by CALL BACK C 1 OUTGOING TRUNK QUEUING O 2 or CALL HOLD C 6 cannot be picked up 23 When programmed on LDM a call by Automatic Wake up A 27 or Timed Reminder T 62 cannot be picked up Interactions 1 CALL HOLD C 6 To pick up a call while engaged in a two party connection the station can switch hook flash to place the other party on CALL HOLD C 6 and dial the Call...

Page 191: ... programmed first will be picked up first STEP 4 ACPE Assign the CALL PICKUP EXPAND GROUP if necessary STEP 5 AKYD Optional Assign a programmable Line Feature key as a CALL PICKUP key Assign Type Function CALL PICKUP GROUP 12 If necessary assign Type Function CALL PICKUP EXPAND 115 FCCS Programming This data setting describes only the additional or replacement commands used to activate FCCS servic...

Page 192: ...ess and cancel CI N Normal STEP 2 ASPAL Assign access code for CALL PICKUP CI N SRV SSC SID 7 CALL PICKUP GROUP If necessary assign SRV SSCA SIDA 63 CALL PICKUP EXPAND GROUP STEP 3 ACPGL Assign members of CALL PICKUP GROUP UGN User Group Number 1 fixed TELN Telephone Number of member stations STEP 4 ACPEL Assign members of CALL PICKUP EXPAND GROUP if necessary UGN User Group Number 1 fixed TELN Te...

Page 193: ...ess the TRANSFER HOLD feature key receive special dial tone 3 Press the CALL PICKUP GROUP feature key the call is connected to the station 4 The first party is put on CALL HOLD C 6 status To pick up an incoming call within the EXPANDED CALL PICKUP GROUP 1 A station within the EXPANDED CALL PICKUP GROUP rings 2 Lift the handset receive dial tone 3 Dial the access code or press the feature key for E...

Page 194: ...tivated 13 When using the FCH card a Stations in four different nodes can be assigned to a CALL PICKUP GROUP or a CALL PICKUP EXPAND GROUP b When a CALL PICKUP GROUP CALL PICKUP EXPAND GROUP has stations that belong to different nodes and the multiple Call Pickup Call Pickup Expand stations are ringing simultaneously if ringing stations belong to the same node the user will pick up the call in ass...

Page 195: ... EXPAND GROUP can be set on a node basis even in the use of telephone numbers In other words the features are available via the data written on the Local Data Memory LDM not only on the Data Memory DM or the Network Data Memory NDM If this is the case the conditions are as follows a The features are to be programmed by using the telephone number TELN of each station b A maximum of 100 stations can...

Page 196: ...UTGOING TRUNK QUEUING O 2 or CALL HOLD C 6 cannot be picked up 23 When programmed on LDM a call by Automatic Wake up A 27 or Timed Reminder T 62 cannot be picked up Interactions 1 CALL HOLD C 6 To pick up a call while engaged in a two party connection the station can switch hook flash to place the other party on CALL HOLD C 6 and dial the Call Pickup code The first party is put on CALL HOLD C 6 2 ...

Page 197: ...t commands used to activate FCCS services When used as an FCCS feature these commands replace the non network commands for example AAED is replaced by AAEDN Note that the data setting for FCCS service varies depending on the node STEP 1 ANPDN This command must be assigned to the NCN Reserve a number level for feature access and cancel Assign for normal N Assign NND in accordance with a predetermin...

Page 198: ...PICKUP EXPAND GROUP if necessary UGN User Group Number 1 fixed TELN Telephone Number of member stations STEP 5 AKYD Optional Assign a programmable Line Feature key as a CALL PICKUP key KYI 1 Feature Key FKY 12 CALL PICKUP GROUP If necessary assign FKY 115 CALL PICKUP EXPAND GROUP Note When using a soft key on a Dterm Series E use ADSL and ADKS commands for necessary data assignment At this time St...

Page 199: ...USY RING ATND ANSWER or HOLD to display the status of the call on that loop The indicators may be ON OFF or flashing 400 ms ON and 400 ms OFF Interactions 1 When the ATTENDANT LOOP RELEASE A 6 feature is activated the status of the call is removed from the ATTENDANT CONSOLE A 3 until alerted by the AUTOMATIC RECALL A 8 feature 2 See DIGITAL DISPLAY STATION D 5 DIGITAL DISPLAY TRUNK D 6 and ATTENDA...

Page 200: ...dication 00 PA lamp is on 10 Always System Data 2 Index 8 9 What kinds of calls are counted as Calls Waiting System Data 2 Index 14 Bits 0 3 When CALL WAITING value exceeds a threshold value the Call Waiting lamp will flash System Data 2 Index 14 Bit 4 Will CALL WAITING INDICATION flash for all calls 0 1 All calls Pegged calls 2 NIGHT CONNECTION FIXED FLEXIBLE N 1 2 TRUNK ANSWER ANY STATION T 8 If...

Page 201: ... 2 mode the transferring station will receive reorder tone if ATTENDANT NIGHT TRANSFER A 19 is not provided 3 The CALL TRANSFER ATTENDANT feature allows a user while participating in a two party connection a two party connection can be comprised of two stations or a station and a trunk to call the Attendant so that the Attendant may transfer the call or provide other assistance as required 4 If al...

Page 202: ...NSFER to a station in a STATION HUNTING S 7 8 9 group will hunt according to the conditions of the STATION HUNTING S 7 8 9 group 9 A CALL TRANSFER to a Dterm that has DO NOT DISTURB D 21D set will receive reorder tone Programming STEP 1 ASYD System Data 2 Index 1 Bits 0 and 1 Assign data 11 to allow CONSULTATION HOLD ALL CALLS Dterm C 17D for all types of connections STEP 2 ATNR Allow tenant to te...

Page 203: ...k receive special dial tone At this time the calling trunk party hears music on hold 2 Dial the third party and the third party is busy receive busy tone 3 Press the switch hook receive special dial tone and then dial the access code of CALL BACK receive service set tone 4 Replace the handset The station to be set Camp on by Station destination hears Warning Tone At this time the calling trunk par...

Page 204: ...ng ringing When the control station goes on hook the station or trunk on hold is connected to the third party and hears ringback tone A variable timer is set when the controlling station goes on hook If the timer times out before the third party answers the control station is rung back When transferring a call from a loop start DIT trunk the trunk is disconnected if the timer times out before the ...

Page 205: ...en the transferred destination station becomes available before the transferring station is released from the connection after the service was set after the operating user hears service set tone the trunk incoming call is connected with the destination station after the operating station mediate party replaces the handset c When the transferred destination station becomes LINE LOCKOUT condition or...

Page 206: ...econnect the second party 6 Upon establishing a CONSULTATION HOLD C 17 17D connection and dialing a MISCELLANEOUS TRUNK ACCESS M 2 code if no dial tone is heard after the trunk is seized if a mistake is made in dialing or if an intercept announcement or a permanent tone is heard the station user must go on hook and wait for ringback tone 7 The station user who establishes CONSULTATION HOLD C 17 17...

Page 207: ...ll to the station Call Forwarding Don t Answer is activated STEP 2 ANPD Assign the first number level for the feature access code STEP 3 ASPA Assign the feature access code CI H SRV SSC SID 3 Call Back STEP 4 ASFC Assign the service feature class of Camp on by Station SFI 174 Camp on by Station RES 1 Allowed FCCS Programming This data setting describes only the additional or replacement commands u...

Page 208: ...nsfer is completed The LCD display for an announced transfer will be Transferred Party The LCD for an unannounced transfer will be Transferring Party Transferred Party Note When the telephone number of the transferring transferred station exceeds 8 digits the last 8 digits are displayed However a maximum of 16 digit transferred telephone numbers can be displayed on the middle line of the LCD depen...

Page 209: ...e operating station displays The calling trunk party hears ringback tone The LCD of the target party displays 5 The target station starts to ring when the target station lifts the handset The LCD of the target party displays 6 The target station called party can call back to the trunk party directly by answering the ringing The LCD of the target party displays ELAPSED TIME for the communication Au...

Page 210: ... 4 When the target station becomes available the target station starts to ring The LCD of the target party displays 5 The target station can call back to the trunk party directly as the station answers the ringing The LCD of the target party displays ELAPSED TIME for the communication To answer the Camp on by Station call from the busy station 1 After receiving Warning Tone the third party can ans...

Page 211: ...nd party to a station third party the control station can transfer the call during ringing If the control station goes on hook during the ringing state the trunk second party is connected to the third party s line and hears ringback tone A variable timer is set when the controlling station goes on hook If the timer times out before the third party answers the control station is rung back 8 Reorder...

Page 212: ...s not released within the predetermined time period after receiving service set tone the service which has been set will be ineffective And the operating user hears busy tone b When the transferred destination station becomes available before the transferring station is released from the connection after the service was set after the operating user hears service set tone the trunk incoming call is...

Page 213: ... once to disconnect the tone and reconnect the second party 6 Upon establishing a CONSULTATION HOLD C 17 17D connection and dialing a MISCELLANEOUS TRUNK ACCESS M 2 code if no dial tone is heard after the trunk is seized if a mistake is made in dialing or if an intercept announcement or a permanent tone is heard the user must go on hook and wait for ringback tone 7 The user who establishes CONSULT...

Page 214: ...ss code STEP 3 ASPA Assign the feature access code CI H SRV SSC SID 3 Call Back STEP 4 AKYD Assign CALL BACK function key KYI 1 function key FKY 5 Call Back STEP 5 ADSL Assign Call Block soft key FKY 5 Call Back SN 8 encounters the busy station while holding an original call STEP 6 ASFC Assign the service feature class of Camp on by Station SFI 174 Camp on by Station RES 1 Allowed FCCS Programming...

Page 215: ...call 3 CALL WAITING TERMINATING call is automatically connected 4 Another switch hook flash or pressing the ANSWER key on the Dterm will return to the original call and hold the second call OR 5 Call Waiting Tone is heard during the call in progress 6 The called station hangs up priority ringing is sent Priority ringing 0 4 sec ON 0 2 sec OFF 0 8 sec ON 0 2 sec OFF 0 4 sec ON 0 4 sec OFF Lift the ...

Page 216: ...g service features take precedence over CALL WAITING TERMINATING CALL FORWARDING ALL CALLS C 5 CALL FORWARDING BUSY LINE C 3 STATION HUNTING CIRCULAR S 7 STATION HUNTING SECRETARIAL S 8 STATION HUNTING TERMINAL S 9 Interactions 1 This feature is allowed whenever the destination telephone set is in any state other than a Engaged in three way connection b A PRIVACY feature is activated c Connected t...

Page 217: ...e takes precedence over CALL WAITING TERMINATING 10 LINE LOCKOUT L 3 CALL WAITING TERMINATING is not allowed to a station in LINE LOCKOUT L 3 11 OUTGOING TRUNK QUEUING O 2 CALL WAITING TERMINATING is not allowed on any station involved in THREE WAY CALLING T 2 Programming STEP 1 ASYD System Data 1 Index 64 Bit 6 Leave as data 0 System Data 1 Index 145 Assign the Recall Timer for a call extended by...

Page 218: ...y that shows the number of calls waiting Interactions 1 The CALL WAITING LAMP lights if any of the following incoming calls are waiting to be answered at the ATTENDANT CONSOLE A 3 LDN Listed Directory Number ATND Attendant Dial 0 Calls CALL FORWARDING ALL CALLS C 5 RECALL Attendant Recall Calls FX Foreign Exchange WATS Wide Area Telephone Service TIE TIE Line Calls BUSY Call Forwarding Busy Line t...

Page 219: ...s a CALL FORWARDING DON T ANSWER C 3 call counted as a call waiting 0 1 No Yes Bit 1 Is a CALL FORWARDING INTERCEPT C 25 25D call counted as a call waiting 0 1 No Yes Bit 2 Will this key type of call is assigned in AAKP be counted as a call waiting 0 1 No Yes Bit 3 Is an INTERPOSITION TRANSFER I 5 call counted as a call waiting 0 1 No Yes Note The types of calls listed above are the default types ...

Page 220: ...2 The call is extended to the desired station in normal fashion Service Conditions 1 CCSA trunks are physically the same as those used for tie trunks The CCSA trunks may be push button or rotary in either direction 2 Careful consideration should be given to system numbering plans before assigning CCSA ACCESS codes to avoid numbering conflicts 3 CCSA ACCESS codes can be either one or two digits 4 P...

Page 221: ...s a particular station will be permitted to use ATTENDANT CAMP ON WITH TONE INDICATION A 1 CALL BACK C 1 CALL FORWARDING C 2 C 3 C 5 CALL HOLD C 6 DATA LINE SECURITY D 12 EXECUTIVE RIGHT OF WAY E 1 OUTGOING TRUNK QUEUING O 2 SMDR S 10 SPEED CALLING SYSTEM S 3 TRUNK ANSWER FROM ANY STATION TAS T 8 For details refer to the NEAX2400 IPX Office Data Specification 5 Stations may be programmed to change...

Page 222: ...routed to reorder tone 5 STATION HUNTING S 7 8 9 Hunting of an incoming trunk call to an inward route restricted station is not allowed 6 TRUNK ANSWER FROM ANY STATION T 8 A user restricted from receiving direct incoming calls via a given trunk group cannot use the TAS feature to answer calls received via that trunk group 7 NIGHT SERVICE N 1 2 Restrictions can be changed for a given station when t...

Page 223: ...le 16 0 15 different SFCs may be constructed allowing or denying access to the various features Route Restriction Class STEP 1 ASYD System Data 2 Index 1 Bits 4 5 Should a restricted station be routed to the Attendant Console or receive reorder tone Reorder tone Bit 4 0 Bit 5 0 ATTENDANT CONSOLE Bit 4 1 Bit 5 0 STEP 2 ARSC A possible 16 0 15 different Route Restriction Classes may be constructed e...

Page 224: ...g station will be returned to the original call If the originating station flashes the switch hook a THREE WAY CALL T 2 will be initiated Service Conditions 1 When TRUNK TO TRUNK CONNECTION T 10 is provided with the system an outgoing public network or TIE Line call can be made by the user 2 For outgoing calls this feature may be activated only after 18 seconds have elapsed since the last digit di...

Page 225: ...CALL TRANSFER ALL CALLS C 11 from a station second party to another station or trunk third party the control station can transfer the call during ringing blind transfer When the control station goes on hook the station in soft hold is connected to the third party s connection and hears ringback tone A 30 second timer is set when the controlling station goes on hook If the timer times out before th...

Page 226: ...to determine when SMDR billing will begin System Data 2 Index 1 Bits 0 1 CONSULTATION HOLD allowed or denied 00 Denied 01 Originating and Terminating Calls allowed Tandem Call denied 11 All calls allowed Normally assign data 11 System Data 3 Index 2 Bits 0 3 Switch hook flash starts timer To calculate this value 1 FH x 120 msec Timer System Data 3 Index 2 Bits 4 7 Switch hook flash ends timer To c...

Page 227: ...nd station stays on pressing the TRANSFER key returns the original call to the Dterm while the second call is being held By pressing the CONF key a THREE WAY CALL T 2 will be initiated Service Conditions 1 When TRUNK TO TRUNK CONNECTION T 10 is provided with the system an outgoing public network or TIE Line call may be made by the user 2 With outgoing calls this feature may be activated only after...

Page 228: ...ing CALL TRANSFER ALL CALLS C 11 from a station second party to another station or trunk third party the control station can transfer the call during ringing blind transfer When the control station goes on hook the station in soft hold is connected to the third party s connection and hears ringback tone A variable timer is set when the controlling station goes on hook If the timer times out before...

Page 229: ...ed to determine when SMDR billing will begin System Data 2 Index 1 Bits 0 1 CONSULTATION HOLD allowed or denied 00 Denied 01 Originating and Terminating Calls allowed Tandem Call denied 11 All calls allowed Normally assign data 11 System Data 3 Index 2 Bits 0 3 Switch hook flash starts timer To calculate this value 1 FH x 120 msec Timer System Data 3 Index 2 Bits 4 7 Switch hook flash ends timer T...

Page 230: ...he main system if the called station does not answer within a prefixed time 2 Upon receiving the recall on a No Answer Call the ATTENDANT CONSOLE s A 3 will display the incoming CAS call by flashing the CAS lamp 3 The Attendant answers the incoming CAS call by pressing the CAS or ANSWER key hears continuous ringback tone 440Hz 480 Hz for 300 msec 4 After hearing the burst of continuous ringback to...

Page 231: ...AS or ANSWER key hears the operator call identification tone two 100 msec bursts of 440 Hz 4 At the expiration of this tone the Attendant converses with the calling party 5 The Attendant s procedure for serving this call is similar to that for an LDN call Call Transfer Attendant 1 After any call is completed to a satellite station the called party station can call the Attendant in the main system ...

Page 232: ...tation in the main system TIE Lines must be installed for regular voice connection between systems 2 CAS systems have no effect on tandem connection LCR 6 LCRS 7 or any other trunking application 3 The following applies to a system used at the main CAS location attendant location The Attendant Console cannot originate or INTERPOSITION TRANSFER I 5 a call on an RLT The Attendant Console at the main...

Page 233: ...cellaneous Timer Class in Bit 0 3 System Data 2 Index 13 Bit 1 Assign a data 0 for a Main system This Bit applies to the PFT circuit card This application is not common STEP 2 ARTD Assign the CAS routes Release Link Trunks RLT in ARTD as follows Be sure to assign CDN 6 TCL as data 7 CA line RT 1 1 OSGS 2 2 0NSG 3 5 TF 3 6 TCL 7 7 L T 1 15 LSG 5 STEP 3 ATRK Program the LEN of the RLT trunks These t...

Page 234: ... Release Link Trunks that will be assigned to the stations assigned a TEC 15 STEP 3 ARSC Construct a Route Restriction Class that allows a direct connection to all incoming trunks that will be served by the Attendant Console at the main system location Assign via Route Restriction Index RRI 1 Direct Connection on Incoming Trunks STEP 4 ASFC Construct a Service Feature Class that allows Station Mes...

Page 235: ...ties incoming trunks to the PA 4ODTs STEP 8 ACFR Assignment of Call Forwarding Restriction Upon determining which types of Call Class Indexes CCI will be answered at the Main system such as LDN DDD WATS FX allow those CCI a Transfer Service Feature Index of 15 CAS Line STEP 9 ACSA Optional Use this command rather than ACSI if CAS operation is desired in Day mode and if incoming trunks are to stay ...

Page 236: ...d is denied dial access to the Code Call unit Restricted calls are routed to reorder tone If allowed by the user s Class of Service Attendant assistance can be used to complete a code call for a route restricted station 6 Attendants users and TIE trunk users can dial an access code and a 2 or 3 digit called party code to activate a coded signal 7 The Dterm display will indicate the elapsed call ti...

Page 237: ... idle the display flashes its number until the call is answered If the called station is busy the LCD displays Called Station 2 If the called station is in DO NOT DISTURB Dterm D 11D the LCD displays Called Station 3 If the calling station encounters a restricted station the LCD displays Called Station 4 CALLED STATION STATUS DISPLAY Dterm can be restricted on a system wide basis The LCD displays ...

Page 238: ...display will flash while the call is ringing then appear steady when the call is answered Operating Procedure No manual operation is required Service Conditions 1 When a call terminates on a line other than the PRIME LINE P 13D the LCD displays the incoming station determined by LINE PRE SELECTION Dterm L 9D 2 LINE PRE SELECTION Dterm L 9D is governed by a timer Programming No programming is requi...

Page 239: ...lly disconnect in 30 seconds provided this is programmed in system data If no disconnect timing is programmed the outside party will control disconnect 3 This feature is provided on a per tenant basis 4 The following call conditions which cannot be completed can be routed to intercept a vacant level b unassigned telephone number 5 Only one common message can be provided for the different intercept...

Page 240: ... TO SYSTEM R 2 19 When using the FCCS network the call forwarding for an incoming call routed to a dead level or an unused number has priority over the announcement service for the incoming call Interactions 1 Each route connected to an announcement machine is also an EQP The same route can be assigned as different EQP s However it is best to separate EQP functions by route 2 8TLT 16 COT or 4DAT c...

Page 241: ...swer from Incoming trunk Normally assign data 0 No answer signal is sent to the CO Therefore the calling party will not be billed for the call M Multiple Connection 0 1 Single Connection Multiple Connection See the requirements of the announcement equipment STEP 7 ACFR Assignment of Call Forwarding Restriction Upon determining which types of Call Class Indexes CCI will be answered via CALL FORWARD...

Page 242: ...nding Answer from the incoming trunk 0 No Yes Normally assign data 1 M Multiple Connection 0 1 Single Connection Multiple Connection LGRT Logical Route Number TK Trunk Number Not necessary for M 1 STEP 3 ARRCN This data must be assigned to the NCN Release the restriction between the terminating trunk and the announcement trunk STEP 4 ARSCN This data must be assigned to the NCN Release the restrict...

Page 243: ... This service feature is allowed to all stations in the NEAX2400 IPX except the ATTENDANT CONSOLE A 3 2 Any station that has set CALL FORWARDING ALL CALLS C 5 can activate any feature if the station is allowed the feature via CLASS OF SERVICE C 15 3 When Station A Dterm calls Station B Dterm or if Station A places an incoming call into hold condition and calls Station B each Dterm LCD displays as ...

Page 244: ...sconnect the party presently engaged in conversation Interactions 1 This feature is allowed whenever the destination telephone is engaged in any state other than a engaged in a 3 way connection b a Privacy feature is activated c connected to a route programmed to have Line Trunk Privacy CDN 44 PRV d listening to a tone dial tone reorder tone service set tone busy tone ringback tone 2 CALL WAITING ...

Page 245: ...D 5 for Connection Status Index CI of Busy B Assign the NND value as equal to the digits in the feature access code FCCS Programming This data setting describes only the additional or replacement commands used to activate FCCS services When used as an FCCS feature these commands replace the non network commands for example AAED is replaced by AAEDN Note that the data setting for FCCS service varie...

Page 246: ...r receive service set tone To cancel 1 Lift the handset receive dial tone 2 Dial the CALL FORWARDING ALL CALLS OUTSIDE cancel code same as CALL FORWARDING ALL CALLS C 5 cancel code receive service set tone To set from a multi line Dterm 1 Press the multi line feature key to be used for CALL FORWARDING ALL CALLS OUTSIDE 2 Lift the handset or press the SPEAKER key receive dial tone 3 Press CALL FORW...

Page 247: ...ALLS OUTSIDE can be restricted by the Trunk Route Restriction Class RSC of the originating station 7 There is no limit to the number of stations that may activate this feature simultaneously 8 Restrictions for outgoing connection by CALL FORWARDING ALL CALLS OUTSIDE are as follows a When originating a call from a station RSC is verified when this service is in effect b When originating a call from...

Page 248: ...exchange number whenever a call is forwarded 8 A station can use the OUTGOING TRUNK QUEUING O 2 feature to queue an outgoing trunk and a call that is being forwarded via the CALL FORWARDING OUTSIDE feature The call will be outpulsed when a trunk becomes available 9 A station assigned to a STATION HUNTING S 7 8 9 Group will be temporarily removed from the Hunt Group if it initiates CALL FORWARDING ...

Page 249: ...All Calls FDA STEP 8 ATNR Allow tenant to tenant connection for inter and intra tenant connections TRI 1 For this feature to be set by the Attendant Console assign inter and intra tenant connection via the Attendant Console TRI 3 STEP 9 AMND Local outgoing Destination Codes DC must be programmed to allow local outgoing calls such as 92 93 94 etc STEP 10 ACFS Call Forwarding can also be assigned di...

Page 250: ...retrieval code the parked call is reconnected To retrieve a parked call from a different station 1 Dial the CALL PARK remote retrieval code and the number of the station that parked the call the parked call is reconnected Service Conditions 1 Calls parked by a station are automatically parked on that station s extension number The My line number is used for a Dterm 2 CALL PARK may be activated onl...

Page 251: ...CALL WAITING ORIGINATING C 31 CALL WAITING TERMINATING C 12 CONSULTATION HOLD ALL CALLS C 17 C 58 DATA LINE SECURITY D 12 D 66 DIAL ACCESS TO ATTENDANT D 2 D 71 EXCLUSIVE HOLD Dterm E 4D EXECUTIVE RIGHT OF WAY E 1 E 8 NON EXCLUSIVE HOLD Dterm N 7D PRIVACY RELEASE P 18 THREE WAY CALLING T 2 VOICE CALL V 2 V 7 14 CALL PARK is denied for the following Attendant Console status ATTENDANT OVERRIDE A 7 B...

Page 252: ... allows SFI 68 CALL PARK called This allows a station to be parked by another station or Attendant Console STEP 5 ASAT This command must be assigned to designate a specific station number to the Attendant Console This number is used to identify the Attendant Console when parking a call FCCS Programming This data setting describes only the additional or replacement commands used to activate FCCS se...

Page 253: ... NDA 24297 Issue 1 C 29 Call Park FCCS Programming cont d Note 1 When using ASYDL or ASYDN to program an FCCS feature the basic programming of ASYD is required in addition to ASYDL or ASYDN Note 2 System timers may be set on a network basis in ASYDN ...

Page 254: ... this procedure can belong to the different TENANT T 12 groups A TN2 can pick up a TN1 call 6 A busy station can accomplish CALL PICKUP DIRECT by placing an existing call on CALL HOLD C 6 7 CALL PICKUP DIRECT cannot be accessed while in the CONSULTATION HOLD ALL CALLS C 17 mode 8 When a station holds a call CALL HOLD terminated through FCCS link the station cannot pick up a call 9 When both the ca...

Page 255: ...setting describes only the additional or replacement commands used to activate FCCS services When used as an FCCS feature these commands replace the non network commands for example AAED is replaced by AAEDN Note that the data setting for FCCS service varies depending on the node Note STEP 1 ANPDL Reserve a number level for feature access Assign for Normal N Hooking H and Busy B STEP 2 ASPAL Assig...

Page 256: ... is automatically connected 4 Another switch hook flash or pressing the ANSWER key can be used to return to the original call and the second call will be held OR 1 Call Waiting Tone is heard during the call in progress 2 The called station hangs up priority ringing is sent 3 Lift the handset to answer Service Conditions 1 Once CALL WAITING ORIGINATING is activated to a given station other stations...

Page 257: ... EXECUTIVE RIGHT OF WAY E 1 is denied a two party connection that has a call waiting 17 STATION HUNTING S 7 8 9 takes precedence over Call Waiting 18 Priority ringing is 0 4 sec ON 0 2 sec OFF 0 8 sec ON 0 2 sec OF 0 4 sec ON 0 4 sec OFF 19 These features are denied if a call is waiting at the calling or called station ATTENDANT CAMP ON WITH TONE INDICATION A 1 ATTENDANT OVERRIDE A 7 BOSS SECRETAR...

Page 258: ...being used 3 CALL WAITING ORIGINATING is denied toward a TIE Line Programming STEP 1 ASYD System Data 1 Index 152 Interval for CALL WAITING ORIGINATING Indication Tone to be sent to the destination telephone Timer Class 3 2 seconds MTC x TC Interval for CALL WAITING ORIGINATING MTC assigned in hexadecimal to Bits 0 3 of this Index Default value is 10 seconds Example Data 36H is assigned 2 x 6 12 s...

Page 259: ...Line Feature key Assign Type Function CALL WAITING 4 STEP 6 ADSL SN 5 Consultation Hold and FKY 4 Call Waiting CW This command is used for assigning the function of each soft key FCCS Programming This data setting describes only the additional or replacement commands used to activate FCCS services When used as an FCCS feature these commands replace the non network commands for example AAED is repl...

Page 260: ...or trunk call and remains engaged in the connection If the START key is pressed DTMF signals cannot be transmitted from the ATTENDANT CONSOLE A 3 even when DTMF signal sending is selected in the system data 2 All digits DTMF signals generated by the ATTENDANT CONSOLE A 3 will not appear on the ATTENDANT CONSOLE A 3 display 3 Additional digits can be dialed after the trunk soft hold timer has timed...

Page 261: ...Data 1 Index 229 Bit 2 DTMF signal sending with the keypad pressed after the attendant has answered an incoming call 0 1 Out In Service System Data 3 Index 11 Assign a Miscellaneous Timer counter for the duration of the DTMF Sender Tone 128ms X PBST 1 Duration of Sender Tone Maximum value is 2 048 seconds 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PBST ...

Page 262: ... Console as a result of DO NOT DISTURB D 11 CALL FORWARDING ALL CALLS C 5 CALL FORWARDING BUSY LINE C 2 CALL FORWARDING DON T ANSWER C 3 CALL FORWARDING INTERCEPT ANNOUNCEMENT C 25 and is answered by the Attendant 2 If the Attendant presses the SRC button while the called telephone number is displayed the display changes to the number of the calling party The called telephone number cannot be disp...

Page 263: ...al tone 2 Dial the CALL FORWARDING BUSY LINE OUTSIDE cancel code same as CALL FORWARDING BUSY LINE C 2 cancel code receive service set tone To set from a multi line Dterm 1 Press the multi line feature key to be used for CALL FORWARDING BUSY LINE OUTSIDE 2 Lift the handset or press the SPEAKER key receive dial tone 3 Press CALL FORWARDING BUSY LINE OUTSIDE feature key receive special dial tone 4 D...

Page 264: ...hone number This permits the sent digits to exceed the 24 digit maximum 6 When using this feature either the calling station or the forwarding station is recorded by SMDR S 10 as the originating station of calls forwarded The selection between the above stations is determined through system data 7 CALL FORWARDING BUSY LINE OUTSIDE can be restricted by the RSC of the originating station 8 ROUTE PEG...

Page 265: ...SYD System Data 1 Index 5 Bit 0 Are access codes for CALL FORWARDING BUSY LINE and CALL FORWARDING DON T ANSWER the same or separate 0 1 Same Separate System Data 1 Index 69 Bit 7 and System Data 1 Index 5 Bits 1 3 for MULTIPLE CALL FORWARDING STEP 2 ANPD Reserve a number level for feature access and cancel Assign Connection Index CI N H B Normal Hooking and Busy applicable to any feature assigned...

Page 266: ...de Note 1 STEP 1 ANPDL Reserve a number level for feature access and cancel Assign Connection Index CI N H B Normal Hooking and Busy applicable to any feature assigned to this level Assign NND in accordance with a predetermined numbering plan STEP 2 ASPAL Assign an access code to CALL FORWARDING BUSY LINE Entry SID 10 and to CALL FORWARDING BUSY LINE Cancel SID 11 Assign Connection Status Index CI...

Page 267: ...0 Note The capacity depends on the system configuration due to memory requirements 4 Speed Calling numbers are programmed via system data entry on the MAINTENANCE ADMINISTRATION TERMINAL MAT M 18 5 Stations may be denied access to Speed Calling via CLASS OF SERVICE INDIVIDUAL assignment in system data Speed Calling may also be allowed or denied on a system or tenant basis 6 TOLL DENIAL TOLL DIVERS...

Page 268: ...mple 6 010 1 digit 3 digits NND 4 STEP 4 ASFC Assign a Service Feature Class that allows SFI 12 to stations that will have SPEED CALLING SYSTEM STEP 5 ASPD Assign the Tenant Number ADC and CD For details see the NEAX2400 IPX Command Manual Note Note Enter the necessary numbers of letter M s instead of the digits for the station number Example If the destination numbers are 9 3300 1111 9 3300 9999 ...

Page 269: ...a Central Office Trunk COT or TIE Line Trunk TLT and an announcement machine b Digital Announcement Trunk DAT 2 Stations with this feature set may originate calls and access the CALL FORWARDING ALL CALLS ANNOUNCEMENT cancellation code 3 Stations activating CALL FORWARDING ALL CALLS ANNOUNCEMENT can be restricted from placing any calls except to the Attendant depending upon system data 4 There is n...

Page 270: ...ND in accordance with a predetermined numbering plan STEP 3 ASPA Assign an access code to CALL FORWARDING ALL CALLS C 5 entry SID 8 and to CALL FORWARDING ALL CALLS C 5 cancel SID 9 Assign Connection Status Index CI for Normal N service STEP 4 ASFC Assign the stations to activate CALL FORWARDING ALL CALLS C 5 a Service Feature Class that allows SFI 7 STEP 5 AKYD For Dterm sets CALL FORWARDING ALL ...

Page 271: ...ncement equipment Assign TN Tenant Number EQP Announcement Equipment Number 0 Dead Level 1 Unused Number LCR OPR not programmed 2 Available 3 Available 4 Outgoing Trunk Group Busy Announcement 5 Available 6 Available 7 Outgoing Route Restriction Announcement 8 15 Available for ANNOUNCEMENT SERVICE A 15 applications RT TK Route and trunk number of the trunk connected to the announcement equipment C...

Page 272: ... data is 3FH 30 seconds System Data 2 Index 0 Bit 0 Is CALL BACK enabled on a per tenant basis 0 1 No Yes System Data 2 Index 4 Bit 0 CALL BACK and TRUNK QUEUING access code are same or separate 0 1 Separate Same System Data 3 Index 3 Bit 5 Enable Ringer pattern 5 for CALL BACK See DISTINCTIVE RINGING D 10 System Data 3 Index 7 Assign data 42H for four seconds ON two seconds OFF FCCS Programming T...

Page 273: ...ed outside number receive service set tone To cancel 1 Lift the handset receive dial tone 2 Dial the CALL FORWARDING DON T ANSWER OUTSIDE cancel code same as CALL FORWARDING DON T ANSWER C 3 cancel code receive service set tone To set from a multi line Dterm 1 Press the multi line feature key to be used for CALL FORWARDING DON T ANSWER OUTSIDE 2 Lift the handset or press the SPEAKER key receive di...

Page 274: ...List numbers may be programmed as the destination telephone number This permits the sent digits to exceed the 24 digit maximum 5 When using this feature the forwarding station is recorded by SMDR S 10 as the originating station of calls forwarded See ASYD System Data 1 Index 20 Bit 7 6 This feature can be restricted by the RSC of the originating station 7 Route PEG COUNT P 7 is used for CALL FORWA...

Page 275: ...L DENIAL TOLL DIVERSION T 6 is not activated 14 When a caller places a call via OGCA Outgoing Call Alternative and when the first outgoing route and the calling party are restricted this service cannot be set In this case the service can be set via the following procedure a assign a dummy route b clear the restriction between the dummy route and all the stations c assign the dummy route as the fir...

Page 276: ...in 30 seconds provided this is programmed in system data If no disconnection timing is programmed the Attendant will control disconnection 4 This feature is provided on a per tenant basis 5 This feature is only available on Attendant originated calls 6 Only one message can be provided for different intercept conditions 7 Before connection to the announcement machine is made the system can be progr...

Page 277: ...o the NCN Assign the announcement equipment data UGN User Group Number EQP Announcement Equipment Number 0 Dead Level 1 Unused Number 2 15 Announcement service C Duration of Connection 0 Disconnection occurs in 30 seconds 1 Connection is held until the station is released See the requirements of the application for the announcement equipment For Dead level applications assign data 0 R Sending RBT ...

Page 278: ... 63 7 When an additional Dterm is allowed this service or when a Dterm data using this service is deleted the circuit card that accommodates the port of the Dterm must be initialized 8 This feature can be programmed in Local data Memory LDM 9 When using the FCCS network this feature is available for UCD stations belonging to the node that accommodates the UCD controlling station 10 When using the ...

Page 279: ...e UCD group After one station is assigned in the group all stations in the group will automatically have the same threshold value QTH ACT UCD Queueing Peg Count Value Valid Invalid 1 0 QTH UCD Queueing Peg Count Value 0 255 MCI Message Center Interface Data Transfer Valid Invalid 1 0 CWT Call Waiting Threshold Value 1 255 1 255 Quantity of calls in UCD queue before the UCD Call Waiting Lamp will b...

Page 280: ...ll Waiting Threshold Value 1 255 MCI 0 1 Message Center Interface data transfer is Valid Invalid Note 1 When using ASYDL or ASYDN to program an FCCS feature the basic programming of ASYD is required in addition to ASYDL or ASYDN Note 2 When programming the data initialize the ELC card which accommodates the UCD group station ...

Page 281: ...b a station setting CALL FORWARDING ALL CALLS C 5 2 CALL FORWARDING I M HERE can be set to the following stations a a station setting CALL FORWARDING I M HERE b a station where CALL FORWARDING ALL CALLS C 5 is being set 3 A call can be forwarded multiple times following CALL FORWARDING I M HERE setting if assigned in system data 4 CALL FORWARDING I M HERE can be set or cancelled from a subline of ...

Page 282: ... 1 1D that is set to or from the forwarding station has priority over CALL FORWARDING I M HERE recall or answer call for CALL BACK is not the object of CALL FORWARDING I M HERE 20 When using the FCCS network if this feature is set from the target station in the remote node within an FCCS network dial the telephone number for the forwarding station number 21 When using the FCCS network the telephon...

Page 283: ...ook at the station on which Call Forwarding All Calls service is set 0 1 Dial Tone DT Special Dial Tone SPDT SYS2 Index 6 b4 Call Origination Restriction of Station upon Setting Call Forwarding All Calls 0 1 Required Not Required STEP 2 ANPDN Assign the first number of the numbering level for feature set and cancel access code STEP 3 ASPAN Assign the feature access code CI N SRV SSC and SID28 Call...

Page 284: ... Station A releases from the call Station B will be connected to the Attendant Service Conditions 1 This feature is available for DTMF telephones TEC 23 12 only 2 The trunk that passes the hooking signal is determined by Route Class Data 3 A COT is required for this application 4 A Dterm instrument may have a CAS switch hook key assigned as one of its feature line appearance buttons or it can use ...

Page 285: ...dure is the same as for normal CALL FORWARDING DON T ANSWER C 3 operation Service Conditions 1 This feature is available in the U S A and Canada and only works in the following cases a Station call to a station that has set CALL FORWARDING DON T ANSWER to a UCD group b Trunk call to a station that has set CALL FORWARDING DON T ANSWER to a UCD group c Attendant transfers a station or trunk call to ...

Page 286: ... Dterm 2 5 Enter an access code for Call Hold Conference and line number of line A 6 Three party conference is established To operate from an analog station 1 Make a trunk station call using line A on the Dterm 2 Place the in progress call on hold 3 Place or answer a call using an analog station 4 Press momentarily the SHF key of the analog station 5 Enter an access code for Call Hold Conference a...

Page 287: ...cording to the system data SYS1 Index 33 b6 b5 b4 b3 In case the held party is the station the billing stops at the time the station is placed on hold Programming STEP 1 ASFC Call Hold Conference must be allowed for appropriate service feature classes SFCs SFI 75 STEP 2 ANPD Reserve a number level for feature access STEP 3 ASPA Assign an access code for Call Hold Conference CI H SRV SSCA Service C...

Page 288: ... optional number 1 Lift the handset 2 Dial the Access Code ACC for registration of Restriction Number by dialing an optional number 3 Receive special dial tone SPDT 4 Dial the number to be restricted 5 Receive service set tone after the preassigned inter digit timer default is 6 seconds Note 1 6 The dialed number is registered as the Restriction Number To cancel the registered Restriction Number 1...

Page 289: ...is registered to the line corresponding to the specified telephone number or LENS is displayed To cancel the registered Restriction Number 1 Confirm that the Restriction Number to be cancelled is displayed on the LCD See the above mentioned procedure To confirm the registered Restriction Number 2 Press the or key for the Restriction Number to be cleared depends on the system data while the corresp...

Page 290: ... is already assigned to the CID such numbers as 1 12 1234 cannot be assigned 4 When the calling number is received via CCIS line this feature is available for the first 16 digits provided that 1 is assigned to CDN 98 CI of ARTD command 5 This service is available only for stations single line telephone and Dterm 6 This service is available for the following cases a When an incoming call is directl...

Page 291: ... containing some lines the Restriction Number is effective only for the line to be registered the number 18 When confirming the registered Restriction Number the number registered on MY LINE is displayed for 5 seconds on the LCD 19 This service is available only when the predetermined Restriction Number and the receiving Physical Station Number telephone number or the calling number are exactly th...

Page 292: ... The Set Delete key is available for only 5 seconds while the number is displayed 33 When the proper ELC card is not used the indication for the operation is not displayed at the middle line of the LCD In this case Restriction Number is set or deleted by Set Delete key or 34 When all calling numbers are deleted the CALL BLOCK key goes off 35 ACID applies only to inbound trunk calls with ANI 36 ACI...

Page 293: ...0 b1 Decide the cancel key for the registered Restriction Number 0 1 key key STEP 2 ASPA Assign the access code for Call Block SRV SSCA SIDA 111 ACC for the latest incoming call is to be the Restriction Number SIDA 112 ACC for assigning the Restriction Number by dialing an optional number SIDA 113 ACC for cancelling the Restriction Number STEP 3 ASFC Assign a Service Feature Class to allow CALL BL...

Page 294: ...of Call Block for Dterm according to the following parameter TN Tenant Number STN Station Number SKP 1 15 Soft Key Pattern of Call Block assigned in ADSL LKP 1 2 Location of Key Pattern PG 0 1 Soft Key Feature Key is allocated for Page Change Key STEP 7 ASYD Assign the routine diagnosis program start time System Data 1 Index 87 hour Index 88 minutes System Data 1 Index 90 Bit 1 1 Routine Backup is...

Page 295: ...term with the Call Return key a While in idle state press the Call Return key b The saved calling number is displayed for 5 seconds When multiple numbers are stored the display changes each time the Call Return key is pressed The number is displayed from the latest to the oldest When the indication reaches the oldest number the latest number appears again by pressing the Call Return key 3 Call Ori...

Page 296: ...alling number is not received d A maximum of 32 digits can be saved However when the calling number is received via CCIS line this feature is available for the first 16 digits provided that 1 is assigned to 98 CI of ARTD command e When a trunk access code ex 9 is required for call origination to the saved number the access code must be added on a route basis by ACNP and ACND commands Note that the...

Page 297: ...Conditions cont d b This feature is available for following calls ISDN C O Call CCIS Call via ISDN C O Line Station to Station Call PBX Terminal B Termination ISDN C O Line Terminal A PBX PBX Terminal B Termination ISDN C O Line CCIS Line Terminal A PBX PBX Terminal A Termination Terminal B PBX ...

Page 298: ... call the calling number is not saved c When the ELC circuit card is initialized stored number data is deleted d The calling number is displayed on the Dterm LCD when a call is terminated to Prime Line Accordingly when My Line of the Dterm is not Prime Line the displayed calling number is not saved e When a call is terminated to My Line even if the Dterm user is in conversation using Sub Line the ...

Page 299: ...e Conditions for Manual Saving a Manual Saving is available for the Dterm with the Save and Repeat key b This service is available when a Dterm is in communication with the terminating trunk c When the calling number is saved S R and the first 12 digits are displayed on the Dterm LCD d When the circuit card listed in item 1 b is not used the first 6 digits of the received number are saved e Call o...

Page 300: ...n progress on hold 3 From Station B dial the access code and Station A s telephone number 4 Station B is connected to the station or trunk call that is on hold at Station A Service Conditions 1 Only stations in the same tenant can use this feature 2 This feature remains in effect even after hold timeout and the station is in the re ring state 3 This feature also overrides the Exclusive Hold featur...

Page 301: ...lready assigned number b The number whose first part is the same as the already assigned number For example when 123 is already assigned to the CID such as number as 1 12 and 1234 cannot be assigned 4 When a calling number is sent via CCIS line this feature is available for the first 16 digits only 5 The name display is available only when a call directly terminates to a Dterm from the trunk recei...

Page 302: ...e received numbers of a calling number and characters of the assigned name exceed the display field whether to put them close to the right or left may be chosen by system data At this time an asterisk is indicated on the exceeded digit position 16 The displayed number and characters flash when a call terminates and lights steadily during conversation 17 To display the Caller ID information on the ...

Page 303: ... The Calling Number b1 Assign the information displayed on the top line of the LCD 0 1 0 Caller ID data 1 Call Type Sub address b2 Enable to display Caller ID information on the Dterm to which the called line is assigned as a sub line 0 1 Out In service STEP 2 ACID Assign the desired name against the calling number TYPE 3 Calling Party Number Name Assignment and Display CID Caller ID Number SRV3 1...

Page 304: ... termination the called party answers the call 2 After speech the called party releases the call 3 The called party lifts the handset 4 The called party dials the access code 5 Information on the malicious call is output as System Message 26 R Using Soft Feature Key To output the System Message for an abandoned call 1 After call termination the calling party abandons the call 2 The called party li...

Page 305: ... available for originating calls 4 Because a Dterm can contain multiple lines the message output is executed on a line basis Therefore when activating this feature via an access code use the line that actually handled the target call 5 When a call is terminated via a transfer i e the call is transferred from other station the System Message 26 R shows the information only related to the immediate ...

Page 306: ... contains the called station informer 9 The default message output grade is shown below 10 To obtain the Caller ID via an analog trunk be sure to use PA 8COTBJ Other analog trunk cards cannot provide this feature 11 This service is available with the Analog Caller ID Service Interactions 1 When the service DUAL STATION CALL D 156 is used a call can be terminated to a Main Station and a Sub Station...

Page 307: ... Key on the Dterm Series E for CALL TRACE SKP 0 15 Soft Key Pattern SN 1 DT 4 Communication in Progress Status Number SKN 1 16 Soft Key Number FKY 129 CALL TRACE STEP 6 ADKS Assign the following to use a Soft Key on the Dterm Series E for CALL TRACE TN Tenant Number STN Station Number SKP 0 15 Soft Key Pattern assigned in STEP 5 LKP 1 3 Location of Key Pattern PG 0 1 LCD Page Change Soft Key Line ...

Page 308: ...UX Station A HOLD Station B Station C MUX Station A Station B Station C ROT After station B goes switch hook flash After station B goes switch hook flash LC LC MUX Station A Station B Station C LC CFT After station B presses DISC key MUX Station A Station B Station C ROT MUX Station A Station B Station C HOLD ELC ELC CFT When station B presses CONF key before pressing DISC key THREE WAY CALLING Dt...

Page 309: ...tion C Idle ELC ELC ELC MUX Station A Station B Station C HOLD ELC CFT When Station B presses CONF key before pressing Note Note Situation 2 When Station B is held by Station C during Situation 1 in this case only Dterm is available Station A Original Call Station B Operating station for this feature Dterm Analog Station PS Station C Second call called by Station B it can be disconnected by this f...

Page 310: ...n C ROT CFTB card Procedure for Dterm Situation 3 When Station B is talking with Station C after Station B holds Consultation Hold All Calls Dterm C 17 Station A while Station A and B in a conference Add On Conference 8 Party A 121 PS ISDN terminal equipment cannot be applied to this feature Station A Original Call conference member Station B Operating station for this feature conference member St...

Page 311: ...the last terminal connected with operation station Therefore when the user changes a party using TRANSFER key original party and second party are also changed 10 When there is a call originated from attendant console in the calls related to this feature this feature is not available 11 When assigning DISC key to soft key DISC is displayed on a LCD of Dterm HELP for DISC key is as follows Programmi...

Page 312: ...ommodates the called Attendant Console must be assigned after system data assignment Interactions 1 Stations will terminate to the Attendant Console located in the same tenant when the station dials 0 2 Stations in Tenant A will terminate to the Attendant Console of Tenant B if Tenant A is not equipped with an Attendant Console Tenant B s Attendant Console must be programmed to accept calls from T...

Page 313: ...used to activate FCCS services When used as an FCCS feature these commands replace the non network commands for example AAED is replaced by AAEDN Note that the data setting for FCCS service varies depending on the node STEP 1 ASPAL This data must be assigned to the node calling the attendant SRV SSC SID 2 Operator Call FPC FPC of the node that accommodates the called attendant console ...

Page 314: ...N ACCESS trunk is routed to reorder tone 9 MISCELLANEOUS TRUNK RESTRICTIONS M 3 This feature prevents certain stations from using miscellaneous service trunks Any attempt to access the DICTATION ACCESS trunk from a station with this feature assigned is routed to reorder tone Interactions 1 OUTGOING TRUNK QUEUING O 2 If OUTGOING TRUNK QUEUING O 2 is provided and the user dials a busy trunk route th...

Page 315: ...TATION ACCESS route as follows RT 1 1 OSGS 2 2 0NSG 3 5 TF 1 6 TCL 10 7 L T 1 8 RLP 2 44 PRV 1 STEP 4 ATRK Assign the LENs DICTATION ACCESS trunk route number trunk number and tenant number STEP 5 MBTK Assign the Make Idle status to the DICTATION ACCESS trunk Note If supervision is required use the first two circuits of the 16COT circuit card Move the switch on 16COT to PGT STEP 6 ARRC If TIE Line...

Page 316: ...umber will be displayed 4 The ATTENDANT CONSOLE A 3 digital display is limited to a 6 digit numeric display Since the Class of Service and trunk routing display is in numeric form a list must be provided to the Attendant explaining the restrictions of each Class of Service number and trunk identification number 5 CALL FORWARDING C 2 3 5 When this feature is activated by or for the called station t...

Page 317: ...been assigned for a station it is displayed on the Attendant Console However if a telephone number is 7 digits or more Physical Station Number is displayed Programming ASYD System Data 1 Index 82 Bits 0 3 Assign a hex value according to the choice HEX Station Information 0 TN CLS 4 digit Station Number 1 TN 4 digit Station Number 2 RSC 4 digit Station Number 3 TN 5 digit Station Number 4 RSC 5 dig...

Page 318: ... A 3 display while TENANT T 12 and trunk route numbers are simultaneously displayed on the left Example 1 Example 2 Example 3 3 If the Trunk Route Number is three digits the Trunk Identification Number and Trunk Route Number are displayed 4 The ATTENDANT CONSOLE A 3 digital display is limited to a 6 digit numeric display Since the Class of Service and trunk routing display is in numeric form a lis...

Page 319: ...used simultaneously in the same system and are applied on a per route basis CDN 25 R L Route and Trunk Number STEP 3 ATRK The route and trunk number assigned here provides the system with specific information on types of routes and their associated trunks LENs number of tenants and any CLASS OF SERVICE INDIVIDUAL C 15 route restriction information Central Office Code STEP 4 ACOC Each trunk must be...

Page 320: ...ing call will follow the hunt group station assignment If the station is in a CALL FORWARDING C 2 3 5 mode the incoming call is connected to the CALL FORWARD target station 7 This feature is normally used where direct in service is required on a limited basis The number of stations serviced is effectively limited to the number of trunks available for DIRECT IN TERMINATION 8 DIRECT IN TERMINATION i...

Page 321: ...e 3 The DIRECT IN TERMINATION trunk is limited to the following types a DDD b FX c WATS d CCSA 4 All CALL FORWARDING C 2 3 5 features may be used in conjunction with DIRECT IN TERMINATION In the case of CALL FORWARDING DON T ANSWER C 3 the call must physically be ringing the DIT station Call Forwarding is only available from a ground start DIT trunk 5 STATION HUNTING S 7 8 9 and UNIFORM CALL DISTR...

Page 322: ...he Route Number Trunk Number Connection Service Index 4 for NIGHT CONNECTION FIXED DIT N 1 Then assign the Tenant Number and Station Number to serve as the DIT station FCCS Programming This data setting describes only the additional or replacement commands used to activate FCCS services When used as an FCCS feature these commands replace the non network commands for example AAED is replaced by AAE...

Page 323: ...h this feature 7 The DID trunk contains a switchable 2db transmission pad that is switched in or out via software control 8 If DID trunk is immediate start dial pulse is required Interactions 1 Incoming calls have priority over outgoing calls When a register is assigned as an Outgoing Register Trunk ORT it will also act as an Incoming Register Trunk IRT if no IRTs are available Therefore ORTs can ...

Page 324: ...s the number of digits usually required STEP 7 ARSC The DID station receiving the call must be assigned a Route Restriction Class RSC that will allow the station to be connected to the incoming DID route The DID route must be allowed via Route Restriction Indexes RRI 0 1 FCCS Programming This data setting describes only the additional or replacement commands used to activate FCCS services When use...

Page 325: ...originating station line Fully Restricted Stations Direct Outward Dialing attempts are routed to reorder tone when the station is fully restricted Restriction from Outgoing Calls A station assigned this feature is denied the ability to dial access preselected trunk groups HOT LINE H 1 Exchange network call completion using this feature is not permitted The originating station can only be routed to...

Page 326: ...tation access to the involved routes FCCS Programming This data setting describes only the additional or replacement commands used to activate FCCS services When used as an FCCS feature these commands replace the non network commands for example AAED is replaced by AAEDN Note that the data setting for FCCS service varies depending on the node Note STEP 1 ANPDL Reserve a number level for outgoing t...

Page 327: ...g External Call a RINGER PATTERN 0 1 second ring 2 second silence 3 Recall Ringing for CALL BACK C 1 CALL WAITING ORIGINATING C 31 or OUTGOING TRUNK QUEUING O 2 a RINGER PATTERN 1 2 second ring 4 second silence Or RINGER PATTERN 5 2 second ring 3 bursts 1 second silence Note These timing parameters can be changed via the end users requirements 1 15 seconds 4 This feature may be assigned per trunk ...

Page 328: ... this Index System Data 3 Index 3 Bit 1 2 Burst 0 4 sec ON 0 2 sec OFF 0 4 sec ON on the ON Time for Ringer Pattern 1 0 1 Not Required Required RINGER PATTERN 5 System Data 3 Index 7 Timer Value for Ringer Pattern 5 System Data 3 Index 3 Bit 5 3 Burst 0 4 sec ON 0 2 sec OFF 0 8 sec ON 0 2 sec OFF 0 4 sec ON on the ON Time for Ringer Pattern 5 0 1 Not Required Required System Data 1 Index 417 Bit 0...

Page 329: ...Y Line 4 DND is not displayed on the calling station s Dterm when the called station is in the DO NOT DISTURB condition Restriction REST appears on the display in place of DND reorder tone is heard and no indication will appear in the DO NOT DISTURB condition when the calling station is a HOTLINE H 1 5 A DND station in a HUNT GROUP D 7 8 9 is skipped 6 CALL FORWARDING BUSY LINE C 2 can be activate...

Page 330: ...D Assign the following key data for the Dterm TN 1 STN Station Number TP Type of Dterm 0 1 RING 0 No Ringing 1 Ringing All Lines 2 Ringing on Prime Line Only 3 Flexible Ring Assignment enables RG parameter KYN Key Number 1 40 KYI Service Index 0 Key Not Used 1 Feature Key 2 Multi Line Key KD Not assigned for Feature Key FKY Feature key Number FKY 50 DO NOT DISTURB STEP 2 ADSL Assign SN 0 Idle and ...

Page 331: ... appear in sequence on the LCD display Service Conditions 1 Digits appear from the right and move to the left as additional digits are dialed A maximum of 16 digits can be displayed If more than 16 digits are dialed the first dialed digits will be dropped and the last dialed digit appears This process continues until all digits have been dialed 2 Digits also appear on the display when implementing...

Page 332: ... SERVICE may be assigned to different trunk restriction and service restriction classes 3 Refer to CLASS OF SERVICE INDIVIDUAL C 15 for further details 4 Night mode restriction classes can be set at any time by entering the related command on the MAINTENANCE ADMINISTRATION TERMINAL MAT M 18 5 When TENANT SERVICE T 12 is provided with MULTIPLE CONSOLE OPERATION M 4 the system can be programmed for ...

Page 333: ...e Attendant Console accommodated in the terminating node for the FCCS network 14 Day Night mode is changed by the destination node of the operator call assigned system data for the FCCS network Note 15 The node which does not accommodate the Attendant Console controls DAY NIGHT mode of the self node using the external key for the FCCS network 16 The user can assign only one destination node from a...

Page 334: ...age printout on changeover of the Day Night mode 0 1 Out In Service System Data 2 Index 2 Bit 2 Is this a Primary ATTCON system 0 1 No Yes When Primary goes into Night tenant goes into Night System Data 2 Index 2 Bit 3 Is this a normal ATTCON system 0 1 No Yes When all Attendant Consoles go into Night tenant goes into Night STEP 2 ASFC Assign this command for both the Day and Night tables STEP 3 A...

Page 335: ...d or CCITT standard networks 3 The Digital Interface Module DTI is mounted in a Port Interface Module PIM 4 The following two methods may be used for network synchronization a Source Receiver System Source b Source Receiver System Receiver 5 Each office hierarchy is defined as follows a Source Office One center will operate as the Source Office This location has two highly stabilized source oscill...

Page 336: ...ation Clock is derived from incoming PCM bit stream from higher hierarchy offices d Local Receiver Office This is the end office in a digital network arrangement This office will not be provided with a backup route for the PLO because this office is the only one influenced in an event of trouble occurrence 6 Each NEAX2400 IPX can be equipped with a duplicate Phase Lock Oscillator used for network ...

Page 337: ...re mounted assign all four bits as data 1 STEP 2 ARTD Assign the DIRECT DIGITAL INTERFACE route as follows This is for second dial tone TIE Lines RT 1 1 OSGS 2 2 ONSG 3 3 ISGS 2 4 INSG 3 5 TF 3 6 TCL 4 7 L T 1 8 RLP 2 13 AC 1 15 LSG 5 30 PAD 7 NEAX2400 IPX Source Office LEGEND DTI Digital Trunk Interface Card PLO Phase Lock Oscillator Speech Path Clock Route DTI DTI DTI DTI DTI DTI DTI DTI DTI DTI...

Page 338: ...rst digit of the other system s station numbering and the number of digits in the station numbering plan STEP 9 AFRS List the dialing patterns in groups that are served by a specific sequence of routes Use only the DTI routes and the first digit of the station numbering Assign this dialing sequence to an OPR STEP 10 AOPR The AFRS command designates the dialing sequence and the OPR to be selected T...

Page 339: ...USIC ON HOLD M 7 will be heard 6 When a UCD U 1 station becomes idle the incoming call is connected immediately to the idle station even if the incoming call is connected to the DELAY ANNOUNCEMENT UCD 7 If the incoming call comes from a ring down trunk billing begins with the start of the Delayed Announcement 8 If an incoming call encounters all stations busy in a UCD U 1 group and overflows to an...

Page 340: ...eparate for all UCD groups 0 1 Common Separate STEP 2 ARTD Assign the Announcement Route as follows BOTHWAY TIE LINES RT 1 1 OSGS 2 2 ONSG 3 3 ISGS 2 4 INSG 3 5 TF 3 6 TCL 4 7 L T 1 8 RLP 2 15 LSG 5 STEP 3 ATRK Assign the LENs Announcement Route Number Trunk Number and Tenant Number STEP 4 MBTK Assign the Make Idle status to the announcement trunks STEP 5 AUAD AUADL This command is used to assign ...

Page 341: ... data setting for FCCS service varies depending on the node Note 1 STEP 1 ASYDN This data must be assigned to the NCN System Data 1 Index 70 b6 0 1 DAT is common for all the UCD groups DAT is different per UCD group STEP 2 AUADN These data must be assigned to the NCN UGN User Group Number TELN Telephone Number DLYT Delay Timer 0 30 sec 2 second increment MSGT Message Timer 0 30 sec 2 second increm...

Page 342: ...call between any two Dterm s 2 While a call is being held Automatic Recall is initiated after a preprogrammed time on the Dterm that placed the call on Hold 3 For STATION MESSAGE DETAIL RECORDING SYSTEM S 10 information between extensions a call is regarded as completed when the HOLD key is pressed to hold the call When both stations answer the held call it is processed as a new call 4 Even in the...

Page 343: ...WAY E 1 CALL WAITING ORIGINATING C 31 CALL WAITING TERMINATING C 12 Programming ASYD System Data 1 Index 144 Recall timer for EXCLUSIVE NON EXCLUSIVE HOLD Assign data 00H for 30 seconds RAM default data is 3FH System Data 2 Index 12 Bit 0 Is Automatic Recall Ringing provided on a per tenant basis 0 1 Yes No FCCS Programming No unique programming is required for the FCCS network ...

Page 344: ...l flash indicating an incoming DIAL INTERCOM call The called station may also hear distinctive three burst ringing The called Dterm displays 2 If the called station is already engaged in a conversation with a non intercom call the station may press the HOLD key and answer the DIAL INTERCOM call by pressing the DICM key Ringing will stop To bridge 1 When two stations are engaged in a DIAL INTERCOM ...

Page 345: ...maximum number of DIAL INTERCOM groups in the PBX is 50 per Module Group 7 It is possible to simultaneously assign one group of stations as an Automatic Manual Intercom group as well as a DIAL INTERCOM group 8 The distinctive ringing three burst ringing sent from an incoming DIAL INTERCOM station takes priority over the ringing of multi line appearances 9 Features normally available to multi line ...

Page 346: ...X Time Display Dial Intercom Number of the Calling Station Display appears for 10 seconds when the DICM line is preselected Called Station 60 IPM flashing ICM XX Time Display Calling Station Dial Intercom Number of the Calling Station ICM XX Time Display Called Station Dial Intercom Number of the Calling Station ICM XX Time Display Calling Station Dial Intercom Number of the Answering Station ...

Page 347: ...amming STEP 1 ASYD System Data 1 Index 59 Bit 7 Is AUTOMATIC MANUAL and DIAL INTERCOM in service 0 1 No Yes System Data 1 Index 69 Bit 6 Is a Warning Tone required when creating a three way AUTOMATIC MANUAL INTERCOM call 0 1 No Yes System Data 1 Index 78 Bits 0 1 Assign both Bits as data 1 to enable full Dterm display operation System Data 3 Index 3 Assign data 20H for burst ringing if necessary S...

Page 348: ...tations 2 64 actual number to dial ICM STN Intercom Station Number STEP 3 AKYD Assign an Intercom Line to the station according to the following parameters TN 1 STN Station Number TP Type of Dterm 0 1 RING 0 No Ringing 1 Ringing All Lines 2 Ringing on Prime Line Only 3 Flexible Ring Assignment enables RG parameter PRI Form of Line Preference 0 3 KYN Key Number 1 40 KYI Service Index 0 Key Not Used...

Page 349: ...e boss s station may be routed to multiple secretaries by assigning timing delays for ringing to each secretary s station When a call to the boss station is received it rings on Secretary A s station If it is not answered in a preprogrammed time it will also ring on Secretary B s station If Secretary B does not answer within the second preprogrammed time the call will also ring on Boss s station A...

Page 350: ... not answered within the second preprogrammed time the call also rings on Station C If the call is not answered within the third preprogrammed time the call also rings on Station D a An incoming call Indication Indication Ringing A A A b After the first preprogrammed time A A A Indication Ringing Ringing Station A Station B Station C Secretary A Secretary B Station C c After the second preprogramm...

Page 351: ...hook ringing 2 Stations that have multi line appearances with DELAYED RINGING Dterm assigned must be aware of the interaction with CALL FORWARDING DON T ANSWER C 2 Example Station A appears on Dterm B with a delayed ringing of 30 seconds RG 4 and also on Dterm C with a delayed ringing time of 20 seconds RG 5 If Station A sets CALL FORWARDING DON T ANSWER C 2 and the CALL FORWARDING DON T ANSWER C ...

Page 352: ...signments Enables RG Parameters PL TN STN Prime Line Tenant and Station Number KYN Key Number 1 40 KYI Service Index 0 Key Not Used 1 Feature Key 2 Multi line Key KD Kind of Line 0 Multi line 1 Intercom Line TN STN Tenant Number and Station Number of Multi line Appearance RG Ringing Assignment of Multi line Appearance 0 No Ringing 1 Ringing Day Only 2 Ringing Night Only 3 Not Used 4 30 Second Dela...

Page 353: ...When an incoming call terminates to an Attendant Console the LDN key lamp starts to flash and ringing starts at the Attendant Console and the calling party receives the ringback tone 2 When the Attendant has not answered for the designated time SYS1 Index 242 the call is connected to the announcement trunk automatically the lamp keeps flashing and the ringing continues at the Attendant Console 3 I...

Page 354: ...ouncement b The announcement trunk is not released by Attendant upon answering or releasing the incoming trunk 11 For single connections this service is not available when the announcement trunks are all busy 12 When an external announcement machine is used the announcement starts from the time the PBX acknowledges the announcement trunk answer and ends at the time of the announcement trunk releas...

Page 355: ...ervice is activated as follows 12 This feature is not available for the following calls a AUTOMATIC RECALL A 8 calls b calls from an Attendant ATTENDANT TO ATTENDANT CALLING A 60 INTER POSITION TRANSFER I 5 c calls from a station DIAL ACCESS TO ATTENDANT D 2 OFF HOOK ALARM O 6 PRIORITY CALL P 9 etc d calls transferred to the Attendant due to unused number dialing e calls transferred to the night s...

Page 356: ...is terminated to the attendant console STEP 2 ARTD Assign the route data of the Announcement Trunk 15 LSG 5 28 ANS 0 Access to announcement trunk is controlled by the current operation Timer Control 1 Answer and Release Timings are determined by DAT itself or the external announcement equipment Note When the external announcement equipment is used assign 1 in ANS parameter STEP 3 ATRK Assign the t...

Page 357: ...r the external announcement equipment Note When the external announcement equipment is used assign 1 in ANS parameter STEP 3 ATRK Assign the trunk data of the Announcement Trunk STEP 4 MBTK Cancel the make busy of the trunk assigned by ATRK STEP 5 AAED Assign the data to the announcement unit number and the route data etc assigned by ATRK EQP 49 50 51 52 53 for the 1st announcement 54 55 56 57 58 ...

Page 358: ...k tone The originally connected party is placed on hold MUSIC ON HOLD M 7 2 When the third party answers announce the call and replace the handset The originally connected party and the third party are connected Note 1 When the user flashes switch hook during ringback tone the user returns to the held party and the third party the DSS station stops ringing Note 2 If the user replaces the handset b...

Page 359: ...I hold etc 8 The DSS console and the connected Dterm may be accommodated in the different circuit card but should belong to the same module group 9 A ringing line is programmable for line keys when the device is used as an Add On Module ADM only For example if Station A calls Station B and Station B shows up on a DSS Console the indication at the DSS Console is a flashing red LED not ringing Even ...

Page 360: ...ction describes how to assign a DSS BLF For ease in understanding the associated data programming is explained using the example below Data Programming Procedure DSS BLF When assigning DSS BLF data perform the following procedure Note that X indicates the value should be tailored to the existing system TERMINAL LINE EQUIPMENT NUMBER LEN STATION NUMBER STN DSS BLF Note 000100 200 000101 201 Dterm 0...

Page 361: ...are assigned using the second port LV 1 in this example Be sure to assign the associated Dterm station number as the Station Number of Prime Line TN X STN 200 or 201 TP 1 Buttons 1 40 assignable RING X PRI 0 LN PRE 0 Prime Line Pick up MWD X PL TN X STN 400 Enter the associated Dterm as a PL STN S 0 Off Hook Suppression is off KYN 1 must be programmed as the DSS BLF station which has been assigned...

Page 362: ...QUIPMENT NUMBER LENS TELE EQUIP CLASS TEC 1 31 ROUTE REST CLASS RSC 0 15 SERVICE FEATURE CLASS SFC 0 15 REMARKS MG U G LV X 200 0 0 0 1 0 0 X X X For DSS BLF 201 0 0 0 1 0 1 X X X For DSS BLF 400 0 0 0 1 0 7 X X X For Assoc Dterm 00 05 04 03 02 01 54 59 58 57 56 55 48 53 52 51 50 49 42 47 46 45 44 43 36 41 40 39 38 37 30 35 34 33 32 31 24 29 28 27 26 25 18 23 22 21 20 19 12 17 16 15 14 13 06 11 10...

Page 363: ...term 0 KEY NUMBER KYN 1 16 SERVICE KEY INDEX KYI 0 2 FEATURE KEY NUMBER FKY 1 65 MULTI LINE INTERCOM LINE IDENTITY KD 0 3 TENANT NUMBER TN 1 15 STATION NUMBER STN MAX 5 DIGITS KIND OF INTERCOM ICM 0 2 GROUP ID NUMBER G ID 1 50 1 2 Multi Line 0 Line X 200 2 2 Multi Line 0 Line X 400 Dterm 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 2 Multi Line 2 DSS X X X X 11 2 Multi Line 2 DSS X X X X 12 2 Multi Line 2 DSS X X X X 13 2 Mu...

Page 364: ... MWD 0 1 PRIME LINE OG FROM PRIME LINE S 0 1 TENANT NUMBER TN 1 63 STATION NUMBER STN MAX 5 DIGITS X X 400 Dterm 0 KEY NUMBER KYN 1 16 SERVICE KEY INDEX KYI 0 2 FEATURE KEY NUMBER FKY 1 65 MULTI LINE INTERCOM LINE IDENTITY KD 0 3 TENANT NUMBER TN 1 15 STATION NUMBER STN MAX 5 DIGITS KIND OF INTERCOM ICM 0 2 GROUP ID NUMBER G ID 1 50 1 2 Multi Line 0 Line X 201 2 2 Multi Line 0 Line X 400 Dterm 3 4...

Page 365: ...access keys to the Add On Module The upper 24 Line Feature access keys belong to the associated Dterm and the remaining lower 36 Line Feature access keys belong to the Add on Module Assignment of the Dterm and first 24 keys on the ADM For assigning these keys information the associated Dterm port is used TN X STN 200 TERMINAL LINE EQUIPMENT NUMBER LEN STATION NUMBER STN Add On Module 000101 201 No...

Page 366: ...7 40 Correspond to KYNs 1 24 on the Add On Module KYI X KD X TN X STN XXXX RG X ICM X G ID X Assignment of the last 36 keys on the ADM For assigning these keys information the Add On Module port is used TN X STN 201 TP 1 Buttons 1 40 assignable RING X PRI 0 LN PRE 0 Prime Line Pick up MWD X PL TN X STN 200 Enter the associated Dterm as a PLSTN S 0 Off Hook Suppression is off KYN 5 40 Correspond to...

Page 367: ...C 1 31 ROUTE REST CLASS RSC 0 15 SERVICE FEATURE CLASS SFC 0 15 REMARKS MG U G LV X 200 0 0 0 1 0 0 X X X For Dterm 201 0 0 0 1 0 1 X X X For Add On Module 00 05 04 03 02 01 54 59 58 57 56 55 48 53 52 51 50 49 42 47 46 45 44 43 36 41 40 39 38 37 30 35 34 33 32 31 24 29 28 27 26 25 18 23 22 21 20 19 12 17 16 15 14 13 06 11 10 09 08 07 Upper Lower Use KYNs 5 40 of the Add On Module for programming t...

Page 368: ...IME LINE OG FROM PRIME LINE S 0 1 TENANT NUMBER TN 1 63 STATION NUMBER STN MAX 5 DIGITS X X 200 Dterm 0 KEY NUMBER KYN 1 16 SERVICE KEY INDEX KYI 0 2 FEATURE KEY NUMBER FKY 1 65 MULTI LINE INTERCOM LINE IDENTITY KD 0 3 TENANT NUMBER TN 1 15 STATION NUMBER STN MAX 5 DIGITS KIND OF INTERCOM ICM 0 2 GROUP ID NUMBER G ID 1 50 1 X X X X X X X 2 X X X X X X X 3 X X X X X X X 4 X X X X X X X 5 X X X X X ...

Page 369: ...e 1 X 0 0 LINE PREFERENCE FOR ANSWER BUTTON ANS 0 2 LINE PREFERENCE FOR ORIGINATING BUTTON ORG 0 1 MESSAGE WAITING DATA DISPLAY SELECTION MWD 0 1 PRIME LINE OG FROM PRIME LINE S 0 1 TENANT NUMBER TN 1 63 STATION NUMBER STN MAX 5 DIGITS X X 200 Dterm 0 KEY NUMBER KYN 1 16 SERVICE KEY INDEX KYI 0 2 FEATURE KEY NUMBER FKY 1 65 MULTI LINE INTERCOM LINE IDENTITY KD 0 3 TENANT NUMBER TN 1 15 STATION NUM...

Page 370: ...ling number that begins with the assigned number For example when 1471 is assigned to the CID this feature is applied to any calling number that begins with 1471 such as 1471 12 3456 and 1 471 234 5678 5 The following numbers cannot be assigned to the parameter CID of ACID command The first part of the already assigned number The number whose first part is the same as the already assigned number F...

Page 371: ...rn 1 System Data 3 Index 0 Assign Timer Value for Ringer Pattern 0 System Data 3 Index 1 Assign Timer Value for Ringer Pattern 1 System Data 3 Index 3 Bit 0 2 Burst on the ON Time for Ringer Pattern 0 0 1 Not required Required System Data 3 Index 3 Bit 1 2 Burst on the ON Time for Ringer Pattern 1 0 1 Not required Required System Data 3 Index 3 Bit 5 3 Burst on the ON Time for Ringer Pattern 5 0 1...

Page 372: ...ring 2 To pick up a call a A station answers the call b The caller is connected with the station which picked up the call the other station stops ringing Note If the call is abandoned both Dterms stop ringing When DUAL STATION CALL is activated with BOSS SECRETARY service B MOVE key is not set Station A Main Station Boss Station Station B Sub Station Station C Secretary station which accommodates ...

Page 373: ...V key accommodated in the Main Station and Sub Station light When the PS key is assigned to the Dterm PS key lights also The LCD displays as shown below 2 To cancel the B MV key a Press the B MV key while the Dterm is idle b Lamps of the B MV key accommodated in the Main Station and Sub Station go off When the PS key is assigned to the Dterm PS key also goes off The LCD displays as shown below Ser...

Page 374: ...NG ALL CALLS C 5 DO NOT DISTURB D 11 2 When CALL FORWARDING DON T ANSWER is set to a Main Station it is activated depending on the time out data programmed in the Main Station 3 When CALL BLOCK is set to a Main Station which is in the middle of being called for DUAL STATION CALL CALL BLOCK has priority over this feature CALL BLOCK cannot be set to Sub Station while DUAL STATION CALL is activated 4...

Page 375: ...tricted 15 When a Sub Station is called through an FCCS link FLEXIBLE ROUTING FCCS F 35 is not available 16 When a Main Station does not pick up a CALL FORWARDING DON T ANSWER call within the preassigned time via system data the Sub Station stops ringing Programming STEP 1 ASYDL System Data 1 Index 513 Assign 01 hex as the LDM s memory block number System Data 1 Index 514 Assign 01 hex as the NDM ...

Page 376: ... soft key pattern 1 15 LKP Key Pattern Data 1 16 Line Feature buttons 16 DSS keys 2 24 Line Feature buttons 8 DSS keys 3 32 Line Feature PG 0 Page Change key appears on the soft key 1 Page Change key appears on the feature key Note 3 When the soft key data is used on a system basis SKP 0 is assigned by the ADSL command this data is not necessary FCCS Programming Refer to the NEAX2400 IPX Fusion Ne...

Page 377: ...DISPLAY Dterm I 10D has been programmed in system data 3 EXECUTIVE RIGHT OF WAY is denied if the busy station is a dialing or in a LINE LOCKOUT L 3 state b listening to a tone c being rung d protected from override via CLASS OF SERVICE INDIVIDUAL C 15 e being connected to an ATTENDANT CONSOLE A 3 loop f activating a conflicting feature such as ATTENDANT OVERRIDE A 7 BOSS SECRETARY OVERRIDE Dterm B...

Page 378: ...ng tone during an EXECUTIVE RIGHT OF WAY connection Normally the two burst warning tone is sent when the connection is initiated 12 The node accommodating the called station requires Conference Trunk CFT function in the FCCS network Programming STEP 1 ASYD System Data 1 Index 70 Bit 7 Send Warning Tone to interrupted parties when Executive Right of Way is in operation 0 1 Required Not Required Sys...

Page 379: ...t the connected parties that an EXECUTIVE RIGHT OF WAY call has been bridged into the connection 2 The LCD display on the interrupted party s Dterm will give an indication only if INTERMEDIATE STATION NUMBER DISPLAY Dterm I 10D has been programmed in system data 3 EXECUTIVE RIGHT OF WAY is denied if the busy station is a dialing or in a LINE LOCKOUT L 3 state b receiving a tone c being rung d prot...

Page 380: ...arning tone during an EXECUTIVE RIGHT OF WAY connection Normally the two burst warning tone is sent when the connection is initiated 10 If the called station line has a party on CALL HOLD C 6 override is not allowed to the called station line Also override to a station line in CALL HOLD C 6 is denied and reorder tone is provided Terminating override calls are denied when the called party has anoth...

Page 381: ...ace the non network commands for example AAED is replaced by AAEDN Note that the data setting for FCCS service varies depending on the node Note STEP 7 ANPDL Assign first digit of access code for EXECUTIVE RIGHT OF WAY STEP 8 ASPAL Assign an access code for EXECUTIVE RIGHT OF WAY SID 4 for Connection Status Index CI of Busy B and Hooking H Note When using ASYDL or ASYDN to program an FCCS feature ...

Page 382: ...itions of the LCD display 2 The ELAPSED TIME can reach a maximum of 9 hours 59 minutes and 59 seconds After that time the clock returns to zero 3 A continuous time display will occur during CONSULTATION HOLD ALL CALLS C 17 and THREE WAY CALLING T 2 4 When a call is transferred the time display of the party receiving the transfer begins from zero 5 The elapsed time is not displayed when the station...

Page 383: ...eld call 4 After a variable programmable period of time the held call will enter AUTOMATIC RECALL A 8 regardless of the status of the Dterm Ringing however is disabled while DO NOT DISTURB Dterm D 11D is activated 5 The LCD of other Dterm stations on which the held line appears will be lit steadily 6 Two Party Hold is not available when a Dterm is engaged in a 3 party conference with a station and...

Page 384: ...ION TO STATION CALLING S 11 e g STATION TO STATION CALLING OPERATOR ASSISTANCE S 12 OFF HOOK ALARM O 6 etc there is no system message printout but CALL BACK C 1 to the calling station is performed 7 When a Dterm is used for an EMERGENCY CALL VOICE CALL V 2 can be used 8 An emergency telephone can assign CALL FORWARDING BUSY LINE C 2 or CALL FORWARDING ALL CALLS C 5 but when transfer is made to oth...

Page 385: ...a station the station cannot be recalled from the emergency station Therefore data security SFI 11 should be 0 must be assigned to the emergency stations so that Camp On and Privacy cannot be set Interactions 1 STATION TO STATION CALLING S 11 must first be provided 2 SINGLE DIGIT STATION CALLING S 1 may be utilized with this feature 3 If re ring is not in service the Emergency Station can press th...

Page 386: ...ute number RT Station outgoing AT 0 Number of digits of caller s telephone number 16 ANI assigned data from the above data Skip 2 Number of digits to be skipped from the top of the telephone number Add 4 Number of digits to be added to ANI information ANI information 7890 a The specified number of Skip digits is deleted from the telephone number 12345 b The ANI sending number is created by combini...

Page 387: ...0 PAD 4 43 BT 1 73 KPST 7 74 KPPT 13 75 STC 15 77 MT 1 STEP 2 ATRK Assign RT 905 to LEN for TK1 TK2 depending on register location Assign RT 904 to LEN for TK1 TK2 depending on register location STEP 3 AAND Assign the following parameters RT 0 Outgoing RT number AT 0 0 1 Station Individual Attendant CC 0 0 1 Main Central Satellite Central Programming is only necessary at the Main node COC Central ...

Page 388: ...des Note To use Multiple Lines beyond different IMGs the Dterm My Line must be accommodated on the PA 16ELCJB B card For details refer to the figure and Service Conditions below Operating Procedure No manual operation is required Service Conditions 1 To use this feature operation of Multiple Lines beyond different IMGs a PA 16ELCJB B circuit card is required 2 Depending on the switch setting on PA...

Page 389: ... Line SL This line designates any other line appearing on a Dterm The MY Line will serve as a prime line unless differentiated in system data programming 5 A maximum of 32 PA 16ELCJB B cards a total of 512 ports can be used for this feature Multiple Lines beyond different IMGs per node Note This is not the case if the Multiple Lines are programmed in a single IMG 6 If the system is a 1 IMG type th...

Page 390: ...s are programmed beyond different IMGs 5 Follow Phone F 31 is not available for this feature Programming STEP 1 ASYD Flag 1 to SYS 1 Index 321 b0 Extended Multiple Line Operation is allowed STEP 2 ASDT A LEN equipped with a Dterm Circuit Board must be assigned a station number and a Telephone Equipment Class TEC of 12 STEP 3 AKYD Assign a MY Line a Prime Line and various sublines to the Dterm s TN...

Page 391: ...EXIBLE B 2 service can be provided only when the defining telephone number digits exceed two 4 The FCCS network allows the user to use a telephone number in addition to the existing station numbers FCCS service features are activated when a telephone number is dialed A telephone number which can be assigned on a station basis is a unique number on the FCCS network Note A maximum of 16 digits can b...

Page 392: ...es programmed here The following data is programmed The following access codes should also be assigned 323 324 325 326 327 328 329 320 CI N H SRV STN Station and NND 4 will be assigned with each of the above FCCS Programming No unique programming is required for the FCCS network FOR STATION 31 FOR STATION 321 FOR STATION 3221 TN 1 TN 1 TN 1 ACC 31 ACC 321 ACC 322 CI N H CI N H CI N H SRV STN Stati...

Page 393: ...rding to CLASS OF SERVICE INDIVIDUAL C 15 programming 3 TOLL DENIAL TOLL DIVERSION T 6 may be provided for FX ACCESS F 2 4 TOLL RESTRICTION 3 6 DIGIT T 7 may be provided for FX trunks on a per route basis 5 Care should be exercised in system data assignment when utilizing this feature in conjunction with LEAST COST ROUTING 3 6 DIGIT L 5 since Foreign Exchange trunks may require that the digit 1 be...

Page 394: ...e Attendant Console trunk group busy lamp may be assigned to indicate the busy idle status for an FX trunk group 12 The COT circuit packages are used to provide the trunk interface circuit 13 An FX route may be used with any other feature available to any other route including the following DIRECT OUTWARD DIALING D 9 REMOTE ACCESS TO SYSTEM R 2 TRUNK TO TRUNK CONNECTION T 10 TRUNK ANSWER FROM ANY ...

Page 395: ...SH BUTTON again To retrieve the original connection after the connection with the transferred station the TRANSFER key should be pressed 2 The FLASH BUTTON is optional Its use in various features will be explained throughout this document Interactions 1 This feature provides switch hook flash capabilities to a Dterm with a Connection Index CI of Busy See ASPA The features in which a FLASH key are ...

Page 396: ...e Programming Manual NDA 24297 Issue 1 Page 353 Flash Button Dterm F 3D Programming cont d STEP 2 ADSL SN 5 Consultation Hold and FKY 21 Flash Button FLASH This command is used for assigning the function to each soft key ...

Page 397: ...sired digits 5 Press the Feature key the LCD displays To add a flash to a stored SPEED CALLING ONE TOUCH S 32D number to a Dterm 1 Stay on hook 2 Press the feature key and the SPEED CALLING ONE TOUCH S 32D key LCD will either be blank or display previously stored digits 3 Press the RECALL key as the first digit a switch hook flash is entered into the memory and the LCD displays 4 If a feature acce...

Page 398: ...h Entry Dterm F 4D Interactions Refer to the NEAX2400 IPX Office Data Specification ASYD System Data 3 Index 2 for programming the characteristics of a switch hook Programming This is a Dterm feature It is inherent to the instrument and requires no programming via the MAT ...

Page 399: ...call ringing while it is in progress 3 Recall ringing Central Office ringing and internal call ringing all vary Refer to DISTINCTIVE RINGING D 10 Interactions The following ASYD assignments are for normal ringer patterns For more information refer to DISTINCTIVE RINGING D 10 Programming STEP 1 ASYD System Data 3 Indexes 0 1 Assign Index 0 as 21 for 1 second ON 2 seconds OFF trunk calls Assign Inde...

Page 400: ... Manual NDA 24297 Issue 1 Page 357 Flexible Ringing Assignment Dterm F 5D Programming cont d RG Ringing Assignment per Multi line Appearance 0 No Ringing 1 Ringing in Day Mode Only 2 Ringing in Night Mode Only 3 Ringing Day and Night ...

Page 401: ... number c time division switch d time and date 3 The following information will appear on a station to trunk FAULTY TRUNK REPORT a station at which the operation was performed b route number and trunk number c time division switch d time and date 4 Stations are assigned this feature according to CLASS OF SERVICE INDIVIDUAL C 15 programming in system data 5 When this feature is activated a supervis...

Page 402: ... a unique digit from 0 9 2nd digit B C when b c equal any two unique digits from 0 9 3rd digit D E when d e equal any two unique digits from 0 9 4th digit F G H when f g h equal any three unique digits from 0 9 5th 8th digits Any combination 0 9 9th 10th digits Assigned using the checksum These are for validation purposes only Note See ETI 082 for details on AUTHORIZATION CODE FORCED ACCOUNT CODE ...

Page 403: ...g plan 4 When a Dterm user initiates the LAST NUMBER CALL Dterm L 6D feature the FORCED ACCOUNT CODE will be recorded if previously dialed 5 The AMND command determines the length of FORCED ACCOUNT CODES based on the first digit of the code For example FORCED ACCOUNT CODES beginning with the digit 4 can be assigned as six digits long and codes beginning with 5 can be assigned as three digits long ...

Page 404: ... the Check Sum method The following data 37H has been used for the example calculation Note If only one digit is to be added via the Check Sum method Index 13 data will be 00H and Index 14 digit X bits 4 7 0 EXAMPLE CALCULATION In AATC 26428 has been assigned In System Data 1 Index 12 bits 0 and 3 were chosen 26428 2 2 4 The decimal value of bits 0 3 of Index 14 7 4 N 7 N 3 7 is obtained as any wh...

Page 405: ...RCED ACCOUNT CODES assign these stations a Service Feature Class SFC that allows SFI 27 This SFC will be assigned to the station in the ASDT command Presently the SFC parameter in the AATC command is inoperative STEP 5 ARSC For this feature to operate properly assign a Route Restriction Class RSC that Toll Restricts see TOLL RESTRICTION 3 6 DIGIT T 10 or denies access to routes on a Direct Dial Ac...

Page 406: ...ature button cannot be used as a line button 2 SPEAKER ANSWER FEATURE CONF and REDIAL should be assigned to feature buttons that have lamps 3 SPEAKER must always be assigned 4 RECALL and TRANSFER must be assigned because they are used to indicate a pause Hooking H and Voice Call V when programming a SPEED CALLING ONE TOUCH Dterm S 26D destination number Programming Flex Key Assignment Example AKYD...

Page 407: ...special dial tone The LCD displays 3 Dial the Station Bus number 209 receive service set tone The LCD displays 4 Replace the handset the service will be activated When the service is restricted the user hears reorder tone after dialing the target telephone number The LCD displays Flashing To confirm 5 Dial 202 from Station A Station B rings and Station A receives ringback tone or vice versa Servic...

Page 408: ...e The service is available after the message is cancelled 7 The following information is swapped when this service is activated Note 1 The Add On Module key information of Dterm does not swap Note 2 There are some hardware firmware limitations in order to swap all the Speed Calling key information The Speed Calling key assigned in the feature keys does not swap ITEM DATA SWAPPED IN FOLLOW PHONE SE...

Page 409: ...s are set CALL FORWARDING BUSY LINE set by the system CALL FORWARDING DON T ANSWER set by the system CALL FORWARDING INTERCEPT ANNOUNCEMENT C 25 b Predetermined station for HOTLINE H 1 c Predetermined station for OFF HOOK ALARM O 6 d DIRECT IN TERMINATION DIT D 7 station 16 If Dterm has individual terminal data assigned this service is available for Dterms with identical terminal data 17 This serv...

Page 410: ...tions return to the previous status However this is not the case with the Speed Calling One Touch keys 22 The DSS Console data does not swap The My Line of the connected Dterm may swap but in this case reassignment of DSS data and cabling will be necessary The above is the same when using DSS as an Add On Module 23 This feature is only available for stations in the same node within the FCCS networ...

Page 411: ...ormal Tie Line service is applied 5 Only the LCR or LCRS is applied for alternate routing to a Tie Line C O line for Tie Line The signaling system is limited to ISDN or CCIS 6 The access code for the alternative route is a maximum of 24 digits assigned by the AFRFL command 7 When the selected non FCCS trunks LCR LCRS are also busy route selection is performed according to the LCR LCRS table The sa...

Page 412: ... CCIS M 34 NAME DISPLAY SYSTEM CCIS N 37 STEP CALL CCIS S 59 VOICE CALL CCIS V 7 Programming FCCS Programming Before this procedure data setting for station to station connection within the FCCS network and the Flexible Route Numbering Plan LCR LCRS data should be programmed STEP 1 ANPD Reserve the number level for the trunk access STEP 2 ASPA Assign SRV LCR LCRS and the access code to seize the f...

Page 413: ... signal channels an IPTRK circuit card is used At this time the IPTRK card accommodated in the self node can be connected to multiple destinations i e IPTRK cards of multiple nodes Point to Point Connection is functionally a kind of form within Point to Multipoint Connection Connection via Cisco router To establish an FCCS link Q SIG is used between the system and the router IPTRK IPTRK Internet I...

Page 414: ...e IPTRK card s connected to the other router Accordingly redundant configuration of FCH FGH is not available 6 A call cannot be established routed across multiple IP networks See the figure below 7 When multiple IPTRK cards are used for node to node connection and all the lines on an IPTRK are busy alternate routing is available see the following figure However if a router or FCH FGH card cannot b...

Page 415: ...e or tie line is available Details on alternate routing patterns are shown in the following table 17 PAD can be provided for Receive control only 18 This feature does not support Broad Band Services H0 H1 of ISDN CCIS line This feature supports 1B only 19 When FCH FGH card is used for FCCS signaling a maximum of 16 nodes can be connected via this feature 20 When FCH FGH card is used for FCCS signa...

Page 416: ...P packet is transmitted between PBXs such as upon remote log in to another node with Windows MAT At this time only the routing for the TCP IP packet is performed by the router 5 The channel number and the connected to router router access number as termination number information can be recognized by adding Q SIG message to TCP IP packet which makes speech channel control between PBX and router ava...

Page 417: ...ion trunk data assigned in the previous step using the MBCT command STEP 5 AFCH Assign FCH number FCHN to each IPTRK card which is used as the FCCS signal controlling card STEP 6 AETH Assign the FCCS route data FPC Assign FPC number 1 253 of the destination node FCHN Assign the FCH number specified in STEP 5 C_RT Connection Route Number of Speech Channel 1 1023 DST_IP Assign IPTRK IP address of th...

Page 418: ...ogramming Manual NDA 24297 Issue 1 Page 375 FCCS Networking via IP F 36 FCCS Programming cont d Note When using ASYDL or ASYDN to program an FCCS feature the basic programming of ASYD is required in addition to ASYDL or ASYDN ...

Page 419: ...ED CALLING STATION S 21 or GROUP S 23 4 A group for GROUP CALLING is identical to that of a SPEED CALLING GROUP S 23 5 The number of groups per Module Group for GROUP CALLING and SPEED CALLING STATION GROUP S 21 23 is limited to the following GROUP CALLING Station Code 1 digit X Maximum 100 Groups 2 digits XX Maximum 10 Groups 6 The number of stations that can be called per group can be set within...

Page 420: ...ND in accordance with a predetermined numbering plan STEP 2 ASPA Two access codes must be assigned for this feature Assign a Tenant and an Access Code ACC for assigning individual speed calling For INDIVIDUAL SPEED CALLING ENTRY assign a Connection Index of Normal N For SRV SSC Service Code assign SID 14 For INDIVIDUAL SPEED CALLING ACCESS assign a tenant and an access code ACC Assign Connection I...

Page 421: ...lled from the hotline has activated CALL FORWARDING DON T ANSWER C 3 the call will be forwarded when the called station doesn t answer after a predetermined time interval 8 STATION HUNTING S 7 8 9 and UCD U 1 will be activated for a call from the hotline but the incoming hotline call cannot be placed in the UCD U 1 queue 9 The hotline station will hear reorder tone ROT if the called station has se...

Page 422: ...ed above for the following parameters HOT TN HOTLINE Tenant STN HOTLINE Station CON TN Connecting Station s Tenant CON STN Connecting Station Number FCCS Programming This data setting describes only the additional or replacement commands used to activate FCCS services When used as an FCCS feature these commands replace the non network commands for example AAED is replaced by AAEDN Note that the da...

Page 423: ...ES may be equipped with or without dials 3 HOUSE PHONE assignments are programmed into system data via the MAINTENANCE ADMINISTRATION TERMINAL MAT M 18 4 There is no limit to the number of HOUSE PHONES permitted in the system Interactions 1 The AHLS command is not needed When a station is programmed as TEC 14 HOTLINE it will automatically be connected to the Attendant Console 2 If the House Phone ...

Page 424: ... the MIC LED lights 3 Press the feature key and 5 to select HANDS FREE operation 4 Press the SPEAKER key and replace the handset respond to the call HANDS FREE To answer a VOICE CALL V 2D 1 Press the feature key and 1 the MIC LED lights 2 Press the feature key and 5 to select HANDS FREE operation 3 Respond to the call HANDS FREE Service Conditions 1 The MIC may be left ON at all times 2 HANDS FREE...

Page 425: ...l or monitor and call without lifting the handset Operating Procedure To dial a call HANDS FREE 1 Press the SPEAKER key receive dial tone a Dial the desired number b When the called party answers lift the handset To monitor a call HANDS FREE 1 When placed on hold press the SPEAKER key 2 Replace the handset when the call resumes pick up the handset Service Conditions None Programming No programming...

Page 426: ... SYSTEM S 3 3 When a user is confronted with a situation whereby all trunks are busy or all senders are busy at the same time calling in this service reorder tone is heard at the HOTLINE stations 4 Outside connection in BROKERAGE HOTLINE OUTSIDE B 12 service can be realized when the LCD indicates a trunk classification such as DDD TIE and CCSA and trunk number for an outgoing call b time duration ...

Page 427: ... the HOTLINE OUTSIDE station as a TEC 18 Virtual Circuit or TEC 14 Hotline TN Tenant Number STN Station Number LENS Line Equipment Number 6 digits TEC Telephone Class 1 31 1 DP 10pps 2 PB 3 DP PB 12 Dterm 13 Data terminal Via Dterm 14 HOTLINE 15 CAS Line 18 Virtual Circuit 23 ISDN Terminal 27 Eight Conference Equipment RSC Route Restriction Class 0 15 For assignment of RSC ARSC command SFC Service...

Page 428: ...er of the calling party TELN Telephone Number of the calling party TYPE 2 The called party is an outside party 3 The called party is a trunk CON UGN User Group Number of the called party for TYPE 2 CON ADC The dialed number for the called party for TYPE 2 CON LRN Logical Route Number of the called party for TYPE 3 CON TK Trunk Number of the called party for TYPE 3 Note 1 When using ASYDL or ASYDN ...

Page 429: ...s required Service Conditions 1 Ringing is applied to a called station as soon as the switch has determined that the station is idle There is no delay caused by waiting for a ring cycle 2 This feature applies to STATION TO STATION S 11 Attendant originated or completed Direct Inward Dialing DID and tie line calls 3 An idle station rings immediately after the last digit of the called station is dia...

Page 430: ...ized Attendant Access PR1 Priority Call 1 PR2 Priority Call 2 PR3 Priority Call 3 SC RC Serial Call Recall Key EMG Off Hook Alarm 5 More than one INCOMING CALL IDENTIFICATION lamp can be duplicated at the ATTENDANT CONSOLE A 3 The Attendant can select any incoming call by pressing the associated key 6 Calls can be answered via the ANSWER key for first in first out priority CALL QUEUING C 9 7 ATTEN...

Page 431: ...n Bit 3 Interposition Transfer Note System Data 2 Index 8 Bits 6 7 and System Data 2 Index 9 Bits 0 3 can be assigned different meanings via the AAKP command STEP 2 ARTD Flag the type of route in CDN 6 TCL Trunk Class 0 Not used 1 DDD Line LDN 2 FX Line FX 3 WATS Line WATS 4 TIE Line TIE 5 CCSA Line CCSA 6 Toll Line 7 CAS Line 8 Paging 9 Not used 10 Not used 11 General page 12 Radio page STEP 3 AA...

Page 432: ...ricted through Alternative Route restriction assignments 5 AUTOMATIC RECALL A 8 is denied on Incoming Central Office Call To Tie line Connection 6 Since AUTOMATIC RECALL A 8 cannot be initiated by a trunk the ATTENDANT LOCKOUT A 5 feature is automatically disabled in order to allow the Attendant to reenter TRUNK TO TRUNK CONNECTION T 10 calls held on the ATTENDANT CONSOLE A 3 7 This feature is app...

Page 433: ...e LENs TIE Line Route Number Trunk Number and Tenant Number STEP 3 MBTK Assign the Make Idle status to the trunks For Tie Line STEP 4 ANPD Reserve a number level for trunk access Assign Connection Indexes CI for Normal N and Hooking H Number of Necessary Digits is usually 1 or 2 Busy Lamp Field is not activated STEP 5 ASPA Assign the access code as assigned in ANPD above Type of Service SRV OGC Ou...

Page 434: ...SG 5 STEP 2 ANPDL Reserve a number level for trunk access Assign Connection Indexes CI for Normal N and Hooking H Number of Necessary Digits is usually 1 or 2 Busy Lamp Field is not activated STEP 3 ASPAL Assign the access code as assigned in ANPD above Type of Service SRV OGC Outgoing Call Outgoing Trunk Assign the logical route number associated with this access code STEP 4 ARSCN For the incomin...

Page 435: ...e ATTENDANT OVERRIDE A 7 if it is included in system programming to gain entry into a particular trunk when it is in use 4 If the trunk is made busy either by hardware or software control the Attendant can still access that trunk using the above mentioned operating procedure 5 The Desk Console is not available for this feature 6 Central Office Code COC is not available to access an individual trun...

Page 436: ...rvice 0 1 No Yes Assign data 1 Optional STEP 2 ARTD If the Central Office Code option is exercised assign data 1 in CDN 25 STEP 3 ACOC If the Central Office Code option is exercised trunks in the system must be programmed to have an associated Central Office Code This code is dialed after pressing the Attendant Console s Trunk Select key Note Central Office codes do not apply to stations Stations ...

Page 437: ...ndant cannot transfer a conference connection to another Attendant 5 An Attendant can extend an inter position transferred call to any other destination 6 NIGHT CONNECTION FIXED FLEXIBLE N 1 2 When Night Service is active an Attendant position call to another Attendant cannot be answered by the night service arrangements The calling Attendant hears reorder tone 7 When the operator call code is dia...

Page 438: ...commands replace the non network commands for example AAED is replaced by AAEDN Note that the data setting for FCCS service varies depending on the node Note STEP 1 ASPAL This data must be set to the node calling attendant Assign SRV SSC SID 2 Operator Call and FPC of the node that operator calls are to be terminated to Note When using ASYDL or ASYDN to program an FCCS feature the basic programmin...

Page 439: ...hen this feature is activated via FCCS Programming STEP 1 ASAT Assign a station number to each Attendant Console The Attendant Console number is the trunk number assigned in the ATRK command Route 901 STEP 2 ATNR Allow tenant stations either access or denial to the tenant in which the Attendant Console is located FCCS Programming This data setting describes only the additional or replacement comma...

Page 440: ...n This feature provides the Dterm with a distinctive flash to differentiate between a call the user placed on hold from other calls Operating Procedure No manual operation is required Service Conditions Condition of the LED is as follows Programming This is a Dterm feature No programming is required Burst Wink LIT On Off 0 0 5 1 0 1 5 Seconds ...

Page 441: ...al Description This feature provides the Dterm with a unique LED indication to display the particular line the user is on Operating Procedure Manual operation is not required Service Conditions Condition of LED is as follows Programming This is a Dterm feature No programming is required Burst Wink On Off 0 5 1 0 1 5 Seconds Lit ...

Page 442: ... SPEAKER key 4 The conversation can then begin Service Conditions 1 An Intercom sub line appearance cannot be the Prime Line of a Dterm 2 An Intercom sub line appearance cannot call any station or trunk in a system other than another Intercom sub line appearance 3 An Intercom sub line appearance cannot activate any features 4 An Intercom sub line appearance must be assigned as a Software Line Appe...

Page 443: ... service feature assigned to this level Assign NND in accordance with a predetermined numbering plan STEP 2 ASPA Two access codes must be assigned for this feature Assign the Tenant and the Access Code ACC For Individual Speed Calling Assign assign a Connection Index of Normal N For SRV SSC Service Code assign SID 14 Speed Calling Station Entry For Individual Speed Calling Access assign the Tenant...

Page 444: ...Y Line station of each GROUP CALLING group is assigned as the Primary The Primary then assigns all the stations MY Line numbers which will have abbreviated codes TN Tenant Number STN Station Number MST SLV Primary Secondary M Primary Station S Secondary Station BLOCK Number of Blocks STN When assigning Secondary Station assign the Primary Station number STEP 6 AKYD Assign the virtual circuit to Dt...

Page 445: ...of the features being used TRANSFER Call Transfer C 11 PICKUP Call Pickup C 7 CALL FORWARDING ALL Call Forwarding All Calls C 5 CALL FORWARDING BUSY Call Forwarding Busy Line C 2 CALL FORWARDING NANS Call Forwarding Don t Answer C 3 HUNTING Station Hunting S 7 8 9 3 The INTERMEDIATE STATION NUMBER DISPLAY will not be displayed if a call is announced in CALL TRANSFER ALL CALLS C 11 4 For the FCCS n...

Page 446: ...E TRUNK T 1 releases while in queue the assigned hold on queue slot is cleared Service Conditions 1 This feature is usually used in conjunction with LEAST COST ROUTING 3 6 DIGIT L 5 2 The maximum queuing slots per system are 64 calls for 1 IMG system 256 for 4 IMG IPX U system The queue slots are commonly used by OFF HOOK QUEUING O 7 INTER OFFICE OFF HOOK QUEUING I 11 and OUTGOING TRUNK QUEUING O ...

Page 447: ...ueue 3 This feature is used with LEAST COST ROUTING 3 6 DIGIT L 5 It is not used with ALTERNATE ROUTING A 16 or MISCELLANEOUS TRUNK ACCESS M 2 Programming STEP 1 ASYD System Data 1 Index 42 bit 7 This bit must be assigned as data 0 continuous service set tone STEP 2 ARTD Assign the incoming TIE Line route as follows 2 4 WIRE E M RT 2 1 OSGS 2 2 ONSG 3 3 ISGS 2 4 INSG 3 5 TF 3 6 TCL 4 7 L T 1 8 RLP...

Page 448: ...gned to the NCN TN Tenant Number ACC Access number CI B Busy for Entry N Normal for Cancel SRV SSC SID 19 OG Queuing Entry CI N Normal SID 20 OG Queuing Cancel Note 1 When using ASYDL or ASYDN to program an FCCS feature the basic programming of ASYD is required in addition to ASYDL or ASYDN Note 2 The current data should also be set in addition the above mentioned command The command to be set to ...

Page 449: ... hears dial tone and dials the desired station or Attendant 2 IMMEDIATE RINGBACK TONE is returned When an Attendant calls another station or Attendant 1 The Attendant presses an idle loop key and dials the desired station or Attendant 2 IMMEDIATE RINGBACK TONE is returned When a trunk is connected to a station or Attendant 1 The calling party will hear IMMEDIATE RINGBACK TONE when the source of th...

Page 450: ... Note 2 Note 1 The number of the chime can be set by ASYD SYS1 Index 321 b7 0 1 4 1 time s Note 2 Using Prime Line or Off Hook to answer is selected by the ASYD SYS1 Index 388 bit 4 0 1 Press Prime Line key after Off Hook Press Off Hook Note 3 The number of digit of IZP group number is determined by SYS1 Index 804 bit 3 bit 0 0 2 digit group 01 99 Ex When IZPG 1 dial 01 bit 0 1 3 digit group 001 2...

Page 451: ...up number is determined by SYS1 Index 804 bit 3 bit 0 0 2 digit group 01 99 Ex When IZPG 1 dial 01 bit 0 1 3 digit group 001 255 Ex When IZPG 1 dial 001 OPERATION TONE CONTROL DTERM DISPLAY CALLING PARTY CALLED PARTY CALLING PARTY CALLED PARTY CALLING PARTY CALLED PARTY 1 Lift the Handset Speaker key 1 Dial Tone can be heard 2 Dial the access code for IZP I 21 IZP key 2 2nd Dial Tone can be heard ...

Page 452: ...1 OPERATION TONE CONTROL DTERM DISPLAY CALLING PARTY CALLED PARTY CALLING PARTY CALLED PARTY CALLING PARTY CALLED PARTY 1 Lift the Handset Speaker key 1 Dial Tone can be heard 2 Dial the access code for IZP I 21 IZP key 2 2nd Dial Tone can be heard 3 Dial the IZP group number Note 2 1 Chime s can be heard Note 1 P Prime Line 1 Lift the Handset 2 Dial the access code for Call Pickup Direct C 30 3 D...

Page 453: ...oup 001 255 Ex When IZPG 1 dial 001 OPERATION TONE CONTROL DTERM DISPLAY CALLING PARTY CALLED PARTY CALLING PARTY CALLED PARTY CALLING PARTY CALLED PARTY 1 Lift the Handset Speaker key 1 Dial Tone can be heard 2 Dial the access code for IZP I 21 IZP key 2 2nd Dial Tone can be heard 3 Dial the IZP group number Note 2 1 Chime s can be heard Note 1 P Prime Line 1 Lift the Handset 2 Dial the access co...

Page 454: ...roup 001 255 Ex When IZPG 1 dial 001 OPERATION TONE CONTROL DTERM DISPLAY OPERATING PARTY CALLED PARTY OPERATING PARTY CALLED PARTY CALLING PARTY OPERATING PARTY CALLED PARTY CALLING PARTY 1 Receive a call 2 Perform the SHF 1 Special Dial Tone can be heard 1 MSC can be heard 3 Dial the access code for IZP I 21 IZP key 2 2nd Dial Tone can be heard 4 Dial the IZP group number Note 3 1 Chime s canbeh...

Page 455: ...git group 001 255 Ex When IZPG 1 dial 001 OPERATION TONE CONTROL DTERM DISPLAY OPERATING PARTY CALLED PARTY OPERATING PARTY CALLED PARTY CALLING PARTY OPERATING PARTY CALLED PARTY CALLING PARTY 1 Receive a call 2 Perform the SHF 1 Special Dial Tone can be heard 1 MSC can be heard 3 Dial the access code for IZP I 21 IZP key 2 2nd Dial Tone can be heard 4 Dial the IZP group number Note 2 1 Chime s c...

Page 456: ... PARTY CALLED PARTY CALLING PARTY 1 Receive a call 2 Perform the SHF 1 Special Dial Tone can be heard 1 MSC can be heard 3 Dial the access code for IZP number I 21 IZP key 2 2nd Dial Tone can be heard 4 Dial the IZP group number Note 2 1 Chime s canbeheard Note 1 P Prime Line 1 Lift the Handset Speaker key 2 Dial the access code for Call Pickup Direct C 30 3 Dial the desired station number in the ...

Page 457: ... CALLED PARTY CALLING PARTY OPERATING PARTY CALLED PARTY CALLING PARTY 1 Receive a call 2 Perform the SHF 1 Special Dial Tone can be heard 1 MSC can be heard 3 Dial the access code for IZP number I 21 IZP key 2 2nd Dial Tone can be heard 4 Dial the IZP group number Note 2 1 Chime s canbeheard Note 1 P Prime Line 1 Lift the Handset 2 Dial the access code for Call Pickup Group C 7 Call Pickup Group ...

Page 458: ...t 0 1 3 digit group 001 255 Ex When IZPG 1 dial 001 OPERATION TONE CONTROL DTERM DISPLAY OPERATING PARTY CALLED PARTY OPERATING PARTY CALLED PARTY CALLING PARTY OPERATING PARTY CALLED PARTY CALLING PARTY 1 Receive a call 2 Perform the SHF 1 Special Dial Tone can be heard 1 MSC can be heard 3 Dial the access code for IZP I 21 IZP key 2 2nd Dial Tone can be heard 4 Dial the IZP group number Note 3 1...

Page 459: ...it 0 1 3 digit group 001 255 Ex When IZPG 1 dial 001 OPERATION TONE CONTROL DTERM DISPLAY OPERATING PARTY CALLED PARTY OPERATING PARTY CALLED PARTY CALLING PARTY OPERATING PARTY CALLED PARTY CALLING PARTY 1 Receive a call 2 Perform the SHF 1 Special Dial Tone can be heard 1 MSC can be heard 3 Dial the access code for IZP I 21 IZP key 2 2nd Dial Tone can be heard 4 Dial the IZP group number Note 3 ...

Page 460: ...ial Tone can be heard 1 MSC can be heard 3 Dial the access code for IZP I 21 IZP key 2 2nd Dial Tone can be heard 4 Dial the IZP group number Note 2 1 Chime s canbeheard Note 1 P Prime Line 1 Lift the Handset Speaker key 2 Dial the access code for Call Pickup Direct C 30 2 Dial Tonecan be heard 3 2nd Dial Tonecan be heard 3 Dial the desired station number in the IZP I 21 group 5 Replace the handse...

Page 461: ... 255 Ex When IZPG 1 dial 001 OPERATION TONE CONTROL DTERM DISPLAY OPERATING PARTY CALLED PARTY OPERATING PARTY CALLED PARTY CALLING PARTY OPERATING PARTY CALLED PARTY CALLING PARTY 1 Receive a call 2 Perform the SHF 1 Special Dial Tone can be heard 1 MSC can be heard 3 Dial the access code for IZP I 21 IZP key 2 2nd Dial Tone can be heard 4 Dial the IZP group number Note 2 1 Chime s canbeheard Not...

Page 462: ...on in the paged group is busy when the INTERNAL ZONE PAGING call is originated the station is not called recalled even if the station becomes idle later 13 After a station in the paged group answers the INTERNAL ZONE PAGING call ringing at the other member stations stop and two way conversation starts 14 While member stations are paged by INTERNAL ZONE PAGING call the prime lines of stations in th...

Page 463: ...s feature the call becomes station to station connection status Accordingly various hooking services are available Programming Refer to CALL PICKUP DIRECT C 30 and CALL PICKUP GROUP C 7 when using those features with INTERNAL ZONE PAGING STEP 1 ASYDL ASYDN System Data 1 Index 804 bit 3 Designation of the maximum digit number of INTERNAL ZONE PAGING group number 0 1 2 3 digits STEP 2 ASYD System Da...

Page 464: ...3 digits STEP 2 ASYD System Data 1 Index 31 Mounting capacity of Common Memory must be assigned as data 04 System Data 1 Index 380 bit 4 0 1 Answer the INTERNAL ZONE PAGING call by Prime Line Key after off hook by going off hook STEP 3 ANPD ANPDL ANPDN Reserve a number level for feature access Assign for Normal N and Hooking H services Assign NND according to the predetermined numbering plan STEP ...

Page 465: ...n Busy key the LED lights 2 Attendant simultaneously presses the HOLD SRC and L3 keys 3 All lamps will light Service Conditions 1 Every lamp field including the BUSY LAMP FIELD FLEXIBLE B 2 will be lit upon pressing of the three keys located on the ATTENDANT CONSOLE A 3 2 The console lamp test displays the digit 8 in each field of the digital display 3 When the keys are released all lamps and digi...

Page 466: ... from the Howler Tone state and operation returns to normal Service Conditions 1 A station in the LINE lock out state can neither receive nor originate calls 2 This feature is provided on a system wide basis 3 The Attendant cannot activate any feature to a station in the LINE lock out state 4 After 30 seconds of reorder tone the station is automatically placed into LINE lock out if the system is n...

Page 467: ... TO STATION call S 11 Trunk to Station call Attendant to Station call 10 CALL BACK C 1 To activate Call Back the user dials the appropriate access code after reaching a busy station If the user fails to go on hook within 30 seconds after receiving service set tone LINE lock out will occur The sequence prior to lock out is Service set tone for 30 seconds reorder tone for 30 seconds optional Howler ...

Page 468: ...rrier NXX Translation Table b FX XX is the FX NXX Translation Table 2 First choice route option in an NPA pattern will usually be a Specialized Common Carrier If a trunk is available in this group further digit translation will be required in order to determine whether the called number is served by the carrier NXX digit translation will also be required in instances where a call is routed over a ...

Page 469: ...ng 13 Pre translation function minimizes waiting time after dialing After enough digits are collected to determine a route the system starts outpulsing before the station completes dialing the entire number LCR SENDER 14 If OUTGOING TRUNK QUEUING O 2 is activated during LCR all routes listed in the Outgoing Routing Pattern will be available to the queue if one of these trunks becomes idle 15 When ...

Page 470: ...le using the OPR pattern 25 In case of LCRS feature the system starts connecting and communication between the calling party and the called party without completing the maximum digits MND of destination number which is set in the AMND command from the calling party 26 LCRS call without completing the MND of AMND command a ARTI Assign the parameter DCANS CDN 54 as 1 to the objected route b ARTD Ass...

Page 471: ...ST circuit card Senders must be assigned to the system in a quantity calculated from expected traffic Senders are located on levels 4 7 of any 8RST circuit card RT Route Number Trunk Route Number Intra office Route Number 901 931 901 ATT 913 TCFT for ATT 902 ORT 915 Night ATT 903 IRT 916 MFCR 905 Sender 917 MFCS 909 DCFT 919 to 926 Modem TK Trunk Number TN Tenant Number RSC Route Restriction Class...

Page 472: ...ed in the DC parameter Overseas or Operator assisted calls should be listed with an MND that equals the calculated number of necessary digits Special dialing sequences such as 411 with an MND 4 should also be listed STEP 10 AFRS List the dialing patterns in groups that will be served by a specific sequence of routes For example consider the following dialing patterns 9 1 617 9 1 413 9 1 207 9 1 20...

Page 473: ...sign PRSC as data 0 STEP 12 AADC If additional digits are required assign the digits of a Pattern Number Location PNL here For additional digits totaling 24 use PNL 1 255 For EPN programs PNL has been expanded to 1 999 STEP 13 ASDC If 6 digit translation is required whereby both Area and Office codes must be examined this command must be used If no assignment is made in this command all NXXs are a...

Page 474: ...es depending on the node Note Note When using ASYDL or ASYDN to program an FCCS feature the basic programming of ASYD is required in addition to ASYDL or ASYDN STEP 1 ARTDN Assign the route class data for all the logical routes and dummy routes for LCR LCRS 6 TCL 1 7 L T 1 8 RLP 2 9 TQ 1 13 AC 1 STEP 2 ANPDL N Assign the number of necessary digits for LCR LCRS access Usually assign DC 9 NND 1 STEP...

Page 475: ...iction class referred by the AEFR command is required assign PRSC using classes 1 15 If not required enter data 0 STEP 8 AADCL N If additional digits are required assign the digits of a Pattern Number Location PNL For additional digits totaling 24 use PNL 1 999 STEP 9 ASDCL N If 6 digit translation is required whereby both Area and office codes must be examined this command must be used If no assi...

Page 476: ...signing for SCC each NXX is assigned as the following EFFECT 0 Restricted EFFECT 1 Allowed EFFECT 2 Not used Note When PFX EFFECT 1 is assigned Add the required digit in the AADCL N command OFFICE is the next 3 digits after those assigned in AFRSL N Example AFRSL N RT31 91214 OPR1 ASDCL N checks next 3 digits 91214 XXX XXXX Office ...

Page 477: ...rammed into memory 3 In a STEP CALL the final combination of digits is stored in memory For example dial 201 201 is busy dial 2 station 202 rings station 202 is stored in the LAST NUMBER CALLED memory 4 In CALL FORWARDING C 2 3 5 CALL PICKUP GROUP C 7 and STATION HUNTING S 7 8 9 the number stored is the number dialed i e the number displayed in the INTERMEDIATE STATION NUMBER DISPLAY Dterm I 10D 5...

Page 478: ... services When used as an FCCS feature these commands replace the non network commands for example AAED is replaced by AAEDN Note that the data setting for FCCS service varies depending on the node STEP 1 ANPDL Reserve a number level for feature access and cancel Assign Connection Indexes CI N H B Normal N Hooking H and Busy B applicable to any feature assigned to this level Assign NND in accordan...

Page 479: ...e lights green b The Speaker Lamp lights green c Receive dial tone from the speaker with the following display on the Dterm Note The indication is changed in sequence by pressing the REDIAL key Once the stored telephone number display reaches LNR SPEED 5 LNR SPEED 1 appears again by pressing REDIAL How to originate a call 3 Press the REDIAL key on a Dterm a The Prime Line lights green b The Speake...

Page 480: ...than from a Dterm after pressing the REDIAL key is recognized as abbreviated code s 1 or 2 digits of SPEED CALLING STATION 8 A Dterm can display the upper 16 digits among the stored 32 digits 9 When any destination has not been stored in the system which occurs after initialization of the circuit card the Dterm displays no destination as shown below 10 When a Dterm user dials the same destination ...

Page 481: ...1 Stack 2 Stack 3 Stack 4 Stack 5 Yes No The dialed destination and the number stored in the Stack Memory 2 are the same The dialed destination and the number stored in the Stack Memory 1 are the same No Dialed No Stored Stack 1 Stack 2 Stack 3 Stack 4 Stack 5 Yes Stack 1 Stack 2 Stack 3 Stack 4 Stack 5 Dialed No X Abandoned Stack 1 Stack 2 Stack 3 Stack 4 Stack 5 The dialed destination and the nu...

Page 482: ...2 Stack 1 Stack 2 Stack 3 Stack 4 Stack 5 Yes No The dialed destination and the number stored in the Stack Memory 5 are the same The dialed destination and the number stored in the Stack Memory 4 are the same No Dialed No Stored Stack 1 Stack 2 Stack 3 Stack 4 Stack 5 Yes The system stores the newly dialed destination removing the oldest number X Removed Stack 1 Stack 2 Stack 3 Stack 4 Stack 5 Dia...

Page 483: ... C 17 and CALL HOLD C 6 Pressing RECALL key will result in reconnection of the held line 2 System should be programmed to provide for First Party Release 3 If the system is not programmed for First Party Release and programmed as Calling Called or Both Party Release a release guard is activated If a party is not allowed to terminate a call and presses RECALL key that station remains connected to t...

Page 484: ...ne Service Conditions 1 LINE RECONNECT OTHER LINE Dterm cannot be used with a line currently in use unless Privacy Release is in service LED lit steady LINE RECONNECT OTHER LINE Dterm can be used when the other line is on NON EXCLUSIVE HOLD Dterm N 7D 2 System data programming should provide for First Party Release Programming ASYD System Data 1 Index 4 Bits 2 and 3 Releasing Method for Station to...

Page 485: ...on To answer 1 Press the line key ringing and flashing LED alerts incoming call 2 Lift the handset or press SPEAKER key answer the incoming call Service Conditions 1 A line key whose associate LED is lit steady cannot be interrupted by pressing its key unless PRIVACY RELEASE is in service 2 After the desired line key is pressed LINE PRESELECTION Dterm will remain in effect for 10 seconds After 10 ...

Page 486: ...ust first be provided Programming STEP 1 AOPR The AFRS command designates the dialing sequence and the OPR to be selected The AOPR defines the routes and in what order these routes will be selected Assign the following TDPTN Time of Day Pattern Change If for an AFRS assignment different OPRs will be required as a function of time designate 1 7 to which Time of Day Pattern Change Number TDC NO this...

Page 487: ...ll refer to different OPR assignments as a function of time As a result different routes will be listed per OPR and will require different assignments in ASDC Assign the following Time Setting TO FROM In military time and only on the half hour and hour PATTERN NUMBER 0 7 FCCS Programming This data setting describes only the additional or replacement commands used to activate FCCS services When use...

Page 488: ...igits in AFRS go to the AADC command Overflow Tone OVFT Assign if a tone is wanted for the Last Choice Route Priority Restriction Class PRSC Refer to PRIORITY RESTRICTION CLASS in the EPN Features and Specifications If this is required assign PRSC here classes 1 15 STEP 2 ATCPL A maximum of eight Time of Day Pattern changes 0 7 are available whereby the system will refer to different OPR assignmen...

Page 489: ...SOLE A 3 will illuminate when LINE LOAD CONTROL is set in the system 4 Incoming call from a trunk can be restricted in system data 5 When LINE LOAD CONTROL is activated or cancelled a system message will be output via the MAINTENANCE ADMINISTRATION TERMINAL M 18 6 While LINE LOAD CONTROL is activated a single line station will receive busy tone or the display for the Dterm is blank when going off ...

Page 490: ...cancel Assign Connection Indexes CI N H B Normal N Hooking H and Busy B applicable to any feature assigned to this level Assign NND in accordance with a predetermined numbering plan STEP 3 ASPA Assign an access code to LINE LOAD CONTROL Assign SRV SSCA Service Code Appendix SIDA 46 for Line Load Control Start Assign SRV SSCA Service Code Appendix SIDA 47 for Line Load Control Cancel Assign a Conne...

Page 491: ...4 When LINE LOAD CONTROL AUTOMATIC L 20 is activated or cancelled a system message will be output via the MAINTENANCE ADMINISTRATION TERMINAL MAT M 18 5 While LINE LOAD CONTROL AUTOMATIC L 20 is activated a single line station will receive busy tone or the display of the Dterm is blank when going off hook 6 A station in LINE LOAD CONTROL L 11 20 21 can receive incoming calls 7 Incoming calls termi...

Page 492: ...NDIVIDUAL C 15 2 The lamp on the ATTENDANT CONSOLE A 3 will illuminate when LINE LOAD CONTROL MAT is set in the system 3 Incoming calls from a trunk can be restricted in system data 4 When LINE LOAD CONTROL MAT is activated a station will receive busy tone or BT is displayed on the LCD for Dterm no tone is given when going off hook 5 A station in LINE LOAD CONTROL L 11 20 21 can receive incoming c...

Page 493: ...rectory Number call 2 If the Attendant presses the SRC key while the Listed Directory Number is displayed the display changes to the calling party s route trunk number In this case the Listed Directory Number of the call being handled at present cannot be displayed again 3 While the Listed Directory Number is displayed the Attendant can transfer the call to a desired station by entering the destin...

Page 494: ...ogramming The following command assignments are required to use this feature via FCCS link STEP 1 ASYDL System Data 1 Index 640 Bit 0 7 Assign FPC of a node which transmits Day Night changeover information System Data 1 Index 704 735 Assign FPC of a node which receives the Day Night changeover information transmitted from the node assigned by System Data 1 Index 640 Bit 0 7 above STEP 2 ANPDN Assi...

Page 495: ...per tenant 4 A data terminal cannot be used as a destination station for this feature 5 The following service features are not available for the destination station CALL FORWARDING ALL CALLS OUTSIDE C 28 CALL FORWARDING BUSY LINE OUTSIDE C 60 CALL FORWARDING DON T ANSWER OUTSIDE C 74 6 A UCD station can be assigned as the destination of LDN Night Connection but queuing functions of UCD such as DEL...

Page 496: ...ach LDN Note 4 The maximum number of telephone numbers that can be programmed in the system is 65 535 16 Whether special transmission tone is sent or not while number data is transmitted depends on System Data 1 Index 6 Bit 0 17 Forwarding destination terminal available for this feature is station or Voice Prompt System VPS 18 When using VPS as forwarding destination of this feature the user progr...

Page 497: ...Night Mode while a LDN call is terminating to ATTCON the LDN call is transferred to preprogrammed forwarding destination If the LDN call cannot be transferred according to normal priority by restriction for the forwarding destination the LDN call is processed in order of following precedence 1 TRUNK ANSWER FROM ANY STATION T 8 is provided 2 DELAY ANNOUNCEMENT ATTENDANT D 144 is provided 3 NIGHT CO...

Page 498: ... and will ring the first idle station 11 If the Night transfer destination station A is in CALL FORWARDING BUSY LINE C 2 over CCIS to station C in the remote office and both station A and station C are busy busy tone is returned to the incoming LDN calling party 12 Incoming LDN calls to a Night transfer destination station that has set CALL FORWARDING ALL CALLS BUSY LINE DON T ANSWER CCIS C 45 C 4...

Page 499: ...y SRV Kind of Service Designate TELN Telephone Number NND Necessary Digits 1 16 STEP 4 ALGSN Assign Telephone Number to Night Mode destination number Station Number TYPE 1 When LENS is used to specify the Telephone Number UGN User Group Number Fixed to 1 TELN Telephone Number max 16 digits FPC Fusion Point Code of the designated LENS LENS Line Equipment Numbers of physical station TYPE 2 When STN ...

Page 500: ... Assign Telephone Number to Night Mode destination number Station Number TYPE 1 When LENS is used to specify the Telephone Number UGN User Group Number Fixed to 1 TELN Telephone Number max 16 digits FPC Fusion Point Code of the designated LENS LENS Line Equipment Numbers of physical station TYPE 2 When STN is used to specify the Telephone Number UGN User Group Number Fixed to 1 LDN Listed Director...

Page 501: ...NEAX2400 IPX Feature Programming Manual Page 458 NDA 24297 Issue 1 L 28 LDN Night Connection FCCS Programming cont d CCI Call Category Index Assign 1 LDN C O Line RES Restriction Data Assign 1 Allowed ...

Page 502: ...3 can be used when more than 8 digits are needed 3 The destination station outside the system can be assigned on a per LDN basis 4 This feature is available for a maximum of 16 LDNs per tenant 5 LDN NIGHT CONNECTION OUTSIDE L 30 will not route an incoming call on an MFC signaling trunk through another MFC signaling trunk 6 NIGHT CONNECTION OUTSIDE SYSTEM N 17 or TRUNK ANSWER FROM ANY STATION T 8 i...

Page 503: ...rwarding destination CALL FORWARDING ALL CALLS C 28 to ATTCON CALL FORWARDING BUSY LINE C 2 to ATTCON CALL FORWARDING DON T ANSWER C 3 to ATTCON CALL FORWARDING ALL CALLS OUTSIDE C 28 CALL FORWARDING BUSY LINE OUTSIDE C 60 CALL FORWARDING DON T ANSWER OUTSIDE C 74 CALL TRANSFER ATTENDANT C 10 16 NIGHT CONNECTION FIXED N 1 or TRUNK ANSWER FROM ANY STATION T 8 is available while the destination is i...

Page 504: ... ADC must first be assigned in the ASPD command TYPE 3 must be used for outside numbers greater than eight digits Programming STEP 1 ALDN Assign LDN number and its transfer destination TN Tenant Number LDN Listed Directory Number must match station numbering plan Night Transfer Y N If no then LDN will only go to Attendant If yes then the following parameters will be enabled TYPE Night Transfer Typ...

Page 505: ...esignate TELN for LDN OGC OGCA LCRS for forwarding destination NND Necessary Digits 1 16 STEP 4 ALRTN Assign Logical Route Number to Physical Route Number LGRT Logical Route Number 1 89 FPC Fusion Point Code 1 253 RT External Route Number 1 255 STEP 5 ALDNN Assign FPC of a node with attendant console which receives the LDN call by dialing the LDN TN Tenant Number 1 255 LDN Listed Directory Number ...

Page 506: ...Route Number LGRT Logical Route Number 1 89 FPC Fusion Point Code 1 253 RT External Route Number 1 255 STEP 5 ASPD Assign speed calling number to Abbreviated Digit Code ADC TN Tenant Number 1 255 ADC Abbreviated Digit Code max 4 digits CD Desired Speed Calling Number max 24 digits Note The user must be assigned this command at node which receives the LDN call STEP 6 ALDNN Assign FPC of a node with...

Page 507: ...pond with each route 5 The maximum number of digits that can be used as a paging access and or answer code is 3 6 The type of paging service provided on a system basis is programmed via the MAINTENANCE ADMINISTRATION TERMINAL M 18 into the system database 7 A page waiting to be answered is automatically cancelled after a predetermined program duration See VARIABLE TIMING PARAMETER V 1 for other se...

Page 508: ...cted to Station C If Station A momentarily presses the switch hook all three parties are connected together in a THREE WAY CALLING T 2 connection There is no time out period if Station C does not dial the MEET ME PAGE answer code Station A may press the switch hook to disconnect the page trunk and reconnect to Party B If desired Station A may hang up and Station A will be recalled by Party B 7 Sta...

Page 509: ...gned in ANPD Type of Service SRV OGC Outgoing Call for Outgoing trunks Assign CIs of Normal N and Hooking H For the MEET ME PAGE route answer and cancel codes assign the access code in the level assigned in ANPD Type of Service SRV PAGA Paging Answer and SRV PAGC Multiple Announcement Service Assign the proper route number associated with this code Assign for a CI of Normal N STEP 7 ARSC For stati...

Page 510: ...ll restriction and or LCR S refer to those feature descriptions as other commands may be required that are not listed below Programming STEP 1 ARTD Refer to the Feature listing for the type of trunk route to be accessed STEP 2 ATRK Assign the LENs Route Number Trunk Number and Tenant Number STEP 3 MBTK Assign the Make Idle status to the trunks STEP 4 ANPD Assign a level for trunk access Assign Con...

Page 511: ... miscellaneous trunk calls 4 The CALL TRANSFER ALL CALLS C 11 feature will operate as follows a if the restricted station is the controller this station cannot add a trunk from which this station is restricted b if the restricted station line is not the controller the controller cannot connect the restricted station line to a trunk from which the station is normally restricted 5 Two outgoing trunk...

Page 512: ...es from accessing certain routes FCCS Programming This data setting describes only the additional or replacement commands used to activate FCCS services When used as an FCCS feature these commands replace the non network commands for example AAED is replaced by AAEDN Note that the data setting for FCCS service varies depending on the node Note STEP 1 ARSCN Follow the procedure for M 2 MISCELLANEOU...

Page 513: ...etween ATTENDANT CONSOLE A 3 7 Two methods of operation are available for placing the system or tenant group into the night mode a All ATTCON Change System Day to Night When all ATTENDANT CONSOLE A 3 press the NITE key the system or associated TENANT T 12 enters the night mode Night to Day When one ATTENDANT CONSOLE A 3 releases the NITE key the system or associated TENANT T 12 enters the day mode...

Page 514: ...s into Night STEP 2 ATRK To assign the Attendant Console LEN MG and UNIT The Line Group is always 20 and the Level is either 0 or 1 Assign as Route 901 Also assign a Service Feature Class SFC 0 and a Route Restriction Class RSC 0 to the Attendant Console STEP 3 ASAT Assign a specific Attendant Number to the Attendant Console See INDIVIDUAL ATTENDANT ACCESS I 6 STEP 4 AMAT Assign one of the Attenda...

Page 515: ...y or the remaining party not talking with the Attendant hears music if the Attendant splits a call prior to completion or after answering an Attendant recall b When incoming calls to the Attendant are answered and the Attendant presses the HOLD key the held party hears music c When the Attendant camps on a call to a busy station the calling party is connected to music until the called party answer...

Page 516: ... receives 1 second of ringback tone 3 The Attendant pages the desired party 4 The Attendant presses the RELEASE key To answer 1 Paged party dials the PAGE answer code and is directly connected to the holding party OR 2 Paged party dials the PAGE answer code and the individual Attendant number and receives ringback tone The Attendant and the paged party converse The Attendant presses the loop key o...

Page 517: ...the Class of Service of the user s line 12 Central Office trunks are used as interface circuits to the Paging equipment 13 BUSY VERIFICATION B 3 Busy Verification is denied on a station line that is connected to paging equipment Attempts to busy verify a station line will result in the Attendant hearing reorder tone 14 ATTENDANT CONTROLLED CONFERENCE A 2 When a conference call is established an At...

Page 518: ...e The Attendant answers and places this call on hold then sequentially presses the two held loop keys This connects the Attendant to the party connected to the first pressed loop key The Attendant can either press the TALK key creating a THREE WAY CALLING T 2 connection or press the RELEASE key allowing Party B and Station C to be connected If Station C does not call the MEET ME PAGE answer code w...

Page 519: ... STEP 6 ASPA For the Page trunk access code assign the access code in the level as assigned in ANPD above Type of Service SRV OGC Outgoing Call for Outgoing trunks Assign for Connection Indexes CI of Normal N and Hooking H For the Page Route answer and cancel codes assign the access code in the level assigned in ANPD Type of Service SRV PAGA Paging Answer and SRV PAGC Multiple Announcement Service...

Page 520: ...ice data lists can be printed to include telephone number list trunk data list and access code data list Interactions 1 All other printouts are automatically printed in conjunction with the operation of the MAT or in requesting Traffic Data See MAINTENANCE ADMINISTRATION TERMINAL M 18 2 The MAINTENANCE PRINTOUT as described will be assigned to Port 1 3 If Port 1 is used for MAINTENANCE PRINTOUT an...

Page 521: ...m Data 1 Index 86 Bit 7 Are simplified or detailed System Messages required 0 1 Simplified Detailed System Data 1 Index 117 123 Each index represents an I O port Program the following Bits 0 1 2 001 Printer 010 MAT Bit 7 Password Function 0 1 In Service STEP 2 AIOC Assign System Message Output as IN for all ports requiring Automatic System Message Printout Note For a System Message Printer assign ...

Page 522: ...ment is 50 feet 15m without a modem 6 The following traffic data can be either printed out on the printer or output to the MAT hard disk The traffic data field in the hard disk will be copied to the floppy disk a calls per station b calls per route c station peg count d Attendant Console peg count e route peg count 7 The history of MAT usage can be output to the printer or MAT printer by entering ...

Page 523: ...shown below 12 The number of ports for TCP IP is 21 Therefore restrictions are lifted to use multiple MATs regardless of the number of other applications used A maximum of 4 MATs may be connected per system Interactions 1 AUIDN must be assigned before allowing the password function in the ASYD command If password is allowed in ASYD before AUIDN is assigned error message 0550 the PASSWORD NOT YET A...

Page 524: ...A message can only be sent if the called station is in the idle or busy condition 3 A message cannot be sent to a Dterm engaged in calling or recalling from CALL TRANSFER ALL CALLS C 11 or from CONSULTATION HOLD ALL CALLS C 17 4 A maximum of four messages may be received at any one Dterm If a fifth message is attempted the reorder tone will be transmitted to the calling party 5 A message can be di...

Page 525: ...e access Assign for Normal N Hooking H and Busy B Assign NND in accordance with predetermined Numbering Plan STEP 4 ASPA Assign an access code to Message Reminder assign SRV SSCA Service Code Appendix SIDA 42 assign Hooking H and Busy B FCCS Programming This data setting describes only the additional or replacement commands used to activate FCCS services When used as an FCCS feature these commands...

Page 526: ...t or press the SPEAKER key while message is displayed 2 Press the MSG key the calling station is automatically redialed Service Conditions 1 This feature is only available between two Dterm sets both of which have the MSG key If a message is directed to a Dterm that does not have the MESSAGE REMINDER feature the calling station s LCD displays 2 Messages can only be sent if the called station is in...

Page 527: ...nd receives busy tone MESSAGE REMINDER Dterm cannot be set 14 A maximum of 32 digits can be saved at the called party 15 To utilize the telephone number of the calling station assign SYS1 Index 641 b0 1 by the ASYDN command 16 For the FCCS network when using this feature with a Dterm Series E the following circuit cards are recommended Note If the Dterm Series III is accommodated on one of these c...

Page 528: ...for Feature Key FKY Feature Key Number FKY 6 MESSAGE REMINDER Dterm STEP 7 ASYD System Data 1 Index 80 Bit 1 Assign a cancel key for MESSAGE REMINDER 0 1 Note Note Dterm s with a MESSAGE REMINDER key do not require the Service Feature Class assignment Only single line sets require the ASFC assignment FCCS Programming This data setting describes only the additional or replacement commands used to a...

Page 529: ... as busy 3 All sublines of a Dterm must be located in the same Module Group as the Dterm MY Line 4 A virtual line Software Line Appearance S 33 single line telephone or Dterm can be assigned to the subline 5 CALL BACK Dterm C 1D and OUTGOING TRUNK QUEUING Dterm O 2D are available from the My Line of a Dterm Interactions 1 Sublines can belong to another station or be a virtual software line appeara...

Page 530: ... d KYN Key Number 1 40 KYI Service Index 0 Key Not Used 1 Feature Key 2 Multi line Key KD Not assigned for Feature Key TN STN Tenant Number and Station Number of Multi line RG Ringing Assignment per Multi line Appearance 0 No Ringing 1 Ringing in Day Mode Only 2 Ringing in Night Mode Only 3 Ringing in Day and Night Mode ...

Page 531: ...e Message Waiting cancel code up to 3 digits receive special dial tone 3 Dial the telephone number receive service set tone 4 Message Waiting indication is cancelled 5 Press the RELEASE key to return to an idle condition Service Conditions 1 The Message Waiting lamp on a single line telephone or a Dterm will be lit when this feature is activated 2 When Message Waiting is set to a Dterm station the...

Page 532: ...umbering plan STEP 2 ASPA Assign an access code to activate MESSAGE WAITING LAMP SETTING ATTENDANT SRV SSCA Service Code Appendix SIDA 54 and to extinguish the MESSAGE WAITING LAMP SETTING ATTENDANT SRV SSCA Service Code Appendix SIDA 55 Assign the Connection Status Index CI for Normal N service STEP 3 ASFC Assign a Service Feature Class that allows SFI 74 to the stations that will receive MESSAGE...

Page 533: ...g for FCCS service varies depending on the node STEP 1 ANPDL Reserve a number level for feature access and cancel Assign Connection Indexes CI N H B Normal N Hooking H and Busy B applicable to any feature assigned to this level Assign NND in accordance with a predetermined numbering plan STEP 2 ASPAL Assign an access code to activate MESSAGE WAITING LAMP SETTING ATTENDANT SRV SSCA Service Code App...

Page 534: ...ceive dial tone 2 Dial the specific CALL FORWARDING BUSY LINE access code receive special dial tone 3 Dial the desired target telephone number receive service set tone To cancel from an individual station 1 Lift the handset receive dial tone 2 Dial the specific CALL FORWARDING BUSY LINE C 2 cancel code receive service set tone To set from the ATTENDANT CONSOLE A 3 1 Press an idle loop key 2 Dial t...

Page 535: ...ORWARDING BUSY LINE set 3 A call cannot be forwarded to the originating station 4 If the call is forwarded back to the originally called station or a station that has already been forwarded to call forwarding will end at that station 5 CALL FORWARDING BUSY LINE C 2 and CALL FORWARDING ALL CALLS C 5 combined a Any combination of CALL FORWARDING BUSY LINE C 2 and CALL FORWARDING ALL CALLS C 5 may be...

Page 536: ...o the call will end at that station 6 CALL FORWARDING ALL CALLS C 5 CALL FORWARDING BUSY LINE C 2 and CALL FORWARDING DON T ANSWER C 3 combined a Although CALL FORWARDING ALL CALLS C 5 and CALL FORWARDING BUSY LINE C 2 and combinations of the two are limited to five forwards when a forwarding sequence is divided by CALL FORWARDING DON T ANSWER C 3 CALL FORWARDING ALL CALLS C 5 and CALL FORWARDING ...

Page 537: ... being rung on the right The display on the ringing Dterm will show the number of the originally called station on the left and the number of the calling station on the right b The forwarding status of the originally called station is shown on the far left of each Dterm s display FDB for CALL FORWARDING BUSY C 2 or FDA for CALL FORWARDING ALL CALLS C 5 9 UCD Groups a If the destination of CALL FOR...

Page 538: ...e than five times 15 The number of times is assigned by system data 16 The OAI monitor number and the ACD pilot number cannot be assigned as the Call Forwarding target telephone number Interactions 1 If access codes for CALL FORWARDING BUSY LINE C 2 and CALL FORWARDING DON T ANSWER C 3 are the same only one key needs to be assigned in AKYD or ADSL and only one access code needs to be assigned in A...

Page 539: ...g after CALL FORWARDING BUSY LINE C 2 Data 0 Hunting takes place in forwarding station s group Data 1 Hunting takes place in destination station s group System Data 1 Index 69 Bit 7 MULTIPLE CALL FORWARDING BUSY LINE ALL CALLS M 44 in service 0 1 No Yes System Data 2 Index 6 Bit 1 Enable CALL FORWARDING BUSY LINE C 2 on a per tenant basis STEP 2 ANPD Reserve a number level for feature access and c...

Page 540: ...n network commands for example AAED is replaced by AAEDN Note that the data setting for FCCS service varies depending on the node Note STEP 1 ASYDN These data must be set to the NCN System Data 1 Index 69 b7 Enable Multiple Call Forwarding Busy Line Don t Answer All Calls 0 1 Out of Service In Service Index 5 b1 b3 Assign the number of time for forwarding Note When using ASYDL or ASYDN to program ...

Page 541: ...NDANT CONSOLE A 3 1 Press an idle loop key 2 Dial the specific CALL FORWARDING DON T ANSWER C 3 cancel code receive special dial tone 3 Dial the TENANT T 12 number 2 or 3 digits 4 Dial the originating telephone number receive service set tone Service Conditions 1 If the called station does not answer and MULTIPLE CALL FORWARDING DON T ANSWER M 25 is set at the called station the call is forwarded ...

Page 542: ... a call is transferred blind to a station that is CALL FORWARDED DON T ANSWER C 3 to another destination internal or external the call will not forward but will recall back to the transferee station This recall parameter is controlled by system data 6 Forwarding to an Attendant Console a If an Attendant Console is the destination of MULTIPLE CALL FORWARDING DON T ANSWER M 25 the call is forwarded ...

Page 543: ...ation is shown on the far left of each Dterm s display FDB for CALL FORWARDING BUSY LINE or FDA for CALL FORWARDING ALL CALLS 8 UCD Groups a If the destination of a CALL FORWARDING DON T ANSWER C 3 is a UCD group control station the call will be forwarded into the UCD group b If the destination of a CALL FORWARDING BUSY LINE C 2 or a CALL FORWARDING ALL CALLS C 5 forward is a UCD group control sta...

Page 544: ...tem Data 1 Index 5 Bit 0 Access codes for CALL FORWARDING BUSY LINE C 2 and CALL FORWARDING DON T ANSWER C 3 are same or separate 0 1 Same Separate System Data 1 Index 69 Bit 2 Is a short tone set to alert person receiving the call that this is a CALL FORWARDING DON T ANSWER C 3 call 0 1 No Yes System Data 1 Index 69 Bit 7 MULTIPLE CALL FORWARDING BUSY M 24 ALL CALLS M 44 in service 0 1 No Yes Sys...

Page 545: ...al or replacement commands used to activate FCCS services When used as an FCCS feature these commands replace the non network commands for example AAED is replaced by AAEDN Note that the data setting for FCCS service varies depending on the node Note STEP 1 ASYDN These data must be set to the NCN System Data 1 Index 69 b7 Enable Multiple Call Forwarding Busy Line Don t Answer All Calls 0 1 Out of ...

Page 546: ...U based on the received data will display a profile of the station trunk being handled by the Attendant on the CRT 2 Call Indicator Lamp control is based on data from the external CPU Through the external CPU terminal when information is registered the Host CPU system forwards Call Indicator Lamp control data according to the Call Indicator Lamp On Off control information sent 3 The NEAX2400 IPX u...

Page 547: ... C 2 CALL FORWARDING ALL CALLS C 5 Call returned from Hold CALL TRANSFER ALL CALLS Note C 11 CENTRALIZED ATTENDANT SERVICE CAS C 20 DIAL ACCESS TO ATTENDANT D 2 DID to the Specific UCD Group DIT to the Specific UCD Group Intercept Call to the Attendant INTER POSITION TRANSFER I 5 LDN call OFF HOOK ALARM O 6 Recall Recall from a Series Call Series Call Re Entry Tandem Transferring Hold Entry Note A...

Page 548: ...ected to IOC a MC information is transmitted to both of them On condition that one of them is in the event of failure another can transmit receive the MC information 9 Station number type physical station number or telephone number to be output for MCI ICS format may be designated by the system data 10 Multiple nodes within the FCCS network can accommodate the MC 11 A maximum of two MCs per node a...

Page 549: ...nsmitted to the MC on the side of the CCIS network in the figure below MC 1 provided that a call from any of the FCCS network nodes in the figure node A B C terminates to an ATTCON UCD station of the non FCCS node in the figure node D b Message data will be transmitted to the MC on the side of the FCCS network in the figure below MC 2 provided that a call from the non FCCS node in the figure node ...

Page 550: ...etwork nodes in the figure node A B C b The shared Message Center also can let the Message Waiting Lamps for both FCCS and non FCCS CCIS network stations go ON and OFF to inform the telephone user of the message arrival 3 In case the Message Center exists only on the side of CCIS network a Message data will be transmitted to the offered MC in the figure below assumed to be connected to node D give...

Page 551: ...sage data will be transmitted to the offered MC in the figure below assumed to be connected to node A given that a call from the CCIS node in the figure node D terminates to the ATTCON UCD station of any of the FCCS network nodes in the figure node A B C b The MC though provided only inside the FCCS network can also control the Message Waiting Lamp for each station on the CCIS link as well as ON O...

Page 552: ...ed as data 02H MAT System Data 2 Index 6 Bit 0 Is MCI service with UCD groups to be enabled 0 1 No Yes System Data 2 Index 7 Bit 1 Is MCI service for calls via the Attendant Console to be enabled 0 1 No Yes STEP 2 AIOC Assign the function and attribute data of the IOC ports FCCS Programming This data setting describes the additional FCCS service data after the non FCCS service data has been progra...

Page 553: ...e Center Interface FCCS Programming cont d STEP 2 AMWF Assign FPC Fusion Point Code of the node for being controlled the MWL on the Dterm by the MC Note 1 Note 1 Assign this data to the node accommodating the MC Note 2 Assign this data to all the nodes to be provided MCI service ...

Page 554: ...the Message Waiting indication 7 Station 200 calls Station 201 8 Station 200 receives the message from Station 201 9 The call is terminated 10 Station 201 cancels the Message Waiting indication for Station 200 Procedure 2 Procedure 1 To set a Message Waiting Indication from a single line telephone 1 Lift the handset receive dial tone 2 Dial the Message Waiting Set access code up to 3 digits receiv...

Page 555: ...ations within the system can be assigned to activate this feature 2 Any attempt to set Message Waiting to a station that already has a Message Waiting indication will receive busy tone 3 Each station can cancel the Message Waiting indication 4 This feature can be restricted by CLASS OF SERVICE INDIVIDUAL C 15 5 Message Waiting for one station of the network can be controlled from the ATTENDANT CON...

Page 556: ...an still be set to a station that has previously activated any of the following features DO NOT DISTURB Dterm D 21D CALL BACK Dterm C 1D set to called station CALL BACK Dterm C 1D set from called station CALL FORWARDING ALL CALLS Dterm C 5D will not follow forwarding data CALL FORWARDING DON T ANSWER Dterm C 3D will not follow forwarding data CALL FORWARDING BUSY LINE Dterm C 2D will not follow fo...

Page 557: ... Code Appendix SIDA 55 Assign Connection Status Index CI for Normal N service STEP 3 ASFC Assign a Service Feature Class that allows SFI 74 and SFI 82 to the stations that receive the Message Waiting Lamp setting feature STEP 4 AKYD Assign Message Waiting Lamp set feature to a programmable line feature key Assign Type Function BOSS SECRETARY MSG WAIT SET 9 and a Message Waiting Lamp cancel key Typ...

Page 558: ...al the specific CALL FORWARDING ALL CALLS cancel code receive special dial tone 3 Dial the TENANT T 12 number 2 or 3 digits 4 Dial the originating telephone number receive service set tone Service Conditions 1 If CALL FORWARDING ALL CALLS C 5 is set at the called station the call is forwarded to a designated station that has set CALL FORWARDING ALL CALLS C 5 or CALL FORWARDING BUSY LINE C 2 2 A ca...

Page 559: ...gnated as its CALL FORWARDING ALL CALLS C 5 destination e If the call is forwarded back to the station where it has been forwarded to the CALL FORWARD will terminate at that station 7 CALL FORWARDING ALL CALLS C 5 CALL FORWARDING BUSY LINE C 2 and CALL FORWARDING DON T ANSWER C 3 combination Although CALL FORWARDING ALL CALLS C 5 CALL FORWARDING BUSY LINE C 2 and combinations of the two are limite...

Page 560: ...called station on the left and the number of the station being called on the right The display on the ringing Dterm will show the number of the originally called station on the left and the number of the calling station on the right b The forward status of the originally called station is shown on the far left of each Dterm s display FDB for CALL FORWARDING BUSY LINE C 2 FDA for CALL FORWARDING AL...

Page 561: ... call can be specified by system data System Data 2 Index 11 Bit 7 0 Call is routed to the Attendant Console Bit 7 1 Call is placed in queue until the called station becomes idle 14 When activating this feature via FCCS a telephone number must be set to the call forwarding destination 15 When activating this feature via FCCS a call cannot be forwarded more than five times 16 When activating this f...

Page 562: ...MULTIPLE CALL FORWARDING ALL CALLS is in service 0 1 No Yes System Data 1 Index 69 Bit 1 A burst of ringback tone to alert the person receiving a call that this is a MULTIPLE CALL FORWARDING ALL CALLS call In service 0 1 No Yes Normally assigned as data 0 System Data 1 Index 69 bit 7 MULTIPLE CALL FORWARDING BUSY LINE M 24 ALL CALLS M 44 in service 0 1 No Yes System Data 2 Index 6 Bit 4 Enable sta...

Page 563: ...n network commands for example AAED is replaced by AAEDN Note that the data setting for FCCS service varies depending on the node Note STEP 1 ASYDN These data must be set to the NCN System Data 1 Index 69 b7 Enable Multiple Call Forwarding Busy Line Don t Answer All Calls 0 1 Out of Service In Service Index 5 b1 b3 Assign the number of time for forwarding Note When using ASYDL or ASYDN to program ...

Page 564: ...tations that can signal each other must be assigned in the same Module Group Note 5 A station can manually signal one other Dterm 6 MANUAL SIGNALING is an operation of MANUAL INTERCOM A 30 and is used independently of the MANUAL INTERCOM A 30 feature Note This is also applied to FCCS service Programming STEP 1 ASYD SYS1 Index 59 Bit 7 Is AUTOMATIC MANUAL INTERCOM A 30 in service 0 1 No Yes STEP 2 ...

Page 565: ...ence 0 3 KYN Key Number 1 40 KYI Service Index 0 Key Not Used 1 Feature Key 2 Multi line Key KD Kind of Line 0 Multi line 1 Intercom Line ICM Kind of Intercom 0 Automatic Intercom 1 Manual Intercom 2 Dial Intercom If MANUAL SIGNALING is used assign a programmable line feature key as Type Function MANUAL SIGNALING KEY 60 STEP 4 ADSL Assign SN 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 15 and FKY 60 Manual Signaling Key SIG T...

Page 566: ... handset receive dial tone b Dial the MULTI CHANNEL RECORDING RECORDING access code from the station receive special dial tone c Enter Route Number and Trunk number the special dial tone stops Hear service set tone when is pressed The service set tone continues for 3 seconds d Start your recording when the service set tone is stopped e Replace the handset to finish recording Note The recording len...

Page 567: ...ack of the recorded message Note Even though recording of a message has been finished playback of the trunk cannot be accepted until dubbing of the message to the remaining trunks is complete 3 Recording by designating RT All trunks within the designated route are recorded a Lift a handset receive dial tone b Dial the MULTI CHANNEL RECORDING RECORDING access code from the station receive special d...

Page 568: ...ng Note The recording length is a multiple of 2 2n sec 4 Playback by designating RT a Lift a handset receive dial tone b Dial the MULTI CHANNEL RECORDING REPLAY access code from the station receive special dial tone c Enter Route Number and press the special dial tone stops d A recorded message of the designated route is automatically played back RECORDING START DDD 1 Recording Time Note RECORDING...

Page 569: ...NG RECORDING access code from the station receive special dial tone c Press and enter the UCD controlling telephone number d Wait until you hear service set tone The waiting time depends upon Register Inter Digit Timer normally 6 seconds The service set tone continues for 3 seconds e Start your recording when the service set tone is stopped f Replace the handset to finish recording Note The record...

Page 570: ...automatically played back e Replace the handset to finish playback of the recorded message Note Even though the recording of a message has been finished playback of the trunk cannot be accepted until dubbing of the message to the remaining trunks is complete 7 Recording of a message for ACD a Lift a handset receive dial tone b Dial the MULTI CHANNEL RECORDING RECORDING access code from the station...

Page 571: ...rvice set tone is stopped e Replace the handset to finish recording Note The recording length is a multiple of 2 2n sec 8 Playback of a message for ACD a Lift a handset receive dial tone b Dial the MULTI CHANNEL RECORDING REPLAY access code from the station receive special dial tone c Press and enter the Message Number that has been assigned in the AADT command REC 15 Message Number RECORDING STAR...

Page 572: ... 30 sec in the case of UCD 3 This feature is not effective for trunks being dubbed or placed in busy 4 A user cannot record a message to a trunk in which a recording dubbing is being made 5 When a user encounters Digital Announcement Trunk All Busy after dialing RT TK UCD Controlling telephone number Message Number from the terminal the user hears a busy tone 6 After completion of dialing RT TK UC...

Page 573: ...ramming STEP 1 ANPD Assign Number of Necessary Digits NND for the 1st digit of the access code of MULTI CHANNEL RECORDING STEP 2 ASPA Assign access codes for the following Service Code Appendix SSCA SRV SIDA SSCA 66 MULTI CHANNEL RECORDING REC 68 MULTI CHANNEL RECORDING RPY STEP 3 ASFC For this feature Service Feature Restriction data must be entered on a Service Feature Class SFC basis SFI 87 MUL...

Page 574: ...re Programming Manual NDA 24297 Issue 1 Page 531 Multi Channel Recording DAT M 48 Programming cont d STEP 7 APAD Assign the PAD control data KIND T Assignment of PAD data for dubbing S Assignment of PAD data for playback ...

Page 575: ...assigned digit outpulsing to the distant office is not started until all digits have been received when the signaling is MF If there is DP or PB lines among alternate routes an outgoing call may be originated by seizing a DP or PB line even when the route advance sequence for that line is lower than MF lines When the route advance sequence of MF to DP or PB is predetermined LCR must be assigned in...

Page 576: ...reverse type connection acknowledgment STEP 2 ANPD Assign the first digit of the MF line access code STEP 3 ASPA Assign the LCR or LCR S access code by providing a dummy route STEP 4 AMND Assign the maximum number of necessary digits to the Dial Area Office Code STEP 5 ARNP Assign the access code to the route number When multiple access codes are present by alternative routing set one of them STEP...

Page 577: ...cess code to the route number When multiple access codes are present by alternative routing set one of them STEP 4 ARTDN MF line Assign the following data depending on the trunk type as shown below Dummy route Assign 1 at all times for CDN 13 AC The route data of the dummy route is TCL 1 AC 1 and L T 1 For the others assign 0 in all cases Assign the following route class data to the route of the M...

Page 578: ...vailable SYS1 Index 79 b6 1 When OAI service is available SYS1 Index 79 b6 0 the information cannot be displayed on the lower line of LCD but will be displayed on the upper line 5 While Message Waiting information control is being executed to a Dterm equipped with a 2 line LCD by this service time information is not displayed on the LCD When Message Waiting information control is cancelled the tim...

Page 579: ...line on a Dterm line feature key STEP 1 ASYD System Data 1 Index 241 Bit 4 0 1 No ANI output to SMDR ANI output to SMDR System Data 1 Index 241 Bit 6 0 1 When the length of Caller ID exceeds the limit only the former latter part of data appears on the LCD System Data 1 Index 390 Bit 0 Caller ID display pattern on the LCD 0 1 Calling Number Calling Name has priority System Data 1 Index 390 Bit 2 wh...

Page 580: ...Call Id Change Display Key is effective while in conversation However display pattern returns to the original setting when answering holding or transferring the call STEP 4 ATRK Assign trunk data for the C O trunk STEP 5 MBTK Cancel the make busy of the C O trunk STEP 6 AKYD Assign Call Id Change Display key Assign Type Function CALL ID CHANGE DISPLAY 113 When Call Id Change Display key is pressed...

Page 581: ...5 STEP 2 ARTDN Assign route class data for the C O trunk RT 1 15 LSG 3 50 DPLY 1 When Calling Number is output to SMDR RT 1 10 SMDR 1 Assign Route Class Expansion Data CNI 1 SVI 1645 1 When My Line is Prime Line Call Id Change Display Key is effective while terminating or in conversation When My Line is not Prime Line Call Id Change Display Key is effective while in conversation However display pa...

Page 582: ... feature may be provided with NIGHT CONNECTION FLEXIBLE N 2 and TRUNK ANSWER FROM ANY STATION T 8 in the same system 4 If the NIGHT CONNECTION FIXED station is set for CALL FORWARDING ALL CALLS C 5 incoming Central Office trunk calls terminated to that station will be forwarded to the designated station 5 Programmed NIGHT CONNECTION FIXED stations can use CALL HOLD C 6 CALL TRANSFER C 10 11 and TH...

Page 583: ...vice restrictions can be automatically changed when the system is in the Night mode to allow a station normally restricted during the day to receive incoming calls 11 NIGHT CONNECTION FIXED Arrangements are provided to route calls normally directed to the Attendant to a preselected station line within the system when Night service is activated In addition incoming calls from specific non Direct In...

Page 584: ...CCS Programming This data setting describes only the additional or replacement commands used to activate FCCS services When used as an FCCS feature these commands replace the non network commands for example AAED is replaced by AAEDN Note that the data setting for FCCS service varies depending on the node Note 1 STEP 1 ACSIL This command must be assigned to the node accommodating the COT Assign th...

Page 585: ...n effect until changed For NIGHT CONNECTION FLEXIBLE to function a NIGHT CONNECTION FIXED telephone number must be assigned to the trunk via the MAT M 18 In the event of a power failure the assignments are not lost The TAS T 8 answering capability is provided for Night calls not assigned to Night stations 3 When activating this feature within an FCCS network the different destination for C O incom...

Page 586: ...provided and the Attendant has accessed an outgoing trunk the call may be released from the ATTENDANT CONSOLE A 3 and the user is allowed to complete dialing 5 This feature allows the Attendant to place an outgoing call for a user who reached the Attendant via a dial 0 call without requiring the user to hang up 6 The Attendant can dial the called number for the user or using the PASSING DIAL TONE ...

Page 587: ...to activate FCCS services When used as an FCCS feature these commands replace the non network commands for example AAED is replaced by AAEDN Note that the data setting for FCCS service varies depending on the node STEP 1 ARSCN Construct a Route Restriction Class RSC that will allow outgoing access to various routes using the Route Restriction Index RRI 2 through the Attendant Console ...

Page 588: ...ATING C 12 BUSY VERIFICATION B 3 and ATTENDANT CAMP ON A 1 cannot be activated to the busy line 6 The two held parties remain connected and can talk to each other MUSIC ON HOLD M 7 is not activated 7 The two held parties cannot be placed on EXCLUSIVE HOLD E 3D by the Dterm user 8 If one of the two held parties is released from the connection MUSIC ON HOLD M 7 will be activated on the remaining con...

Page 589: ... 2D 12 This service feature is not available when a station is in the following states a when a station has a path to a trunk and a trunk held by MUSIC ON HOLD M 7 for CONSULTATION HOLD ALL CALLS C 17 or CONSULTATION HOLD ALL CALLS Dterm C 17D b when a station has a path to two stations at one time for THREE WAY CALLING T 2 or THREE WAY CALLING Dterm T 2D Programming ASYD System Data 1 Index 144 R...

Page 590: ...number and a Telephone Equipment Class TEC of 12 STEP 2 AKYD Assign a MY Line a Prime Line and various sublines to the Dterm s TN 1 STN Station Number TP Type of Dterm 0 1 RING Assign ringing to the entire phone 0 No Ringing 1 Ringing All Lines 2 Ringing on Prime Line Only 3 Flexible Ring Assignment enables RG parameter PL TN STN Prime Line Tenant and Station Number KYN Key Number 1 40 KYI Service...

Page 591: ...this feature 4 This service cannot be used in combination with CONSECUTIVE SPEED CALLING C 62 service 5 The call transfer destination can be fixed on a per tenant basis Programming STEP 1 ASYD System Data 1 Index 77 Bit 0 DAY NIGHT mode Changeover via handset jack 0 1 Not Required Required STEP 2 ALDN Assign LDN allow night transfer assign TYPE 3 and the ADC number assigned in ASPD STEP 3 ASPD Ass...

Page 592: ...on by CALL FORWARDING ALL CALLS C 5 BUSY LINE C 2 DON T ANSWER C 3 TOM JONES XXXX 16 digit display LCD display of the calling station User information corresponding to the called telephone number Called telephone number MARY HARRIS XXXX LCD display of the called station User information corresponding to the calling telephone number Calling telephone number 8 digit display LCD display of the callin...

Page 593: ...numeric characters and most keyboard symbols 4 This service and Name Display service by Open Application Interface OAI cannot be activated concurrently 5 8 digit display or 16 digit display is selectable by system data but cannot be used concurrently 6 16 digit display a 16 digit display is available only in case of station My Line only to station My Line only calls between Dterm s with 2 line LCD...

Page 594: ...is ON LINE a Generic Program and Operating Memory testing b Fault Contents Display and Diagnosis c System Office Data Entry and Change d REMOTE MAINTENANCE R 7 e Traffic Measurement f Testing facilities of outside trunks is provided as an option g PEG COUNT P 7 display 2 I O port 0 is fixed at 4800 bps Interactions 1 MAINTENANCE ADMINISTRATION TERMINALS M 18 must first be provided 2 Verify all cab...

Page 595: ...atically be dropped from the queue 2 When this feature is used in conjunction with SPEED CALLING SYSTEM S 3 or LEAST COST ROUTING L 5 where a sender is involved the sender will automatically dial out the called subscriber number when the handset is lifted 3 If the user wishes to remove himself from the queue prior to being rung the specified cancellation code must be dialed 4 Individual stations m...

Page 596: ...ble has happened the user cannot set or cancel OGQ data After dialing the access code or pressing the feature keys for set cancel OGQ the user hears the reorder tone 20 When the trunk becomes idle status after the NCN is recovered the call in the queue will be called back if data has not been cleared If data has been cleared the call is cancelled automatically Interactions 1 Dial pad operation for...

Page 597: ...ID 20 Assign SID 19 for a Connection Index of Busy B and SID 20 for a Connection Index of Normal N If the access codes are the same either the access codes for OGQ or the access codes for CALL BACK may be assigned STEP 4 ASFC If access codes are separate assign a Service Feature Class that allows SFI 1 to stations that will have OGQ If access codes are the same assign an SFC that allows SRI 1 SFI ...

Page 598: ...ecessary Digits BLF Busy Lamp Field STEP 4 ARTDN These data must be assigned to the NCN LGRT Logical Route Number Assign CDN 9 TQ Trunk Queuing Service 1 Note 1 When using ASYDL or ASYDN to program an FCCS feature the basic programming of ASYD is required in addition to ASYDL or ASYDN Note 2 The current data should also be set in addition the above mentioned command The command to be set to the no...

Page 599: ...ty 3 Press the CALL BACK key receive service set tone The LCD displays 4 Replace the handset 5 When the trunk becomes idle the station will be rung Once connected to the trunk the system automatically redials the number Service Conditions 1 When an OUTGOING TRUNK becomes available the user s station will ring for 30 seconds If the user does not answer within that time the station will be automatic...

Page 600: ...feature 13 ACCOUNT CODE A 18 and FORCED ACCOUNT CODE F 7 information can be recorded on SMDR S 10 when used in conjunction with OUTGOING TRUNK QUEUING Dterm 14 OUTGOING TRUNK QUEUING Dterm is only available from the MY Line of a Dterm 15 This feature can also be activated when using a trunk in the remote node via FCCS link 16 The maximum number for the OGQ station is 1 024 within the FCCS network ...

Page 601: ...m Data 1 Index 139 timer for the recall ringing STEP 2 ANPD Reserve a number level for service feature access and cancel Assign Connection Indexes CI N H B Normal N Hooking H and Busy B applicable to any feature assigned to this level Assign NND in accordance with a predetermined numbering plan STEP 3 ASPA If System Data 2 Index 4 Bit 0 is assigned for separate access codes assign an access code t...

Page 602: ... OG Queuing Entry SID 20 OG Queuing Cancel STEP 3 ANPDN These data must be assigned to the NCN TN Tenant 1st DC 1st Digit CI Normal N Hooking H and Busy B NND Number of Necessary Digits BLF Busy Lamp Field STEP 4 ARTDN These data must be assigned to the NCN LGRT Logical Route Number Assign CDN 9 TQ Trunk Queuing Service 1 Note 1 When using ASYDL or ASYDN to program an FCCS feature the basic progra...

Page 603: ...and will be connected to the predetermined stations that are assigned for each off hook group 4 Maximum number of OFF HOOK ALARM groups is 7 per TENANT T 12 group A group number must be assigned to all the stations to be included in a group 5 The station assigned as a terminating station of each OFF HOOK ALARM group can be a member of a HUNTING GROUP S 7 8 9 6 This service is programmed via system...

Page 604: ...o all consoles with OFF HOOK ALARM keys programmed in AAKP 3 The following features will function on terminating calls to a predetermined station CALL PICKUP C 7 CALL TRANSFER C 11 CALL HOLD C 6 CALL FORWARDING C 5A 4 No tone is provided on CALL WAITING TERMINATING C 12 Programming STEP 1 ASYD System Data 1 Index 128 Bits 0 3 Register Prepause timer is used for OFF HOOK ALARM After the register ti...

Page 605: ...ting describes only the additional or replacement commands used to activate FCCS services When used as an FCCS feature these commands replace the non network commands for example AAED is replaced by AAEDN Note that the data setting for FCCS service varies depending on the node Note 1 ASYDL This data must be set to all the nodes System Data 1 Index 640 assign the Fusion Point Code FPC of the node p...

Page 606: ...er system 1 IMG 64 calls 4 IMG IPX U 256 calls 3 The queue slots are used commonly by OFF HOOK QUEUING OUTGOING TRUNK QUEUING O 2 and INTER OFFICE OFF HOOK QUEUING I 11 4 If no queue slots are available the user will receive busy tone 5 Route Class of the LCR can give the choice of the OFF HOOK QUEUING 6 CLASS OF SERVICE INDIVIDUAL C 15 is applied for each station This class of service is differen...

Page 607: ...eatures cannot be activated toward the busy station CALL WAITING ORIGINATING C 31 CALL WAITING TERMINATING C 12 ATTENDANT CAMP ON WITH TONE INDICATION A 1 BUSY VERIFICATION B 3 and EXECUTIVE RIGHT OF WAY E 1 7 Do not disable constant service set tone by changing System Data 1 Index 42 Bit 7 to data 1 This changes constant service set tone to burst special dial tone and special dial tone to burst s...

Page 608: ...uing Entry CI N Normal SID 20 OG Queuing Cancel Note 1 When using ASYDL or ASYDN to program an FCCS feature the basic programming of ASYD is required in addition to ASYDL or ASYDN Note 2 The current data should also be set in addition the above mentioned commands The command to be set to the node accommodating the trunk ARTD The command to be set to all the nodes ASYD ASFC ...

Page 609: ...tion 2 If all stations are busy in Group B then the call is placed in queue for the originally called UCD U 1 group Group A Operating Procedure No manual operation is required Service Conditions 1 An OVERFLOW group must be a UCD U 1 Group 2 One OVERFLOW group can be provided for one UCD U 1 Group 3 OVERFLOW is performed only once 4 An OVERFLOW group cannot be registered into a queue Call Terminati...

Page 610: ...inally called group and the forwarded group Interactions ALL UNIFORM CALL DISTRIBUTION U 1 interactions apply to the UCD overflow group The incoming overflow call is handled in the same way as a regular incoming call If both UCD groups are busy the call will queue at Group A Programming STEP 1 ASHU ASHUL Assign the required data for the UCD Group TN UGN Tenant Number User Group Number Fixed to 1 S...

Page 611: ... busy calls will overflow to UCD Group B STEP 5 AKYD To a programmable line feature key on the UCD stations when the stations are Dterms assign FKY 19 UCD Busy Out STEP 6 ADSL Assign UCDBO key Assign SN 0 Idle 3 Called Station Busy and FKY 19 UCD Busy Out This command is required for assigning a function to each soft key FCCS Programming This data setting describes only the additional or replaceme...

Page 612: ...EUING OGQ O 2 12D 16 and INTER OFFICE OFF HOOK QUEUING I 11 4 If no queue slots are available the ATTENDANT CONSOLE A 3 will receive busy tone 5 CLASS OF SERVICE INDIVIDUAL C 15 is applied to each ATTENDANT CONSOLE A 3 RSC 0 and SFC 0 are reserved for ATTENDANT CONSOLE A 3 6 OFF HOOK QUEUING is utilized for this service feature 7 This feature can also be activated when using a trunk in the remote ...

Page 613: ...l or replacement commands used to activate FCCS services When used as an FCCS feature these commands replace the non network commands for example AAED is replaced by AAEDN Note that the data setting for FCCS service varies depending on the node STEP 1 ASYDN This data must be assigned to the NCN System Data 1 Index 41 Designate the Trunk Queuing Override Timer STEP 2 ASPAN These data must be assign...

Page 614: ...igination is impossible because of a sender busy condition even though there are idle trunks 7 This feature is available when a call using STATION TO STATION CALLING S 11 is transferred by CALL FORWARDING ALL CALLS OUTSIDE C 28 or CALL FORWARDING BUSY LINE OUTSIDE C 60 and encounters busy outgoing trunks 8 This feature is available when a station calling on a DIRECT INWARD DIALING D 8 or a Tie Lin...

Page 615: ...hook status the LCD displays In the idle status and no display In the off hook status the LCD displays Selected line number is displayed When dialing the one digit 3 the LCD displays Selected line number is cleared and dialed number is displayed 2 When a call is originated by using TRUNK LINE APPEARANCE service the LCD displays In the on hook status In the idle status and no display In the off hoo...

Page 616: ...ed 4 If the trunk number is not assigned the LCD doesn t display 5 The maximum digits of the displayed trunk number is 4 6 The display position of the selected line trunk number may be changed by system data as below a b c Programming ASYD System Data 1 Index 389 Bits 5 and 6 Location of Off Hook Line Number Display on the Dterm 00 Right side Standard Setting 01 Center 10 Left side 11 System Data ...

Page 617: ...station in FCCS nodes 9 When PAGING ACCESS P 1 PAGING TRANSFER P 10 RADIO PAGING R 16 service is set to a station in the remote node or the PAGING ACCESS P 1 PAGING TRANSFER P 10 RADIO PAGING R 16 call is answered from the remote node via FCCS link a the logical route number should be applied to each physical route that provides the service b the restriction of route to route connection between FC...

Page 618: ...GING P 30 is used with PAGING ACCESS P 1 then MEET ME PAGE M 1 11 and PAGING TRANSFER P 10 are not available to the system 12 PRIORITY PAGE P 30 access will not disconnect an Attendant Console engaged in a Paging trunk connection Programming STEP 1 ASYD System Data 1 Index 73 bits 0 1 For PAGING function only assign data 00 STEP 2 ARTD Assign the Paging route as shown below RT 1 1 OSGS 2 2 ONSG 3 ...

Page 619: ...al tone to any station that has a class of service that allows normal direct dial access capabilities to the trunk group seized by the Attendant 7 Any non restricted station can dial through over the selected outgoing trunk The type of address signals sent to the called location are determined by the trunk route class data 8 Where SMDR S 10 is provided through dialed calls are charged to the calli...

Page 620: ...le the Attendant dials 81 and releases The station dials 1 516 753 7526 ATDP must be programmed as DC 9151 and TDI 1 allowed not as DC 81151 ARNP for the route in this example is assigned with the access code 9 Programming STEP 1 ASYD System Data 2 Index 15 Bit 3 Toll restriction on an outgoing call placed by PASSING DIAL TONE 0 1 Valid Invalid STEP 2 ARSC Construct a Route Restriction Class RSC t...

Page 621: ...RANSFER feature is activated telephone service is limited to incoming calls and or outgoing calls via the serving Central Office DID calls cannot be received 7 Dterm s cannot be used as Power Failure stations 8 All calls in progress and or established calls are lost when a POWER FAILURE TRANSFER occurs When commercial power is restored the NEAX2400 IPX is automatically re initialized Back up servi...

Page 622: ...y with PUSHBUTTON CALLING 3 Timing for the DTMF signals can be set from 0 128 to 2 048 seconds via system commands on a system wide basis 4 DTMF frequency combinations are as follows Interactions 1 Each 8RST circuit card contains eight register and eight sender circuits Each register circuit can accept either pushbutton or rotary dial pulses The senders can transmit pushbutton or dial pulse signal...

Page 623: ...unks ORT to the system in a quantity calculated from expected traffic Registers are located on levels 0 3 of any 8RST circuit card Also senders must be assigned to the system in a quantity calculated from expected traffic Senders are located on levels 4 7 of any 8RST circuit card RT Route Number Trunk Route Number Intra office Route Number 901 931 901 ATT 912 ORT for ATT 902 ORT 913 TCFT for ATT 9...

Page 624: ...digit Normally assign data 00H for 12 seconds System Data 1 Index 134 Register Inter digit Timer for the Attendant Console How long the register waits between digits Normally assign data 00H for four seconds System Data 2 Index 2 Bit 1 Sender signal for Attendant Console is DP PB 0 1 DP PB Assign as appropriate STEP 2 ATRK Assign Originating Register Trunks ORT to the Attendant Console optional Re...

Page 625: ...OUP S 3 21 23 OUTGOING TRUNK QUEUING O 2 OFF HOOK QUEUING O 7 and PUSHBUTTON TO ROTARY CONVERSION 2 Register circuits are located on the first four levels 0 3 and sender circuits are located on the last four levels 4 7 of the 8RST circuit card 3 Each register may be assigned as either an outgoing or an incoming register Incoming calls have priority over outgoing calls Thus a register programmed as...

Page 626: ... ONSG as data 1 DP or data 3 DP PB FCCS Programming This data setting describes only the additional or replacement commands used to activate FCCS services When used as an FCCS feature these commands replace the non network commands for example AAED is replaced by AAEDN Note that the data setting for FCCS service varies depending on the node Note STEP 1 ARTDN Outgoing routes must be assigned as DP ...

Page 627: ...minated Number of trunk to station calls terminated Number of total calls terminated to station Number of calls unanswered within a predetermined time Number of calls answered Number of calls unanswered Number of calls hearing busy tone and forwarded to the ATTENDANT CONSOLE A 3 ATTENDANT PEG COUNT Number of incoming calls per INCOMING CALL IDENTIFICATION I 2 lamp Number of calls answered per INCO...

Page 628: ... Type of Traffic Measurement INTERVAL Output Interval must be assigned in units of 10 minutes Available range is from 30 120 minutes or 0 must be assigned FROM TO Measurement to be designated TIME Output Time TYPE 1 Terminal Traffic Measurement 2 Route Traffic Measurement 3 Station Peg Count 4 Attendant Console Peg Count 5 Route Peg Count 6 Service Peg Count 8 UCD Route Peg Count 9 UCD Group Peg C...

Page 629: ... Data 2 TYPE Type of Traffic Measurement 6 Service Peg Count STEP 3 DTF3 Display of Traffic Data 3 TYPE Type of Traffic Measurement 8 UCD Route Peg Count 9 UCD Group Peg Count 10 UCD Station Peg Count STEP 4 DTF4 Display of Traffic Data 4 11 CCIS Traffic Count FCCS Programming No unique programming is required for the FCCS network ...

Page 630: ... become idle Ringback tone will be heard while the caller is waiting 8 Three levels of PRIORITY CALLs can be assigned 9 When the destination is a station the originating stations should be assigned as a member of a PRIORITY CALL group The maximum number of PRIORITY CALL groups is 7 per TENANT T 12 The terminating station must be assigned to each PRIORITY CALL group 10 The terminating station of ea...

Page 631: ...nection Indexes CI CI N H B Normal N Hooking H and Busy B applicable to any feature assigned to this level Assign NND in accordance with the predetermined numbering plan STEP 4 ASPA For SRV SSC Service Code SID 37 Priority Call 1 SID 38 Priority Call 2 SID 39 Priority Call 3 assign the access code Assign for CI of Normal N STEP 5 ASID This command defines the purpose of this Special Incoming Group...

Page 632: ...non network commands for example AAED is replaced by AAEDN Note that the data setting for FCCS service varies depending on the node Note STEP 1 ASPAL This data must be set to the node calling the attendant Assign the FPC of the node which accommodates the called attendant console This must be assigned after designating SID 37 38 39 Note When using ASYDL or ASYDN to program an FCCS feature the basi...

Page 633: ...y the held party is directly connected to the paged party Service Conditions 1 PAGING TRANSFER service can be selected according to system data assignment a Non Delay system b Delay and Non Delay system c PAGING TRANSFER Supervision 2 Paging trunks can be provided for a maximum of six routes 3 When a paging route has been accessed and is not answered within a predetermined time the paging activati...

Page 634: ...er parties CO and TIE trunk calls must have the Attendant Console or user perform the paging operation 3 The Attendant cannot dial the MEET ME PAGING answer codes 4 BUSY VERIFICATION B 3 EXECUTIVE OVERRIDE E 1 These features will be denied to Paging routes assigned in CDN 6 TCL as data 8 Page with ringback tone 5 PAGING TRANSFER OPERATION Station A is connected to Party B Station A momentarily pre...

Page 635: ... number that is associated with this Paging trunk access code Assign for CI Normal N and Hooking H Assign the PAGE answer and cancel access code Type of Service SRV PAGA Paging Answer and SRV PAGC Paging Cancel Assign the proper route number that is associated with this access code Assign for CI Normal N STEP 7 ARSC Allow RRI 2 3 access to this route for the RSCs assigned to stations given access ...

Page 636: ...ging Transfer P 10 FCCS Programming cont d Note 1 When using ASYDL or ASYDN to program an FCCS feature the basic programming of ASYD is required in addition to ASYDL or ASYDN Note 2 The current command data shown is set to all nodes using the service ASTD ARTD ATRK ASFC ...

Page 637: ...s SPECIAL DIAL TONE after the outgoing call mode this feature will be cancelled automatically 6 When the user activates the following service features after the outgoing calls to a Central Office line or to a TIE Line this feature will be cancelled automatically ATTENDANT CAMP ON WITH TONE INDICATION A 1 ATTENDANT OVERRIDE A 7 BOSS SECRETARY OVERRIDE Dterm B 5D BUSY VERIFICATION B 3 CALL HOLD C 6 ...

Page 638: ...ill be sent to the station Assign 00H for 3 minutes System Data 1 Index 138 This timer sets the period between the first and second tones and all other subsequent tones Assign 00H for 3 minutes STEP 2 ARTD Assign CDN 29 TELP Flag the routes with which the tone will operate STEP 3 ASFC Assign to stations that receive PERIODIC TIME INDICATION TONE a Service Feature Class that allows SFI 11 and SFI 3...

Page 639: ...ime Line may be different than the MY Line When they are different the following features will not operate for the Prime Line CALL BACK C 1 CALL PARK C 29 DO NOT DISTURB D 21D and OUTGOING TRUNK QUEUING O 2D CALL FORWARDING C 2 3 5 28 features may be set by the Attendant 3 CLASS OF SERVICE INDIVIDUAL C 15 The Prime Line will operate according to the CLASS OF SERVICE INDIVIDUAL of the MY Line 4 STA...

Page 640: ... Page 597 Prime Line Pickup Dterm P 13D Programming cont d 2 Multi line Key KD 0 TN Tenant STN Station Number RG Ringing Assignment per multi line appearance 0 No Ringing 1 Ringing in Day Mode Only 2 Ringing in Night Mode Only 3 Ringing in Day and Night Mode ...

Page 641: ...rsation is concluded PRIVACY Dterm is released The LCD displays 3 If the DND key is pressed with the station on hook the DND Dterm D 21D feature has been activated Calls can be made with DND D 21D activated DND D 21D will not deny EXECUTIVE RIGHT OF WAY E 1 4 The PRIVACY Dterm feature may be activated or deactivated in any conversation as often as desired 5 PRIVACY Dterm denies the following featu...

Page 642: ...t d KYN Key Number 1 40 KYI Service Index 0 Key Not Used 1 Feature Key 2 Multi line Key KD Not assigned for Feature Key FKY Feature Key Number FKY 50 DO NOT DISTURB STEP 2 ADSL Assign DND key SN 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 15 and FKY 50 Do Not Disturb This command is required for assigning a function to each soft key ...

Page 643: ...essing a busy line button and entering a conversation which can occur with 1A2 key telephones without exclusion circuits Operating Procedure No manual operation is required Service Conditions 1 A Dterm user cannot seize the Prime Line if it is busy 2 LINE PRESELECTION L 9D is denied if the selected line is busy 3 PRIVACY RELEASE P 18 overrides this feature Programming No programming is required ...

Page 644: ...r 10 seconds 2 Station A lifts handset or presses THE SPEAKER key receives ringback tone and the LCD displays 3 A 4 party call is established The LCDs of the associated Dterm s display The line appearance will flash indicating I USE I 8 To establish a 4 party call when the PRIVACY key is pressed by a Dterm engaged in THREE WAY CALLING T 2 1 While engaged in THREE WAY CALLING T 2 with Station B and...

Page 645: ...is feature is available when the PRIVACY key is pressed to establish PRIVACY RELEASE 5 A station has to be in one of the following states to set PRIVACY by pressing PRIVACY key or the P RLS key a Connected to station or trunk b Engaged in a maximum 7 party call PRIVACY cannot be set when the overriding party has already received ringback tone 6 PRIVACY RELEASE is available anytime by pressing PRIV...

Page 646: ...phone number is displayed even when Privacy is set 14 PRIVACY RELEASE is available after any of the following operations is performed by the overriding station a The user presses the line appearance of a busy station goes off hook or presses the SPEAKER key b While connected to a station Attendant OG trunk IC trunk the user presses the line appearance of a busy station The call in progress will be...

Page 647: ... Port 0 L 0 b Ports 1 through 7 L 1 7 in the same conference trunk must be grouped in the same Circular Hunting Group c When only one 8 party conference trunk is available for a Tenant the telephone number or phantom number of Port 0 L 0 should be assigned to system data as the trunk seizure number When several trunks maximum of 20 are available the telephone number or phantom number of Port 0 L 0...

Page 648: ...rmal N and Hooking H STEP 4 ASDT Assign station data to each port of the PA CFTB circuit card STEP 5 AKYD Assign FKI 1 Feature Key and an FKY 48 PRIVACY RELEASE to a programmable Line Feature key STEP 6 ADSL Assign P RLS key Assign SN 4 Communication in Progress and FKY 48 Privacy Release This command is used for assigning a function to each soft key STEP 7 APHN Assign station numbers to the PA CF...

Page 649: ...ATTENDANT CONSOLE A 3 which is waiting for an answer to another paging call 4 PRIORITY PAGING access code ALL ZONE PAGING A 53 access code dialing is possible However even if this dialing method is used the PRIORITY PAGING P 30 function is not activated when the line is busy It operates in the same way as ALL ZONE PAGING A 53 access code dialing 5 While a paging trunk forced release or Paging Memo...

Page 650: ...e is released and Recall is possible 15 Both the COT card and the TLT card can be used as the paging trunk 16 Loop signaling is the recommended signaling type Programming STEP 1 ASYD System Data 1 Index 73 bits 0 1 For PAGING function only assign data 00 STEP 2 ARTD Assign the Paging route as shown below RT 1 1 OSGS 2 2 ONSG 3 4 INSG 3 5 TF 1 6 TCL 8 7 L T 1 8 RLP 2 15 LSG 0 1 44 PRV 1 STEP 3 ATRK...

Page 651: ... the Attendant Console 3 Calls to stations in PAD LOCK status will receive reorder tone or on a tenant basis can be assigned to transfer to the Attendant Console 4 PAD LOCK status will continue unless it is cancelled 5 Stations are assigned this feature via Class of Service 6 This feature is set cancelled from the station only The Attendant Console cannot set or cancel this feature 7 If a Dterm is...

Page 652: ...gramming Manual NDA 24297 Issue 1 Page 609 Pad Lock P 57 Programming cont d STEP 5 AATC Assign the TN Digit Code DC the Authorization Code Restriction ACR as data 1 and Service Feature Class SFC and Route Restriction Class RSC ...

Page 653: ...ual operation is required Service Conditions 1 When a station tie line incoming call is forwarded with an operator station assistance ringer pattern is determined according to Service Feature Class of the forwarded station 2 When a My Line of another Dterm station is assigned to a Sub Line Ringer Pattern 5 is used for station tie line incoming calls to the Sub Line Accordingly ringer of the Sub Li...

Page 654: ... 2 sec OFF 0 4 sec ON on the ON Time for Ringer Pattern 0 0 1 Not Required Required Bit 1 2 Burst 0 4 sec ON 0 2 sec OFF 0 4 sec ON on the ON Time for Ringer Pattern 1 0 1 Not Required Required Bit 5 3 Burst 0 4 sec ON 0 2 sec OFF 0 8 sec ON 0 2 sec ON 0 4 sec OFF on the ON Time for Ringer Pattern 5 0 1 Not Required Required System Data 3 Index 7 Timer Value for Ringer used for Ringer Pattern 5 Wh...

Page 655: ...ial tone 2 Dial the Remote Access number to connect to the NEAX2400 IPX receive ringback tone through the public network 3 Receive PBX dial tone 4 Dial the desired telephone number hear ringback tone 5 The called party answers Service Conditions 1 When a call terminates from a TIE Line this feature is available by dialing a specific telephone number 2 After a call terminates to AUTOMATED ATTENDANT...

Page 656: ...SC the Incoming Remote Access route to the RSCs of the station that may be called 7 See AUTHORIZATION CODES A 20 for Check Sum method assignments Programming STEP 1 ASYD System Data 1 Index 43 Bit 0 Is Authorization Code required with REMOTE ACCESS TO SYSTEM 0 1 Yes No If this is assigned as data 1 then no assignment in AATC and AMND is required System Data 1 Index 243 Timer Counter of the forced ...

Page 657: ...ll Class Index CCI LDN CCSA that will be connected to Remote Access REMOTE ACCESS TO SYSTEM is Transfer Service Feature Index TSFI number 7 STEP 11 ASTD Assign the state translation data STM 4 SYS 0 ST 1 Remote Access to PBX In Service FCCS Programming This data setting describes only the additional or replacement commands used to activate FCCS services When used as an FCCS feature these commands ...

Page 658: ...Procedure Power is automatically supplied to the NEAX2400 IPX in the event of a commercial power failure Service Conditions 1 Batteries should be installed separate from the NEAX2400 IPX 2 Batteries and chargers are not NEC supplied 3 No interruption of NEAX2400 IPX operation will occur during switch over from commercial to battery power 4 Duration of battery operation is a direct function of the ...

Page 659: ...system The Direct Dial Access table is indexed when a user dials the trunk group access code and the ATTENDANT CONSOLE A 3 table is indexed on Attendant completed calls The restriction options per RSC can differ per table thus allowing Attendant completion of outgoing calls for the restricted stations 7 CALL TRANSFER ALL CALLS C 11 If a restricted user calls another station the called station cann...

Page 660: ...System Data 2 Index 1 Bits 4 5 Should a Toll Restricted station be routed to the Attendant Console or receive reorder tone Reorder Tone Bit 4 0 Bit 5 0 Attendant Console Bit 4 0 Bit 5 0 Route Restriction Class STEP 2 ARSC Sixteen different Route Restriction Classes may be constructed to either allow deny or toll restrict access to the various routes of the system Assign the RSC using Route Restric...

Page 661: ... example AAED is replaced by AAEDN Note that the data setting for FCCS service varies depending on the node Note STEP 1 ARSCN Sixteen different Route Restriction Classes may be constructed to either allow deny or toll restrict access to the various routes of the system Assign the RSC using Route Restriction Indexes 2 outgoing via the Attendant Console and 3 Outgoing Direct Note When using ASYDL or...

Page 662: ...complished by assigning data 2 for CDN 2 ONSG in ARTD or assigning data 1 in ASYD System Data 2 Index 1 Bit 0 and assigning CDN 2 ONSG as data 3 DP PB 2 See UNIVERSAL SENDER U 3 for sender programming 3 ROTARY DIAL CALLING may be accomplished via an extension of PUSH BUTTON CALLING P 4 if a Telephone Equipment Class of 3 has been programmed 4 The or symbols cannot be used as feature activation cod...

Page 663: ...g cont d 902 ORT 913 TCFT for ATT 903 IRT 915 Night ATT 905 Sender 916 MFCR 909 DCFT 917 MFCS 919 to 926 Modem TK Trunk Number TN Tenant number RSC Route Restriction Class SFC Service Feature Class STEP 4 ARTD Routes must be assigned as either PB DP or DP PB Flag CDN 2 ONSG as data 1 DP or data 3 DP PB ...

Page 664: ...is 255 9 No code conversion capability is provided with ROUTE ADVANCE therefore the exact digits after the access code the user dials will be sent over the selected trunk regardless of the trunk group used The user will not know what trunk group is selected therefore only those trunk groups that accept the same dialing format may be assigned to a given ROUTE ADVANCE group 10 ROUTE ADVANCE occurs o...

Page 665: ... be 1 or 2 depending on numbering plan BLF should be Off STEP 3 ASPA Assign the Service SRV OGCA Outgoing Call Advance Outgoing Call Route Advance Assign the access code to the lead route number to be seized In the desired order program the routes to be selected when the first choice route is busy Count the total number of routes in the route advance group including the first choice route STEP 4 A...

Page 666: ...perations can be executed from the REMOTE MAINTENANCE location a list of all system data line trunk etc b retrieval of fault data c retrieval of traffic management information d testing of system operation e deletion or addition of system data line trunk etc using a pre programmed security password 3 The following three facility methods are available to interface with a remote test location a dedi...

Page 667: ...Configuration data Serial Settings TCPIP Settings in the PBX Administration menu STEP 4 AUIDN This command must be assigned to allow password protection Assign the following TYPE Data Type 1 Password Code Data 2 Grade 2 Command Data GRD 1 Grade 1 Password CDN 1 15 against the Grade 1 Password 15 Grade 2 Passwords may be assigned GRD 2 Assign the Grade 2 Passwords TYPE 2 Grade 2 Command Data CDN 1 ...

Page 668: ...his operation is not available when assigning System Data 1 Index 73 b4 1 Only Non Delay operation is available 5 Paging station is connected to the paged party Using LCR LCRS access code a paging station accesses Radio Paging equipment providing the automatic answer function System Data 1 Index 73 b4 1 1 Paged party dials the paging station number individual attendant number which is displayed on...

Page 669: ...ermined time 15 A user can page one station at a time Interactions 1 If the range of the radio page transmitter exceeds the physical limits of the PBX an incoming C O call acting as a response to a Radio Page cannot be connected in loop to loop procedures The paging party must disconnect and the Attendant must extend the paged party s C O call 2 RADIO PAGING and PAGING ACCESS P 1 can be provided s...

Page 670: ...mber that is associated with this access code Assign for Normal N and Hooking H Assign the access code in the level reserved in ANPD above Type of Service SRV PAGA Paging Answer and SRV PAGC Paging Cancel Assign the proper route number that is associated with this route Assign for a Connection Index of Normal N STEP 7 ARSC Allow RRI 2 3 access to this route for the RSCs assigned to the stations th...

Page 671: ...R 16 Radio Paging FCCS Programming cont d Note 1 When using ASYDL or ASYDN to program an FCCS feature the basic programming of ASYD is required in addition to ASYDL or ASYDN Note 2 The current command data shown is set to all nodes using the service ASTD ARTD ATRK ASFC ...

Page 672: ...s a restriction 2 Access to the announcement of this service feature is restricted by MISCELLANEOUS TRUNK RESTRICTION M 3 3 The announcement machine can be provided on a per tenant basis 4 The availability of this service cannot be determined for each originating route 5 TOLL DIVERSION T 6 takes precedence over this feature 6 Digital Announcement Trunk DAT and the calling station must be accommoda...

Page 673: ...n increase in volume CALLING TERMINAL CALLED TERMINAL RS 464A PAD CONTROL THE CURRENT PAD CONTROL ONS ONS 6dB PAD ON 5dB PAD ON ONS OPS 3dB PAD ON PAD OFF 0dB OPS ONS 3dB PAD ON PAD OFF 0dB OPS OPS PAD OFF 0dB PAD OFF 0dB ONS ATT 6dB PAD ON PAD OFF 0dB OPS ATT 3dB PAD ON PAD OFF 0dB ONS Trunk Data assigned to ARTD PAD Data assigned to ARTD PAD OPS Trunk Data assigned to ARTD PAD2 Data assigned to ...

Page 674: ...ITH SFI 50 1 16 COTBE WITH APAD SETTING ARTD PAD TRANSMIT PAD RECEIVE PAD ARTD PAD 2 TRANSMIT PAD RECEIVE PAD APAD SETTING TRANSMIT PAD RECEIVE PAD 0 0db 0db 0 ARTD PAD 1 0db 0db 1 0db 0db 1 0db 0db 2 3db 3db 2 3db 3db 2 3db 3db 3 6db 6db 3 6db 6db 3 6db 6db 4 0db 6db 4 0db 6db 4 0db 6db 5 Unused Unused 5 0db 0db 5 0db 0db 15 Pad Off Pad Off 6 Unused Unused 6 Unused Unused 7 0db 0db 7 0db 0db 8TLT...

Page 675: ...rnal trunks 2 ONS general telephone and OPS long line telephone are identified by the SFC of the station concerned 8TLTR 2W E M WITH SFI 50 0 8TLTR 2W E M WITH SFI 50 1 8TLTR 2W E M WITH APAD SETTING ARTD PAD TRANSMIT PAD RECEIVE PAD ARTD PAD 2 TRANSMIT PAD RECEIVE PAD APAD SETTING TRANSMIT PAD RECEIVE PAD 0 0db 0db 0 ARTD PAD 1 3db 3db 1 3db 3db 1 3db 3db 2 6db 6db 2 6db 6db 2 6db 6db 3 6db 6db 3...

Page 676: ... General Telephone OPS Long Line Telephone Stations that have SFI 50 in ASFC set to a 0 will follow the PAD setting in PAD 2 of ARTD Stations that have SFI 50 in ASFC set to a 1 will follow the PAD set in PAD 2 PAD 2 settings override the values set in PAD STEP 3 ASYD System 1 Index 4 Bit 6 affects Station to Station calls only 0 6dB 1 0dB Assignment of External Trunk STEP 1 ARTD Assign route clas...

Page 677: ...tion individual initialization of LP or initialization of PM 3 While this service is activated ringing for Call Back is not provided as well 4 This service has no effect on the status of DO NOT DISTURB D 11 service For example a When Do Not Disturb is set the station is in the Do Not Disturb status b When Ringer Mute is set the station is in the Do Not Disturb and Ringer Mute status c When Do Not ...

Page 678: ...re is displayed only when a call terminates to a station or when a station is connected to the call In case of the call through a CCIS line the assigned trunk type is not displayed If a station is connected to the trunk user through the CCIS ROM data corresponding to the Trunk Class of the route is displayed If a station is connected to a station belonging to a different office within the CCIS net...

Page 679: ...y AAEDN Note that the data setting for FCCS service varies depending on the node Note 1 STEP 1 ASYDL System Data 1 Index 512 FPC of the self node Note 2 System Data 1 Index 513 LDM usage Note 2 System Data 1 Index 514 NDM usage Note 2 Note 1 When using ASYDL or ASYDN to program an FCCS feature the basic programming of ASYD is required in addition to ASYDL or ASYDN Note 2 This data is required for ...

Page 680: ...ation number receive dial tone 5 Dial the access code or press the feature key for setting the desired forwarding feature receive special dial tone 6 Dial the target station number A maximum of 12 digits receive service set tone To cancel Remote Call Forwarding Control from the forwarding station 1 Lift the handset receive dial tone 2 Dial the cancel code or press the feature key for canceling the...

Page 681: ...d 12 This feature can be activated via REMOTE ACCESS TO SYSTEM R 2 or AUTOMATED ATTENDANT A 82 Programming STEP 1 ASYD System Data 1 Index 79 Bit 2 Split Call Forwarding 0 1 Out In Service Assign data 1 STEP 2 ARTD Assign route class data of the trunk for SPLIT CALL FORWARDING CDN 68 SCF 1 STEP 3 ANPD Reserve number levels for each forwarding feature ID Number Entry and Remote Call Forwarding Cont...

Page 682: ...ACC Access Code Max 5 digits R M M Remote Call Forwarding Control STEP 6 ASFC Assign a Service Feature Class that allows the following SFIs to the stations that will activate Remote Call Forwarding Control SFI 7 Call Forwarding All Calls Split Call Forwarding All Calls SFI 8 Call Forwarding Busy Line Split Call Forwarding Busy Line SFI 9 Call Forwarding Don t Answer Split Call Forwarding Don t Ans...

Page 683: ...Reserve a number level for station access Assign an NND 1 and BLF is on STEP 3 ASPA For the desired station number assign SRV STN Station NND is not required Assign Connection Indexes CI of Normal N and Hooking H STEP 4 ASDT Assign the station number to a specific station within the system FCCS Programming This data setting describes only the additional or replacement commands used to activate FCC...

Page 684: ...on If the station has not gone back on hook or initiated dialing after 30 seconds of reorder tone the station will be placed in the LINE LOCKOUT L 3 mode 3 If a user attempts CALL FORWARDING ALL CALLS C 5 BUSY LINE C 2 DON T ANSWER C 3 etc SPECIAL DIAL TONE will be sent to that station after access code dialing Interactions 1 No other programming is required This tone is generated for all momentar...

Page 685: ...be allowed or denied on either a station or tenant wide basis 5 TOLL DENIAL TOLL DIVERSION T 6 and TOLL RESTRICTION 3 6 DIGIT T 7 may or may not be applied to SPEED CALLING SYSTEM as desired 6 LEAST COST ROUTING 3 6 DIGIT L 5 may be provided via SPEED CALLING SYSTEM access 7 If the station is restricted from dialing outside via programming the station can still access SPEED CALLING SYSTEM 8 A maxi...

Page 686: ... SPEED CALLING to Dterm key Assign FKY15 to the Dterm key STEP 7 ADSL Assign S SPD key Assign SN 1 Originating DT Connection and FKY 15 Speed Calling System This command is used for assigning a function to each soft key FCCS Programming This data setting describes only the additional or replacement commands used to activate FCCS services When used as an FCCS feature these commands replace the non ...

Page 687: ...E TOUCH Dterm S 26D key Service Conditions 1 SPEED CALLING SYSTEM S 3 codes programmed into system data are accessible to all stations with a CLASS OF SERVICE INDIVIDUAL C 15 permitting speed calling 2 Each abbreviated call code can store a maximum of 24 digits including access codes and pauses 3 The standard number of speed calling numbers stored in the NEAX2400 IPX is 1 000 4 Speed calling numbe...

Page 688: ...ign SPEED CALLING to Dterm key Assign FKY15 to the Dterm key STEP 7 ADSL Assign S SPD key Assign SN 1 Originating DT Connection and FKY 15 Speed Calling System This command is used for assigning a function to each soft key FCCS Programming This data setting describes only the additional or replacement commands used to activate FCCS services When used as an FCCS feature these commands replace the n...

Page 689: ...nect all parties involved in a THREE WAY CONFERENCE T 2 1 Press the DEST key 2 Press the CANCEL key twice Service Conditions 1 The ATTENDANT CONSOLE A 3 may alternate between the called and calling parties and THREE WAY CONFERENCE T 2 as desired 2 If SERIAL CALL S 15 is provided the call is automatically split when the ATTENDANT presses the loop key to answer a recall initiated by a user 3 The SPL...

Page 690: ...NEAX2400 IPX Feature Programming Manual NDA 24297 Issue 1 Page 647 Splitting S 4 Programming No programming is required ...

Page 691: ... Conditions THREE WAY CALLING T 2D may be established at any time by pressing the CONF key Interactions 1 SPLITTING is inherent to the system and is operated by using the TRANSFER key 2 The conference trunk is only required when a three way connection is desired Programming STEP 1 ASYD System Data 2 Index 1 bits 0 1 Consultation Hold allowed or denied 00 Denied 01 Originating and Terminating Calls...

Page 692: ...utomatically answers 2 The conference leader makes a Switch Hook Flash SHF 3 The conference leader dials the telephone number of conferee receive ringback tone 4 The conferee answers 5 The conference leader hangs up the conferee is connected to the conference circuit port 1 6 The conference leader sequentially calls all desired parties up to 7 parties and connects them to the other conference circ...

Page 693: ...n numbers will reside in level 3 Example data assignments PA CFTB located in PIM 1 Group 03 STEP 4 ASHP Assign to a STATION HUNTING TERMINAL S 9 group the pilot and stations of the PA CFTB located on levels 1 7 For example TN 1 STN 3201 CNT 7 STN 3202 3203 3204 3205 3206 3207 In this example Ext 3201 is the Pilot number of the Conference Bridge Do not assign the Conference Leader to this group Bef...

Page 694: ...grammed upon encountering a busy station until reaching the last 6 Calls directed to any other number in the Circular Hunt Group will proceed in the same manner as calls to the first programmed number 7 If a HUNT group station has set CALL FORWARDING ALL CALLS C 5 hunting will bypass that station and continue in the order of hunting 8 The maximum number of stations per group is 100 9 Within the FC...

Page 695: ...ws a Incoming trunk call including C O ISDN line is not available b When CALL FORWARDING DON T ANSWER or CALL FORWARDING BUSY LINE is set to a station within Circular Hunt Group a call to the pilot station is forwarded according to their service condition c Assign ASYD System Data 1 Index 439 bit 7 1 and allow SFI 181 of a station which denies hunting function 19 A telephone number is allowable fo...

Page 696: ...5 When a Physical Station Number and telephone number assigned to a Circular Hunt station are identical priority is attached to STATION HUNTING CIRCULAR via FCCS 26 When using this feature within an FCCS network when CALL FORWARDING ALL CALLS C 5 has been set to a Circular Hunt station a call directed to the station is forwarded to the designated station 27 When using this feature within an FCCS n...

Page 697: ... in total 60 000 or less The assigned Phantom Telephone Number may or may not be the pilot number by the APHNN command setting see details in Interactions 33 When using a Phantom Telephone Number for a Circular Hunt station via the FCCS consider the following a Whether to use the Phantom Telephone Number to start the station hunt or not can be selected by system data b When the Phantom Telephone N...

Page 698: ...Circular Group will bypass Station A c A call forwarding override call from Station B to Station A will hunt if Station A is busy 4 CALL FORWARDING BUSY LINE DON T ANSWER C 2 3 If Station A is in a Station Hunting Circular Group and activates CALL FORWARDING BUSY LINE DON T ANSWER to Station B a Any call to Station A will respond to CALL FORWARDING DON T ANSWER C 3 b A direct call to Station A wil...

Page 699: ...ng the PHTELN assign 1 in the PH parameter If not assign 0 When the Phantom Telephone Number is assigned to be used when PH 1 Station hunt starts by dialing either the Circular Hunt station number telephone number or its Phantom Telephone Number Both numbers can be the pilot number When the Phantom Telephone Number is assigned not to be used when PH 0 Station hunt starts by dialing the Circular Hu...

Page 700: ...tation If necessary STEP 2 ASYD Assign System Data 1 Index 69 b5 Resultant hunt when the forwarded party is also busy after CALL FORWARDING Busy Line C 2 0 Hunt in the forwarding party group 1 Hunt in the forwarded party group STEP 3 APHNL Assign Phantom Telephone Number PHTELN to each Circular Hunt Group UGN User Group Number TELN Telephone Number of the Circular Hunt station PH Phantom Number mo...

Page 701: ...ephone Number STEP 3 APHNN Assign Phantom Telephone Number PHTELN to each Circular Hunt Station UGN User Group Number TELN Telephone Number of the Circular Hunt Group PH Phantom Number mode 0 Used individually 1 Used as the pilot number for station hunting PHTELN Phantom Telephone Number Note 2 Note 1 When using ASYDL or ASYDN to program an FCCS feature the basic programming of ASYD is required in...

Page 702: ...AITING ORIGINATING C 31 CALL WAITING TERMINATING C 12 9 This feature can be set on a node basis even in the use of telephone number In other words a Secretarial position can be assigned to a group for STATION HUNTING TERMINAL S 9 or STATION HUNTING CIRCULAR S 7 that is available on the Local Data Memory LDM If this is the case the conditions are as follows a A Secretarial Station for this feature ...

Page 703: ...ting for FCCS service varies depending on the node Note STEP 1 ASYDN These data must be assigned to the NCN System Data 1 Index 69 b5 Hunting Group when transferred party is busy Station Hunting after Call Forwarding Busy Line 0 Hunt in Transferring Party s Group 1 Hunt in Transferred Party s Group STEP 2 ASHPN These data must be assigned to the NCN Assign the Hunt Group using Telephone Number UGN...

Page 704: ...NTING S 7 S 8 S 9 CALL WAITING ORIGINATING C 31 CALL WAITING TERMINATING C 12 7 Only calls to the pilot number will cause the hunting sequence to operate Calls to busy stations other than the pilot number will receive a busy tone 8 If a phantom number is assigned to the pilot number hunting may or may not occur by the system data setting when the phantom number is dialed 9 Recall from CALL BACK C ...

Page 705: ...g see Interactions 12 An ISDN terminal cannot hunt 13 A station within a Circular Hunt Group may deny hunting function for an incoming call originated from a station including PS and ATT Service Condition are as follows a Incoming trunk call including C O ISDN line is not available b When CALL FORWARDING DON T ANSWER or CALL FORWARDING BUSY LINE is set to a station within Circular Hunt Group a cal...

Page 706: ...ssigned to a pilot station are identical priority is attached to STATION HUNTING TERMINAL via FCCS 23 The incoming call terminated through FCCS link to the Station Hunt group which is programmed by the Physical Station Number is not hunted 24 When CALL FORWARDING ALL CALLS C 5 has been set to the pilot station a call directed to the pilot station is forwarded to the designated station 25 When acti...

Page 707: ...m telephone number assigned to the telephone number for a pilot station can also be a pilot number via the APHNL command setting See details in Interactions 28 When activating this feature via the FCCS network when CALL FORWARDING BUSY LINE C 2 has been set to the pilot station the service priority CALL FORWARDING BUSY LINE or Station Hunting can be determined by the ASFC command 29 When activatin...

Page 708: ...tion A is in a STATION HUNTING TERMINAL group and not the Pilot station it will activate CALL FORWARDING BUSY LINE DON T ANSWER to Station B a Any call to Station A will respond to CALL FORWARDING DON T ANSWER C 3 b A direct call to Station A will respond to CALL FORWARDING BUSY LINE C 2 c A call to the STATION HUNTING TERMINAL group will bypass Station A if that station is both busy and has set C...

Page 709: ...ATING C 12 features 8 When using a Phantom Telephone Number PHTELN for the pilot station consider the following Whether to use the PHTELN to start the station hunt or not can be selected by the command APHNL When using the PHTELN assign 1 in the PH parameter If not assign 0 When PH 1 Station hunt starts by dialing either the pilot station number telephone number or its Phantom Telephone Number Bot...

Page 710: ...rmation refer to Programming c When activating this feature via FCCS if the following occurs a non pilot station is skipped in the hunting circulation process When CALL FORWARDING ALL CALLS C 5 is set at the non pilot station When CALL FORWARDING BUSY LINE C 2 is set at the non pilot station and the station is actually in the busy state d When activating this feature via FCCS CALL FORWARDING DON T...

Page 711: ...ogramming This data setting describes only the additional or replacement commands used to activate FCCS services When used as an FCCS feature these commands replace the non network commands for example AAED is replaced by AAEDN Note that the data setting for FCCS service varies depending on the node Note 1 STEP 1 ASYDN This data must be assigned to the NCN System Data 1 Index 69 b5 Hunting Group w...

Page 712: ...ming Manual NDA 24297 Issue 1 Page 669 Station Hunting Terminal S 9 FCCS Programming cont d Note 2 Multi PHTELNs maximum of 16 can be assigned per TELN Select whether to use each PHTELN for station hunt or not by the PH parameter ...

Page 713: ...rty FPC of the node providing the route for the call Logical Route Number FPC of the node providing the first choice route First choice Logical Route Number Operating Procedure No manual operation is required Call record outputs are produced automatically Service Conditions RS232C Interface Conditions 1 SMDR information facilitates analysis of trunk traffic and can be readily applied for cost allo...

Page 714: ...COST ROUTING 3 6 DIGIT L 5 The calling party can dial an ACCOUNT CODE A 18 before the LCR access code The called number is recorded as modified for sending 20 If an ACCOUNT CODE A 18 is dialed the maximum digits of the called number is 22 21 CENTRALIZED ATTENDANT SERVICE CAS C 20 The SMDR record is provided for calls extended outward by a CAS Attendant 22 DIRECT INWARD DIALING DID trunk calls D 8 ...

Page 715: ...sed for Call End Time calculation The calculation method is as follows a Call Start Time by using the clock and the current counter value are registered to the Call Base Table soon after a line connection is established b Upon the call completion the deduction between the counter value shown in a and that renewed during the call exchange is calculated c The deduction is transformed to a time hour ...

Page 716: ... 42 Since Release 5 software when the user performs system changeover using MBR key CMOD command or etc system massages 26 V 26 W are displayed However there are no defective conditions 43 The figures on the following pages show the Service Conditions of Polling Method focusing on when CCIS links are involved Example 1 Node A Fusion Center Node Collects the billing information of Nodes B and C via...

Page 717: ...illing information via CCIS ignoring polling from Node A Node C deletes the Point Code CCIS of Node A for centralized billing data when required to send billing information for polling from Node A Node B FCCS Center Node CCIS Center Node IPX SMDR Equipment Node A Node B FCCS Network Polling 01010 10001 01010 19010 Billing information of Node B IPX Node B FCCS Polling IPX DPC0 Node A Node C ignores...

Page 718: ...g information of Node A Node B and Node C ignores Node C FCCS Center Node IPX SMDR Equipment FCCS Network IPX 08932 13544 30565 95454 Polling Billing inform ation of Node B Node A FCCS non IPX CCIS Node C CCIS Fusion Call Control Signal FCCS Common Channel Inter Office Signaling CCIS DPC0 Node C SMDR Equipment CCIS Center Node Node B Node C CCIS Center Node non IPX SMDR Equipment FCCS Network IPX ...

Page 719: ... polling from Node A Node B deletes the Point Code CCIS for Node D when Node B wants to send billing information for polling from Node A CCIS Center Node non IPX SMDR Equipment FCCS Network IPX Billing information of Node B Node D CCIS Fusion Call Control Signal FCCS Common Channel Inter Office Signaling CCIS FCCS Center Node 36456 26546 55214 75213 Polling FCCS FCCS FCCS SMDR Equipment DPC0 Node ...

Page 720: ... relocating a SMDR equipment to other node reassign the billing information related data The relocation conditions are shown below 1 Make sure there is no billing information in the each node from Center Node before changing the SMDR location Ex Make sure billing information is output to the SMDR by sending test signal 2 An exact billing information may not be output to SMDR while changing SMDR lo...

Page 721: ...P C 7 30 7 CALL FORWARDING INTERCEPT C 25 An incoming trunk call responds to Call Forwarding Intercept to the Attendant Console SMDR records the call as if it is a direct call to the Attendant Console 8 NIGHT CONNECTION FIXED FLEXIBLE N 1 2 Calls terminated to these stations are recorded on SMDR 9 OUTGOING TRUNK QUEUING O 2 SMDR records the outgoing call when the system recalls the user and the di...

Page 722: ...il call information should have been designated by indexes 117 123 Assigned by the AIOC command Also for detecting a fault of the SMDR set the SMDR fault detect timer Index 288 Charging information port of SMDR A Bit 4 IOC Equipment Number 0 1 No 0 No 1 Bit 5 Expanded SMDR Output 0 1 Out In Service Index 289 SMDR fault detect timer of SMDR A Index 290 Charging information port of SMDR B Bit 4 IOC ...

Page 723: ...580 to SMDR C and 581 to SMDR D The pattern to be adopted will be Bit 0 0 ICS text format Bit 0 1 IMX format System Data 1 Index 582 Bit 0 3 Assign the number of nodes to be polled at once 0000 1 0001 1 0010 2 0011 3 0100 4 0101 5 0110 6 0111 7 1000 8 1111 8 Note 2 Note 1 This data is valid when the data is assigned at SYS1 Index 512 Note 2 For the numbers more than 8 assign the data value as 8 Sy...

Page 724: ...2 51 50 49 48 615 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 616 71 70 69 68 67 66 65 64 617 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 618 87 86 85 84 83 82 81 80 619 95 94 93 92 91 90 89 88 620 103 102 101 100 99 98 97 96 621 111 110 109 108 107 106 105 104 622 119 118 117 116 115 114 113 112 623 127 126 125 124 123 122 121 120 624 135 134 133 132 131 130 129 128 625 143 142 141 140 139 138 137 136 626 151 150 149 148 147 146 145 14...

Page 725: ...AIOC Assign the function and attribute data of the IOC ports This data is not necessary when using LAN interface STEP 6 ARTD CDN 10 SMDR Enable outgoing routes to be included for SMDR registration CDN 16 SMDR2 Determination on a per route basis of what type of connection will be registered by SMDR Also remember to flag the LCR S flag route For outgoing only routes assign data 0 For incoming routes...

Page 726: ...ode List the Toll Number ID Data code for the system to distinguish the Toll Dialing patterns for SMDR registration The dialing code listings are identical for LCR S Refer to the AMND descriptions for LCR 3 6 DIGIT L 5 and TOLL RESTRICTION 3 6 DIGIT T 7 FCCS Programming This data setting describes only the additional or replacement commands used to activate FCCS services When used as an FCCS featu...

Page 727: ...lephone number is 16 6 The same telephone numbers cannot be duplicated in different TENANT T 12 groups 7 Calling Party Release Called Party Release Both Party Release First Party Release can be selected on a system basis 8 The following features if activated may result in the calling user to be connected to a station other than the dialed station CALL FORWARDING ALL CALLS BUSY DON T ANSWER C 5 2 3...

Page 728: ...enant 1 Allows CALL FORWARDING ALL CALLS DON T ANSWER and BUSY LINE on an Intra and Inter tenant basis Allow this feature within self tenant 2 Allows or restricts incoming calls via the Night Attendant Console from tenant to tenant This allows the tenant as assigned to a trunk to be terminated to a tenant as assigned to a station 3 Allows the CALL FORWARDING ALL CALLS DON T ANSWER and BUSY LINE on...

Page 729: ...LING OPERATOR ASSISTANCE between TENANTs T 2 will not be restricted unless such a restriction is programmed in system data 5 The Fusion Point Code of the node which accommodates the called Attendant Console must be assigned after system data assignment Interactions 1 The ATNR command is required for all station to station calling 2 The normal 5 dB PAD loss inserted for station to station calling m...

Page 730: ... 24297 Issue 1 Page 687 Station to Station Calling Operator Assistance S 12 Programming cont d TRI Tenant Restriction Index 0 15 RES Restriction Data 0 Restricted 1 Allowed FCCS Programming No unique programming is required for the FCCS network ...

Page 731: ...ational for trunk incoming calls to PBX stations Note STM 2 and STS 6 should be assigned as 1 by ASTD command to restrict Step Call on DID 8 A STEP CALL to a station in LINE LOCKOUT L 3 or maintenance busy state will result in a reorder tone Interactions 1 A STEP CALL can search through an entire group to find an idle station 2 CALL FORWARDING C 2 3 5 STEP CALL will respond according to the number...

Page 732: ... since Station B is busy c Station A dials 1 using STEP CALL d The PBX recognizes that 301 is dialed Programming STEP 1 ASYD System Data 1 Index 59 Bit 2 DID Busy Condition 0 1 No Tone Busy Tone Assign 1 STEP 2 ASTD STM 2 STS 6 ST 1 to restrict DID step call FCCS Programming No unique programming is required for the FCCS network ...

Page 733: ...T CONTROLLED CONFERENCE A 2 6 STATION MESSAGE DETAIL RECORDING SMDR S 10 The duration of the total call is recorded on the last station call 7 When the ATTENDANT LOCKOUT A 5 feature is provided the Attendant cannot reenter the connection without being recalled 8 This feature is not applicable for tandem connections 9 In the Loop Release system once this service is set the attendant position enters...

Page 734: ...ON A 1 ATTENDANT OVERRIDE A 7 BUSY VERIFICATION B 3 BOSS SECRETARY OVERRIDE Dterm B 6D CALL HOLD C 6 6D CALL WAITING ORIGINATING C 31 CALL WAITING TERMINATING C 12 EXECUTIVE RIGHT OF WAY E 1 1D 23 When CALL WAITING TERMINATING C 12 CALL WAITING ORIGINATING C 31 Attendant Camp On or Attendant Camp On CCIS is set to the station already engaged in a SERIAL CALL the following conditions occur a If the...

Page 735: ...ce When data 1 is assigned CCSA calls will not ring the ATT In this case change ARTD CDN 6 TCL from CCSA to DDD Line TIE Line etc System Data 2 Index 7 Bit 2 Is SERIAL CALL to be enabled on a per tenant basis 0 1 No Yes System Data 1 Index 43 Bit 4 Is Attendant able to reenter loop of serial call 0 1 No Yes FCCS Programming No unique programming is required for the FCCS network ...

Page 736: ...features in a system 2 The corresponding feature cancel code does not have to be a single digit 3 TRUNK ANSWER ANY STATION T 8 SPEED CALLING SYSTEM S 3 and DIAL ACCESS TO THE ATTENDANT D 2 are three applications for SINGLE DIGIT FEATURE CODE 4 The digit or can be used as the first digit of a trunk access code and can be used as a feature access code Programming STEP 1 ANPD Reserve a number level f...

Page 737: ...STATION codes are programmed into RAM memory per Local Processor 2 Each abbreviated call code can store a maximum of 24 digits including access codes and pauses A maximum of 18 digits can be stored including access codes and pauses 3 A maximum of 100 stations per Module Group can be equipped with SPEED CALLING STATION 4 100 memory blocks per Module Group are assigned for speed calling A maximum of...

Page 738: ...r until service set tone is returned 4 Only those stations assigned as Secondary stations are considered to be members of the SPEED CALLING GROUP 5 Stations of a SPEED CALLING GROUP INDIVIDUAL must be in the same Module Group MG Error 0238 MG number of MY Line Primary station mismatch is displayed 6 SPEED CALLING INDIVIDUAL requires the assignment of senders route 905 See UNIVERSAL SENDER U 3 7 OU...

Page 739: ...e additional or replacement commands used to activate FCCS services When used as an FCCS feature these commands replace the non network commands for example AAED is replaced by AAEDN Note that the data setting for FCCS service varies depending on the node Note STEP 1 ANPDL Reserve a number level for feature access Assign Connection Indexes CI N H B Normal N Hooking H and Busy B applicable to any f...

Page 740: ... per memory block can be assigned This allows for a total of 1 000 numbers per Module Group 2 A Primary station will be assigned memory blocks and associate stations in that group are assigned as Secondary stations The Primary station will have the capability to program 10 memory blocks commonly used as Speed Calling numbers for that group therefore a group can consist of 100 Speed Calling numbers...

Page 741: ...lowed access to the SPEED CALLING ASSIGN access code 4 Only those stations assigned as Secondary stations are considered to be members of the SPEED CALLING GROUP 5 Stations of a SPEED CALLING GROUP must be in the same Module Group MG 6 SPEED CALLING GROUP requires the assignment of senders route 905 See UNIVERSAL SENDER U 3 7 OUTGOING TRUNK QUEUING O 2 This feature may be used with SPEED CALLING G...

Page 742: ...tional or replacement commands used to activate FCCS services When used as an FCCS feature these commands replace the non network commands for example AAED is replaced by AAEDN Note that the data setting for FCCS service varies depending on the node Note STEP 1 ANPDL Reserve a number level for feature access Assign Connection Indexes CI N H B Normal N Hooking H and Busy B applicable to any feature...

Page 743: ... 4 A Dterm user may save the number of an incoming call if the call originates at a station in the system A call from an outside trunk cannot be saved 5 If necessary dialing can be added after a repeat operation 6 To monitor the saved digits press the S R key while idle The saved digits will be displayed on the LCD 7 If the LED associated with S R goes out the memory is erased The S R key must be ...

Page 744: ... of Dterm 0 1 RING 0 No Ringing 1 Ringing All Lines 2 Ringing on Prime Line Only 3 Flexible Ring Assignment enables RG parameter KYN Key Number 1 40 KYI Service Index 0 Key Not Used 1 Feature Key 2 Multi line key KD Not assigned for Feature Key FKY Feature Key Number FKY 7 SAVE REPEAT STEP 2 ADSL Assign SN 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 and FKY 7 Save and Repeat This command is used for assigning a function to eac...

Page 745: ...or a lighter image 3 The LCD will display one of the features being used TRANSFER CALL TRANSFER C 11 PICKUP CALL PICKUP C 7 CALL FORWARDING ALL CALL FORWARDING ALL CALLS C 5 CALL FORWARDING BUSY CALL FORWARDING BUSY LINE C 2 CALL FORWARDING NANS CALL FORWARDING DON T ANSWER C 3 HUNTING STATION HUNTING S 7 8 9 UCD UNIFORM CALL DISTRIBUTION U 1 4 For a transferred call the LCD displays Note When the...

Page 746: ...ONE TOUCH keys can be programmed to any key number KYN in consecutive order when using the appropriate firmware Note 32 keys are available for the Dterm with a PAGE key FKY 55 2 A stored number may have up to 32 digits including access codes and pauses 3 Only the first 16 digits are displayed on the LCD 4 SPEED CALLING ONE TOUCH numbers may only be stored while the Dterm is idle 5 Storing a SPEED ...

Page 747: ...ime Once a number is entered it will be displayed on the upper portion of the LCD display 4 The same SPEED CALLING ONE TOUCH buttons are used for Page 0 and Page 1 numbers The PAGE CHANGE OVER key determines which page is selected 5 There is no deletion of SPEED CALLING ONE TOUCH numbers Previously assigned numbers can only be overwritten 6 SPEED CALLING ONE TOUCH may be used to store FORCED ACCOU...

Page 748: ...lowed 7 CALL PICKUP GROUP C 7 count Number of times the CALL PICKUP GROUP code is dialed by stations for which the feature is allowed 8 CALL PICKUP DIRECT C 30 count Number of times the CALL PICKUP DIRECT code is dialed by stations for which the feature is allowed 9 CALL FORWARDING ALL CALLS C 5 entry count Number of times a destination number is entered for CALL FORWARDING ALL CALLS by stations f...

Page 749: ... times ON HOOK QUEUING is cancelled by dialing the cancel code 22 CONSULTATION HOLD ALL CALLS C 17 count Number of times CONSULTATION HOLD is executed 23 CALL TRANSFER ALL CALLS C 11 count Number of times a call is transferred to another extension before the called party answers without Attendant involvement A call originated internally or from the outside will be registered in the count 24 THREE ...

Page 750: ...ata 1 DTF1 TYPE Type of Traffic Measurement 1 Terminal Traffic 2 Route Traffic 3 Station Peg Count 4 ATT Peg Count 5 Route Peg Count Display of Traffic Data 2 DTF2 TYPE Type of Traffic Measurement 6 Service Peg Count 7 Terminal Peg Count Display of Traffic Data 3 DTF3 TYPE Type of Traffic Measurement 8 UCD Route Peg Count 9 UCD Group Peg Count 10 UCD Station Peg Count Display of Traffic Data 4 DTF...

Page 751: ... assigned to a data port TEC 12 call origination from that line appearance can be made if the card is mounted in that slot 2 A mix of data ports and sub lines can be assigned on a Dterm package 3 All sub lines of Dterm s must be located in the same Local Processor as the MY Line of that Dterm 4 A SOFTWARE LINE APPEARANCE cannot be assigned as a Hotline Station but can be assigned as a BROKERAGE HO...

Page 752: ...ey TN 1 STN Station Number TP Type of Dterm 0 1 RING Assign ringing to the entire phone 0 No Ringing 1 Ringing All Lines 2 Ringing on Prime Line Only 3 Flexible Ring Assignment enables RG parameter PL TN STN Prime Line Tenant and Station Number KYN Key Number 1 40 KYI Service Index 0 Key Not Used 1 Feature Key 2 Multi line Key KD Not assigned for Feature Key TN STN Tenant Number and Station Number...

Page 753: ... 3 If the station is allowed this call the call is completed if not the station will hear a reorder tone Service Conditions 1 This feature cannot be used on an outgoing call which uses OUTGOING TRUNK QUEUING O 2 2 This service can be used in combination with CONSECUTIVE SPEED CALLING SYSTEM C 62 3 This feature cannot be used in MFC signaling 4 This feature cannot be used if the calling station is ...

Page 754: ...digit 3digits NND 4 STEP 4 ASFC Assign a Service Feature Class that allows SFI 12 to stations that will have SPEED CALLING SYSTEM S 3 STEP 5 ASPD Assign the Tenant Number the ADC and the CD Telephone Number to be sent Include the access code of the route in the CD STEP 6 AABD Assign the Tenant TN and the Abbreviated Speed Calling Code ADC as assigned in the ASPD command Assign the Service Feature ...

Page 755: ...trol feature Service Conditions 1 STATION 5db PAD S 62 is inserted only for intra office two way station to station connections 2 STATION 5db PAD is inserted into the called party of the station 3 STATION 5db PAD both stations is not inserted by the Class of Service feature class and or telephone class when a station is talking to an Off Premises Station OPX Programming ASYD System Data 1 Index 4 ...

Page 756: ...ed to cancel SERIAL CALL LOOP RELEASE before recall 5 The Attendant loop will be maintained until the station is answered even if the SC key is pressed In this case the following features are not available CALL PICK UP C 7 30 CALL FORWARDING DON T ANSWER C 3 6 SERIAL CALL S 15 recalling indication continues even if the system status is changed from Day Mode to Night Mode 7 When this service is ava...

Page 757: ...NEAX2400 IPX Feature Programming Manual Page 714 NDA 24297 Issue 1 S 64 Serial Call Loop Release FCCS Programming No unique programming is required for the FCCS network ...

Page 758: ...ARTD CDN 68 SCF of the trunk involved To set SPLIT CALL FORWARDING using an access code To set Call Forwarding from an individual station Single line Telephone 1 Setting Call Forwarding for an incoming call from a station a Lift the handset receive dial tone b Dial the access code for FORWARD FORWARD BY or FORWARD DA for an incoming call from a station receive special dial tone c Dial the number o...

Page 759: ...NSOLE the Dterm displays When the destination is an outside trunk The Dterm displays The FORWARD FORWARD BY or FORWARD DA lamp turns on e Replace the handset or press the SPEAKER key PAGE feature key is a paging button for SPEED DIALING One Touch Dterm S 26D FKY 55 2 To set Call Forwarding for an incoming call from an outside party a Confirm that the PAGE One Touch Changeover lamp is off if the la...

Page 760: ... call from an outside party a Confirm that the PAGE lamp is off if the lamp is on turn the lamp off by pressing the PAGE key b Lift the handset or press the SPEAKER key receive dial tone c Press the FORWARD FORWARD BY or FORWARD DA key receive service set tone The LCD displays Also the FORWARD FORWARD BY or FORWARD DA lamp turns off d Replace the handset or press the SPEAKER key To monitor the ass...

Page 761: ...Console 1 Setting Call Forwarding for an incoming call from a station a Press an idle Loop key and dial the FORWARD FORWARD BY or FORWARD DA access code for an incoming call from a station receive special dial tone b Dial the Tenant Number 2 digits of the originating station the originating telephone number and the desired target telephone number receive service set tone c Press the RELEASE key 2 ...

Page 762: ...According to ARTD command CDN 68 SCF data 3 When an incoming call from a trunk is handled via the Attendant station the destination of Call Forwarding is selected according to the route data of the incoming trunk as assigned by ARTD command CDN 68 SCF 4 This service is invalid on Call Forwarding by the system Call Forwarding by the ACFO command 5 Multiple Call Forwarding is available for those sta...

Page 763: ...arding STEP 3 ASPA Assign the access code for Split Call Forwarding All Calls CI N SRV SSC Service Code SID 8 Call Forwarding All Calls for C O TIE Entry CI N SRV SSC Service Code SID 9 Call Forwarding All Calls for C O TIE Cancel CI N SRV SSC Service Code SID 10 Call Forwarding Busy Line for C O TIE Entry CI N SRV SSC Service Code SID 11 Call Forwarding Busy Line for C O TIE Cancel CI N SRV SSC S...

Page 764: ...Call Forwarding Don t Answer for an incoming call from an outside party CDN 68 SCF 1 STEP 8 ACFS This feature can be set by this command FCCS Programming This data setting describes only the additional or replacement commands used to activate FCCS services When used as an FCCS feature these commands replace the non network commands for example AAED is replaced by AAEDN Note that the data setting f...

Page 765: ...one Slumber Time Group 7 A Night Transfer Station cannot be assigned to a Slumber Time Group 8 During Slumber Time incoming calls station DID DIT are routed to an Attendant Console or announcement machine When an Attendant Console is designated as the transfer destination the transfer call is terminated to the ICPT key on the Attendant Console When an announcement machine is designated as the tran...

Page 766: ...nnouncement machine Note STEP 3 MBTK Cancel the make busy of the announcement trunk assigned by ATRK Note STEP 4 AAED Assign the data of the announcement machine as shown below Note EQP 36 Announcement machine for Slumber Time Group 1 37 Announcement machine for Slumber Time Group 2 38 Announcement machine for Slumber Time Group 3 39 Announcement machine for Slumber Time Group 4 40 Announcement ma...

Page 767: ...h performs Slumber Time Override SFI 107 RES 1 STEP 7 ARTD Assign the following route class data to the route number of the trunk which performs Slumber Time Override CDN 109 SLOV 1 FCCS Programming This data setting describes only the additional or replacement commands used to activate FCCS services When used as an FCCS feature these commands replace the non network commands for example AAED is r...

Page 768: ...re it is not available to activate this service for each incoming route 2 SERIAL CALL can be set only for the incoming central office line tie line and ISDN line It cannot be set for the station or the outgoing trunk 3 The station that can set cancel SERIAL CALL is the Dterm with the SERIAL CALL key In case of the incoming call from a ringdown trunk the call has to be transferred from the Attendan...

Page 769: ...the Dterm setting SERIAL CALL is free the destination is the set line and only the Dterm is called If the set line is accommodated in the other Dterm multi line the other Dterm becomes busy status lights in red and CALL FORWARDING ALL CALLS C 5 and FORWARDING DON T ANSWER C 3 is not available When the set line is the my line of the Dterm the LCD displays RECALL Ordinary transaction for recall to t...

Page 770: ...able 25 When the call is extended to a trunk the call is charged to the incoming trunk the caller Programming STEP 1 ASYD System data 1 index 007 bit 5 0 1 when dialing a vacant level unused number timeout recall or restricted connection the caller will be 0 able to redial 1 disconnected System data 1 index 435 bit 0 0 1 Serial Call in service No Yes System data 1 index 435 bit 1 0 1 after pre pau...

Page 771: ... output information maximum 240 bytes combined as they like Information exceeding 240 bytes is not output from its head When current information ANI information A new information D F P Output information No output information 3 Multi output and dual output are available If dual output is assigned it is possible that the formats are different at each port depending on system data e g expanded outpu...

Page 772: ...tween a main office and a remote office when remote charging is established 7 This service is not supported in offices performing remote charging Programming Also see TRUNK LINE APPEARANCE T 23 for information on how to accommodate C O line on a Dterm line feature key STEP 1 ASYD System Data 1 Index 241 Bit 6 0 1 When the length of Caller ID exceeds the limit only the former latter part of data ap...

Page 773: ...EP 3 ARTD Assign route class data for the C O trunk 15 LSG 3 50 DPLY 1 When Calling Number is output to SMDR 10 SMDR 1 STEP 4 ATRK Assign trunk data for the C O trunk STEP 5 MBTK Cancel the make busy of the C O trunk STEP 6 AKYD Assign Call Id Change Display key Assign Type Function Call ID Change Display 113 When Call Id Change Display key is pressed display pattern on the LCD assigned by ASYD co...

Page 774: ... 5 Expanded SMDR Output for SMDR A Apparatus 0 1 Out In Service System Data 1 Index 290 Bit 5 Expanded SMDR Output for SMDR B Apparatus 0 1 Out In Service System Data 1 Index 292 Bit 5 Expanded SMDR Output for SMDR C Apparatus 0 1 Out In Service System Data 1 Index 294 Bit 5 Expanded SMDR Output for SMDR D Apparatus 0 1 Out In Service System Data 1 Index 296 Bit 0 Output of Calling Number ANI Info...

Page 775: ...mming Manual Page 732 NDA 24297 Issue 1 S 129 SMDR Output Expansion ANI CPN FCCS Programming cont d Note When using ASYDL or ASYDN to program an FCCS feature the basic programming of ASYD is required in addition to ASYDL or ASYDN ...

Page 776: ...he desired transmitting and receiving levels can be maintained providing the overall Tandem system with transparency 3 When TIE trunks are busy the calling station will receive busy tone 4 Each incoming TIE trunk may have various restrictions for TIE to Central Office calling 5 Careful consideration should be given to access code numbering plans to avoid unnecessary loss of access codes and code d...

Page 777: ... the route number associated with this access code STEP 6 ARRC Assign to the system trunk to trunk connection Use Alternative Route Index ARI D RES for Direct Connection Three possible Restrictions may be assigned data 0 Connection is Restricted data 1 Connection is Allowed or data 2 Toll Restriction is required For TANDEM SWITCHING OF TIE TRUNKS 2 4 WIRE TOLL RESTRICTION is not required STEP 7 AP...

Page 778: ...tive Route Index ARI D RES for Direct Connection Three possible Restrictions may be assigned data 0 Connection is Restricted data 1 Connection is Allowed or data 2 Toll Restriction is required For TANDEM SWITCHING OF TIE TRUNKS 2 4 WIRE TOLL RESTRICTION is not required STEP 5 APADN Assign any Pad data that may be required for desired quality of service Optional see TIE LINE CONNECTION WITH PAD CON...

Page 779: ...ning two parties will not be disconnected 2 This feature may be activated during any call 3 Any combination of parties internal or external may be included in a three way call 4 The maximum number of simultaneous three way calls depends on the quantity of digital conference trunks within the system One digital conference trunk circuit card can handle 8 simultaneous 3 way calls 5 The THREE WAY CALL...

Page 780: ...unk to trunk connections between any two routes that may be used in THREE WAY CALLING Assign these routes for ARI A RES This connection is for a station and two trunks ARI D RES If the originating party hangs up the remaining two parties will stay connected STEP 5 ARSC The route restriction class must be constructed to allow the station access to the involved routes STEP 6 ASFC When Consultation H...

Page 781: ... Multi Line group answers the held call 7 THREE WAY CALLING is established Service Conditions 1 The originating party may hang up at any time The other two parties will not be disconnected if assigned as such in system programming 2 This feature may be activated during any call that does not include the Attendant Console 3 Any combination of parties internal or external may be included in a three ...

Page 782: ...unk STEP 4 ARRC Allow for trunk to trunk connections between any two routes that may be used in THREE WAY CALLING Assign these routes for ARI A RES This connection is for a station and two trunks ARI D RES If the originating party hangs up the remaining two parties will stay connected STEP 5 ARSC The Route Restriction Class must be constructed so as to allow the station access to the involved rout...

Page 783: ...gramming Manual Page 740 NDA 24297 Issue 1 T 2D Three Way Calling Dterm FCCS Programming cont d Note When using ASYDL or ASYDN to program an FCCS feature the basic programming of ASYD is required in addition to ASYDL or ASYDN ...

Page 784: ...outgoing trunk group the following restriction options can be assigned per RSC a Indicates the TIE trunk is not allowed access to the trunk group dialed b Indicates the TIE trunk is allowed access unrestricted c Indicates the station is allowed access but is restricted from making 0 1 toll calls or is code 3 digit 6 digit restricted 8 Two outgoing trunk group restriction tables are provided per sy...

Page 785: ... be constructed to allow the station access to the involved routes FCCS Programming This data setting describes only the additional or replacement commands used to activate FCCS services When used as an FCCS feature these commands replace the non network commands for example AAED is replaced by AAEDN Note that the data setting for FCCS service varies depending on the node STEP 1 ARTDN Assign the T...

Page 786: ...4 8 12 16dB so the desired transmitting and receiving levels can be maintained providing the overall tandem system with transparency Interactions 1 If volume on the DTI is too loud assign CDN 30 Pad ARTD as data 2 2 The 8TLT card provides four 2 wire DID CCSA and TIE Line circuit access These circuits may be set for loop or E M signaling The card contains switchable transmission pads that are swit...

Page 787: ... the non network commands for example AAED is replaced by AAEDN Note that the data setting for FCCS service varies depending on the node STEP 1 ARTDN Assign the TIE Line routes as shown below BOTHWAY LINES RT 1 1 OSGS 2 2 ONSG 3 3 ISGS 2 4 INSG 3 5 TF 3 6 TCL 4 7 L T 1 8 RLP 2 15 LSG 5 Pad control is programmed in CDN 30 Pad For DTI circuit cards assign data 7 otherwise assign data 0 STEP 2 APADN ...

Page 788: ...k group basis The feature when provided is applicable on a per trunk group basis Interactions 1 TOLL DENIAL DIVERSION is applicable only to RES 2 when assigning routes via Route Restriction Index RRI 3 2 LEAST COST ROUTING 3 6 DIGIT L 5 For LCR S applications allow the LCR Flag Route The route chosen via AOPR will then be governed by the RSC of the station If the station is toll restricted from th...

Page 789: ... Connection is Restricted 1 Connection is Allowed 2 Connection is Toll Restricted See TOLL RESTRICTION 3 6 DIGIT T 7 STEP 3 ASDT When assigning the data to specific stations assign the proper RSC to each station FCCS Programming This data setting describes only the additional or replacement commands used to activate FCCS services When used as an FCCS feature these commands replace the non network ...

Page 790: ... 0 Connection is Restricted 1 Connection is Allowed 2 Connection is Toll Restricted See TOLL RESTRICTION 3 6 DIGIT T 7 STEP 3 ASDTN When assigning the data to specific stations assign the proper RSC to each station Note When using ASYDL or ASYDN to program an FCCS feature the basic programming of ASYD is required in addition to ASYDL or ASYDN ...

Page 791: ... an Area Code do not need to be restricted allow the Area Code only Always provide the system with the most economical configuration of digits when constructing TOLL RESTRICTION tables 2 In the ARRC command ARI A RES must be programmed to allow two trunks and a station in a conference ARI D RES is programmed if the two trunks are to remain connected after the station drops off or if TOLL RESTRICTI...

Page 792: ...nnection T Tandem Connection O Outgoing Connection ICRT Incoming Route Number Tandem Connection Only RSC Restriction Class 0 15 OGRT Outgoing Route Number DC Destination Area Code Maximum 11 digits TDI Restriction Data 0 Connection is Restricted 1 Connection is Allowed 2 3 6 Digit Toll Restriction Go to AARP 3 C O Operator Call 9 0 NND Number of Necessary Digits Used only when TDI 2 Note TDI 4 may...

Page 793: ...ES Restriction Data 0 Connection is Restricted 1 Connection is Allowed 2 Connection is Toll Restricted STEP 4 AMND This command indicates the total number of digits to expect based on the first digits dialed A 9 a local call will equal 8 digits 9 1 an Area Code call will equal 12 digits Assign the dialed digits information and the corresponding Maximum Necessary Digits MND data Flag this data as a...

Page 794: ...Codes 93 through 99 to allow all local office codes Notice that assignments for digit codes 90 and 91 which cover operator calls and all 1 Area Code calls are not assigned Digit Codes not assigned are automatically restricted AARP Command Not Required This command is only required when TDI 2 is assigned in ATDP Example 2 RSC 2 Assignment Allow local plus Area Codes 718 212 201 and 914 ATDP Command...

Page 795: ... Codes OGRT 1 RSC 3 FLAG 1 DC 465 RES 1 OGRT 1 RSC 3 FLAG 1 DC 798 RES 1 This allows office codes 239 465 and 798 within Area Code 914 All other office codes are automatically restricted Note This method of assignment allows office codes 239 465 and 798 to any Area Code that is assigned as TDI 2 in ATDP For example if the assignment for Area Code 718 was changed from TDI 1 allowed to TDI 2 then th...

Page 796: ... 93 through 99 to allow all local office codes TDM OG O Outgoing Connection DAY NIGHT D Day OGRT 1 RSC 4 DC 912 TDI 2 Go to AARP Command NND 3 DC 913 TDI 2 Go to AARP Command DC 914 TDI 2 Go to AARP Command Through DC 919 TDI 2 Go to AARP Command This tells the system to check AARP tables for all restrictions for Area Codes AARP Command OGRT 1 RSC 4 FLAG 1 DC 808 RES 0 OGRT 1 RSC 4 FLAG 1 DC 213 R...

Page 797: ...de trunk to trunk connection capabilities according to the requirements of the system The applicable trunk to trunk connections will be those provided by parameter ARI D RES Direct Connection for example REMOTE ACCESS TO THE SYSTEM R 2 and TANDEM SWITCHING OF TIE TRUNKS 2 4 WIRE T 1 ICRT Incoming Route Number OGRT Outgoing Route Number ARI A RES This allows restricts trunk to trunk and tandem conn...

Page 798: ... office codes To allow Area Codes 718 212 201 and 914 repeat the ATDP command for the following Digit Codes DC 91718 TDI 1 Allow DC 91212 TDI 1 Allow DC 91201 TDI 1 Allow DC 91914 TDI 1 Allow This allows these specific Area Codes All the Area Codes which are not assigned are automatically restricted FCCS Programming This data setting describes only the additional or replacement commands used to ac...

Page 799: ...e c WATS d CCSA 3 All consoles assigned to handle calls for a particular group of stations whether or not they belong to the same TENANT T 12 must have NIGHT CONNECTION N 1 2 set before this feature will be activated 4 The TAS indicator can be provided on a per tenant basis 5 The TAS indicator must be locally provided 6 This feature is sometimes referred to as Universal Night Answer UNA 7 Individu...

Page 800: ... to TAS when the system is in Night mode 10 CONSULTATION HOLD C 17 TAS cannot be accessed via CONSULTATION HOLD 11 TRUNK ANSWER ANY STATION will not default if other provisions are not made to answer incoming calls when the system is in Night mode See the ACFR command 12 The type of Attendant Console system used determines how the system will enter into the Night mode See System Data 2 Index 2 Bit...

Page 801: ...Service Feature Index of 5 TAS to the listed types of incoming calls to be answered by TAS The Call Class Indexes CCI will correspond to ARTD CDN 6 TCL Trunk Class parameter CCI 1 LDN 2 DDD2 3 DDD3 4 TIE LINE 5 DDD4 STEP 6 ATAS Assign the TAS circuit to the TN MG PIM and the circuit number 0 1 based on the circuit location TAS CKT Attendant Console CKT ...

Page 802: ...T CONSOLE A 3 number is the equivalent to the trunk number when assigning the Attendant Console Route 901 in ATRK 2 The ATRK command must be assigned before the ATGL command If ATRK is not assigned first ERROR 0245 ATTENDANT CONSOLE A 3 not assigned yet will be indicated Programming STEP 1 ASYD System Data 1 Index 9 Assign the number of ATTENDANT CONSOLE A 3 to be used in the system STEP 2 ATRK As...

Page 803: ...te data ATGLL command SYS1 Index 946 FPC of the LN where DLMX card is mounted for IPX U LP PBI No of the LMG where DLMX card is mounted for IPX UMG STEP 3 ATRK Assign the trunk data of DLMX RT 938 DLMX LENS Assign LV7 of odd number Group G STEP 4 ATGL ATGLL Assign the Attendant No TGBL No 1 10 and associated Route No Note that ATGL is used when ASYDL SYS1 Index 804 b1 0 and ATGLL when the same dat...

Page 804: ...ang up after completing a TRUNK TO TRUNK CONNECTION without affecting the connection of the two outside parties provided that a One trunk is incoming and the other is outgoing b Both trunks are ground start c Users wait a programmed time interval after dialing an outside line before hanging up 6 If the originating party encounters a no answer or busy signal when trying to conference a third party ...

Page 805: ...RI A RES ICRT Incoming Route Number OGRT Outgoing Route Number ARI A RES This allows restricts trunk to trunk tandem connection via the Attendant Console and stations ARI D RES This allows restricts trunk to trunk tandem connections via Direct Dial access from a station and trunks 0 Alternate routing is restricted 1 Alternate routing is allowed 0 Alternate routing is restricted 1 Alternate routing...

Page 806: ...ia Direct Dial access from a station and trunks 0 Alternate routing is restricted 1 Alternate routing is allowed 0 Alternate routing is restricted 1 Alternate routing is allowed 2 Toll Restricted When ARI D RES is needed for a direct dial TRUNK TO TRUNK CONNECTION refer to the application within this document for the programming steps Such applications include REMOTE ACCESS TO SYSTEM R 2 TANDEM SW...

Page 807: ...for service features for example CALL HOLD C 6 CALL BACK C 1 CALL PICKUP GROUP C 7 CALL FORWARDING ALL CALLS Dterm C 5D SPEED CALLING S 3 TAS T 8 etc 10 The NEAX2400 IPX can provide TENANT SERVICE T 12 to a maximum of 63 tenants 11 Tenant numbers should be allocated on a network basis for the FCCS network Interactions 1 To provide TENANT SERVICE features need not be separated Whenever possible kee...

Page 808: ...2 Bit 0 All of ASYD System Data 2 Bit 1 ASPA Bit 2 ANPD Bit 3 ALDN ASDT ASAT Must be assigned as data 1 Bit 4 ARSC Bit 5 ACFR Index 93 Bit 0 ASFC Bit 1 ACFO Bit 2 ATAS Bit 3 ASPD Bit 4 ASTP AFRS O G Connection Bit 5 ASTP AFRS I C Connection Bit 6 AMND Bit 7 AAED Index 94 Bit 0 ATNR Bit 2 APCR EPN Only STEP 2 ATNR Assign the appropriate tenant restrictions DAY NIGHT Day Night Mode D Day Mode N Nigh...

Page 809: ... only for a specific tenant 5 Day Night Mode Change Restriction is not used in North America 6 Not Used 7 Not Used STEP 3 ATRK Assign the Attendant Consoles to receive incoming trunks according to tenant The TN parameter will determine which specific tenants this Attendant Console will handle Example In a three tenant system the Attendant Console will handle tenants 1 and 3 Assign the following RT...

Page 810: ...is displayed 5 While NAME DISPLAY SYSTEM N 28 NAME DISPLAY SYSTEM CCIS N 37 or NAME DISPLAY WITHOUT OAI CCIS N 37 16 digit display is activated on the Dterm with 2 line LCD display the time is not displayed When both the calling called station are released from a station to station call the LCD of the calling called station returns to the TIME DISPLAY Interactions 1 Only the Dterm with display has...

Page 811: ...CALL FORWARDING ALL CALLS C 5 CALL FORWARDING BUSY LINE C 2 and CALL FORWARDING DON T ANSWER C 3 can be set at the Attendant Console for a TRUNK LINE APPEARANCE assigned to a Virtual Line Appearance or an unused data port 6 A TRUNK LINE APPEARANCE can receive incoming calls from internal stations DID DIT or TIE Line trunks 7 When a call is originated with the RECALL key and the trunk is busy the c...

Page 812: ...ment of RSC ARSC command SFC Service Feature Class 0 15 For assignment of SFC ASFC command STEP 2 ARTD Assign the route of the TRUNK LINE APPEARANCE as a ground start ring down trunk RT 1 1 OSGS 2 2 ONSG 3 3 ISGS 1 4 INSG 3 5 TF 1 3 6 TCL 1 7 L T 1 8 RLP 2 15 LSG 1 44 PRV 1 STEP 3 ATRK Assign the LENs Route Number Trunk Number and Tenant Number Assign one or more trunks to a specific route used to...

Page 813: ... hook b The third party cannot be cancelled by the following sequence Engaged in station to trunk call Three Way Connection Switch hook c This restriction does not apply to CONSULTATION HOLD ALL CALLS C 17 outgoing trunk hold Programming ASYD System Data 1 Index 156 Trunk Soft Hold Timer A used with second dial tone trunks Assign data 00H for 30 seconds Data 31H may be used for a value of two seco...

Page 814: ...its 4 7 Switch hook flash ends timer To calculate this value 1 FH x 120 msec Timer For both beginning and ending timers assign 91H for 120 1080 msec FCCS Programming No unique programming is required for the FCCS network Note System timers may be set on a network basis in ASYDN f t Bit 0 3 Bit 4 7 0 ms No Detection 120 ms 1080 ms Disconnection SHF Detect ...

Page 815: ...eminder call 4 Hang up Service Conditions 1 In the following cases the user attempting to set cancel this service receives reorder tone a when the SFI 41 of the service class is 0 b when CALL FORWARDING ALL CALLS C 5 is set 2 The wake up times are to be set at five minute intervals For example if the user dials 1004 the wake up time will be set at 10 00 a m 3 500 stations per local processor can b...

Page 816: ... N min N ranges 0 to F Hex STEP 2 ASFC Allow this feature to proper service feature classes SFI 41 0 1 Restricted Allowed STEP 3 ASPA Assign the following two access codes for this feature Timed Reminder SET SRV SSC Service Code SID 48 Timed Reminder CANCEL SRV SSC Service Code SID 49 STEP 4 ARTD Assign route data for announcement trunk s STEP 5 ATRK Assign trunk data for the announcement trunk s ...

Page 817: ... 4 Hear the service set tone 5 Press the switch hook button to reconnect the held party 6 Tone Block is cancelled Service Conditions 1 This service is available for the analog station or the Dterm with analog adapter 2 If the user stops to transfer a call in the middle of the operation this service is not cancelled 3 This service is cancelled when the station which has been set Tone Block is relea...

Page 818: ... 2 ASPA Assign the access code for Tone Block as shown below CI H SRV SSCA SIDA 48 Data Privacy on Demand Entry CI H SRV SSCA SIDA 49 Data Privacy on Demand Cancel CI N SRV SSCA SIDA 48 Data Privacy on Demand Entry STEP 3 ASYD Assign the system data SYS1 Index 322 b6 0 SPDT is sent after dialing the access code for this service 1 DT is sent after dialing the access code for this service FCCS Progr...

Page 819: ...s are assigned through the MAINTENANCE ADMINISTRATION TERMINAL MAT M 18 4 Stations are arranged in a circular type hunt group A call to the group starts at the first idle station after the last station that received a call 5 If all of the group s stations are busy the call waits in a queue The caller hears ringback tone The first call in the queue will be answered 6 CALL WAITING LAMP UCD C 76 will...

Page 820: ...ed station s line when it is busy The group user can be connected to the waiting call by hanging up The station rings and the call is connected when the caller goes off hook These calls have priority over UCD calls in the queue 17 CALL BACK C 1 can be activated by an individual UCD group user towards another station Also another user can activate this feature towards an individual UCD station CALL...

Page 821: ... which has been set CALL FORWARDING ALL CALLS C 5 or CALL FORWARDING BUSY LINE C 2 whose forwarding destination is the UCD controlling station these features are valid 27 When UCD queueing is not available and the system data ASYD SYS 1 Index 60 bit 3 1 assigned UCD peg count is not activated 28 When the controlling station transfers the station trunk to another station that has set CALL FORWARDIN...

Page 822: ... A call can be overflowed 4 times at the maximum by using OVERFLOW UCD O 13 If overflowing destinations are all busy the call is queued into original group depending on system data See figure below Note The call cannot overflow more than 5 times h The user can set or cancel Busy Out using UCD stations programmed in LDM 32 This feature is available via FCCS link 33 A UCD Group for FCCS service is n...

Page 823: ...me node 38 When activating this feature via the FCCS network the maximum number of stations per group are as shown below Physical Station Number 100 stations Telephone Number 100 stations 39 When activating this feature via the FCCS network two types of UCD groups are available Group a All the stations belonging to one group are accommodated in the same node Group b Stations belonging to one group...

Page 824: ...d 44 When activating this feature via the FCCS network when PEG COUNT P 7 service is provided UCD Route Peg Count UCD Group Peg Count UCD Station Peg Count is available 45 When activating this feature via the FCCS network in regard to CALL WAITING LAMP UCD C 76 service if a UCD incoming call is terminated when the queue slot is full the lamps of the stations in the same node that accommodates the ...

Page 825: ...terminating at a UCD station will forward if the call is not answered before the Call Forwarding timer expires 5 There is no peg count for calls directed to a UCD group which terminate to a station outside the UCD group due to CALL FORWARDING C 2 3 5 6 ATTENDANT CAMP ON WITH TONE INDICATION A 1 UCD calls extended by the Attendant to the controlling station will not camp on unless all of the non co...

Page 826: ... or its Phantom No Both numbers can be the UCD group number c When PH 0 UCD hunt starts by dialing the station number of the controlling station only The feature is not provided when the Phantom Number is dialed Programming STEP 1 ASYD System Data 1 Index 60 bit 3 Selection of UCD Queuing 0 1 UCD Queuing is provided Not provided System Data 1 Index 70 bit 6 Designation of announcement trunk used f...

Page 827: ... 4 Attendant Console Peg Count 5 Route Peg Count 6 Service Peg Count 8 UCD Route Peg Count 9 UCD Group Peg Count 10 UCD Station Peg Count 11 CCIS Traffic Count STEP 9 DTF3 Display of Traffic Data 3 TYPE Type of Traffic Measurement 8 UCD Route Peg Count 9 UCD Group Peg Count 10 UCD Station Peg Count STEP 10 AUCD AUCDL Assign the related data for the UCD group if necessary Assign the tenant number u...

Page 828: ...um of 24 may be added consisting of either digits or 2 8 second pauses Interactions 1 For features requiring digit translation refer to the specific feature programming description 2 The ASTP AOSP and AISP commands operate to translate incoming TIE Line digits that are received by the register and then sent to the opposite PBX via UNIVERSAL SENDER The ANND command is used like the AMND command It ...

Page 829: ...NEAX2400 IPX Feature Programming Manual Page 786 NDA 24297 Issue 1 U 3 Universal Sender Programming cont d STEP 2 MBTK Assign the Make Idle status to the sender trunks ...

Page 830: ... second increments 3 No Answer Timer for station call via an Attendant Console CALL FORWARDING DON T ANSWER C 3 a standard timing 10 seconds b variable timing 2 30 seconds two second increments 4 No Answer Timer for Call Transfer CALL TRANSFER ALL CALLS C 11 a standard timing 30 seconds b variable timing 2 30 seconds two second increments 5 Periodic Time Indication Tone Timer PERIODIC TIME INDICAT...

Page 831: ...of 3 equaling 2 seconds is not available but a TC of 4 equaling 30 seconds is available Timer Index TC values for Indexes 136 147 150 155 156 157 158 TC 0 1 2 3 2 seconds TC values for Indexes 134 139 140 141 152 TC 0 1 2 3 2 seconds 7 8 seconds TC values for Indexes 137 146 TC 0 1 64 milliseconds 2 3 2 seconds 4 30 seconds TC values for Indexes 138 TC 0 1 64 milliseconds 2 3 2 seconds 4 30 second...

Page 832: ...ata 1 Index 140 Assign 3FH for 30 seconds PERIODIC TIME INDICATION TONE P 11 System Data 1 Indexes 137 and 138 Timer Class of data 4 for 30 seconds is available for both timers Index 137 sets when the first tone will be heard Assign 46 in hex for 3 minutes Index 138 sets the interval between the first tone and all subsequent tones Assign 46 in hex for 3 minutes This assignment works with ARTD CDN ...

Page 833: ... multi line sets displaying the called station 3 VOICE CALL will follow CALL FORWARDING ALL CALLS C 5 and CALL FORWARDING BUSY DON T ANSWER C 2 3 4 VOICE CALL will terminate at the station whose my line is the same as the extension called 5 Only the called station can respond HANDS FREE H 5D 6 STATION MESSAGE DETAIL RECORDING SYSTEM S 10 is not available for this service Programming For a Single L...

Page 834: ...or assigning a function to each soft key FCCS Programming This data setting describes only the additional or replacement commands used to activate FCCS services When used as an FCCS feature these commands replace the non network commands for example AAED is replaced by AAEDN Note that the data setting for FCCS service varies depending on the node Note STEP 1 ANPDL Reserve a number level for featur...

Page 835: ... After a voice call has been activated the called station will appear busy on multi line sets displaying the called station 2 A voice call will follow CALL FORWARDING ALL CALLS C 5 and CALL FORWARDING BUSY LINE DON T ANSWER C 2 C 3 3 A voice call will terminate at the station MY LINE M 23D 4 When a called station is not a Dterm a reorder tone will be sent to the calling party followed by a ringbac...

Page 836: ...mand is used for assigning a function to each soft key Operating with the access code STEP 1 ASYD System Data 1 Index 17 Bit 0 Hooking H service for single line set This is used for the MESSAGE REMINDER M 19 and VOICE CALL features of a single line set STEP 2 ANPD Reserve a number level for feature access Assign Connection Indexes CI N H B Normal Hooking and Busy applicable to any feature assigned...

Page 837: ... tone Setting 1 produces the lowest Setting 2 produces a medium Setting 3 produces the highest To control the ringing tone there is a switch located underneath the Dterm It is opposite the Transfer Key and is labeled RINGING TONE It has switch settings marked 1 2 and 3 For Dterm Series E 1 The Dterm is equipped with two control buttons located on the top front of the phone Volume can be increased ...

Page 838: ...ROUTE ADVANCE R 6 DIRECT IN TERMINATION D 7 2 A WATS Access trunk can be used with any system feature that can be used with any other trunk There are no unique characteristics of a WATS trunk of note in relation to the implementation of other features Programming STEP 1 ARTD Assign the WATS line routes as shown below INCOMING WATS LINES GROUND START RT 1 3 ISGS 1 4 INSG 3 5 TF 2 3 6 TCL 3 7 L T 1 ...

Page 839: ...ing cont d STEP 5 ASPA Assign the access code as assigned in ANPD above Type of Service SRV OGC Outgoing Call Outgoing Trunk Assign the route number associated with this access code STEP 6 ARSC The Route Restriction Class must be constructed to allow the station access to the involved routes ...

Page 840: ...0 IPX Only one SPAN is allowed for NEAX2400 IPX NEAX2000 IVS2 connection 2 The maximum number of routes and nodes for the NEAX2000 IVS2 are given by subtracting the number of routes LGRT used for the NEAX2400 IPX from 899 maximum number of routes in an FCCS group Note This condition is applied to the NEAX2400 IPX side The NEAX2000 IVS2 system may accommodate up to 255 nodes including NEAX2400 IPX ...

Page 841: ... center FCCS group should be specified from among multiple FCCS groups in the network It is the only node allowed to assign and delete telephone numbers within the self FCCS group and the others 3 The network consists of FCCS groups and NEAX2000 IVS2 systems within the range of 2 SPANs from the center FCCS group and within the range of 4 SPANs from end to end Interactions 1 PS Roaming and Hand ove...

Page 842: ...th a Data Module 1 Enter the origination command DM CALL from the DTE keyboard Press the RETURN key The monitor will display DM CALL and READY 2 Enter the DTE telephone number by entering DIAL XXXXX Press the RETURN key The monitor will display DIAL XXXXX 3 The monitor will then display CALLING 4 When the called party answers the monitor will display OPEN To receive a data call at a DTE equipped w...

Page 843: ... data communication is established by keypad dialing it is possible to release by keyboard dialing 7 The display of the DTE will be blank when data communication is established by keypad dialing The display of the Dterm will be blank when data communication is established via keyboard dialing 8 The DSPY AUTO key on the Dterm is ineffective when keyboard dialing is used to establish a data call 9 W...

Page 844: ...ging All Lines 2 Ringing on Prime Line Only 3 Flexible Ring Assignment enables RG parameter KYN Key Number 1 40 KYI Service Index 0 Key Not Used 1 Feature Key 2 Multi line Key KD Assign as 0 FKY Feature Key Number RG Ringing Assignment per Multi line Appearance 0 No Ringing 1 Ringing in Day Mode Only 2 Ringing in Night Mode Only 3 Ringing Day and Night The feature keys DATA TRANSFER DTX FKY 31 DAT...

Page 845: ...r when the Attendant and the called party belong to a different PBX in the CCIS network Operating Procedure 1 Stations a and b are talking through a CCIS line 2 Subscriber c places a call to Node A through a CO line An Attendant in Node A answers the call Attendant STN a CO Line Subscriber c STN b Node B Node A CCIS PUBLIC SWITCHED TELEPHONE NETWORK PUBLIC SWITCHED TELEPHONE NETWORK Attendant STN ...

Page 846: ...usy tone 4 The Attendant presses the RELEASE key Attendant Camp On service setting Note 1 While talking with Station a Station b receives Camp On Tone and the Attendant can now handle other calls PUBLIC SWITCHED TELEPHONE NETWORK CO Line ATT STN a Subscriber c STN b Node B Node A CCIS Hold Tone Hold Tone BT BT PUBLIC SWITCHED TELEPHONE NETWORK ATT CO Line Hold Tone Hold Tone Subscriber c Camp On T...

Page 847: ...te 2 Instead of on hook by Stations a and b if b switch hook flashes and dials the Call Hold Access Code b can answer Subscriber c C O line party and a is held on the line If b switch hook flashes and dials the Call Hold Access Code once again b can return to the connection with a In this case Subscriber c is held on the C O line Service Conditions 1 Only one incoming call can be camped on to a pa...

Page 848: ...ICATION CCIS B 9 BOSS SECRETARY OVERRIDE Dterm B 6 CALL WAITING TERMINATING C 12 CONSULTATION HOLD ALL CALLS CCIS C 58 C 58D DIAL ACCESS TO ATTENDANT CCIS D 71 DATA LINE SECURITY CCIS D 66 DATA PRIVACY ON DEMAND CCIS D 68 EXECUTIVE RIGHT OF WAY CCIS E 8 E 8D NON EXCLUSIVE HOLD Dterm N 7D OUTGOING TRUNK QUEUING CCIS O 12 O 12D OFF HOOK QUEUING CCIS O 11 VOICE CALL Dterm CCIS V 7D PRIVACY RELEASE P ...

Page 849: ...rties have hung up Using the PA CFTB 6 When all parties are connected the conference leader with a push button telephone can dial digit 0 to prevent additional stations from entering the conference group thereby assuring privacy If the leader presses 0 again more parties can be added 7 If the conference leader dials digit all conferees will be disconnected Otherwise the conference is terminated on...

Page 850: ...uipment Class TEC to the station connected to the Conference Unit Also assign the Service Feature Class and Route Restriction Class RSC to the telephone The RSC should allow connections to the incoming and outgoing routes that will be connected to a conference TN Tenant Number STN Station Number LENS Line Equipment Number 6 digits TEC Telephone Class 1 31 1 DP 10pps 2 PB 3 DP PB 11 VMM 12 Dterm 13...

Page 851: ... DISPLAY STATION D 5 When the dialed number is displayed the display is as follows a Tenant Number Blank Space b Trunk Route Restriction Class Blank Space c Telephone Number Dialed Number Last Digits 9 AUTOMATIC RECALL CCIS will appear on the attendant s HOLD key Interactions 1 This feature is available on calls extended to a branch PBX via a CENTRALIZED ATTENDANT SERVICE CAS C 20 position 2 Syste...

Page 852: ...ystem node will recall to the Attendant Station calls extended by the Attendant over CCIS will not recall Trunk calls will recall in both instances Programming STEP 1 ASYD System Data 1 Index 145 Timer Class 1 2 seconds For normal operation assign 00H RAM data is 94H Any call that uses AUTOMATIC RECALL keeps one of the Attendant Console switched loops busy Since there are six loops per Attendant C...

Page 853: ...ing number by E991 ANI CCIS is NXX XXXX which is the same as that of the previous Enhanced 911 ANI service 3 Method of obtaining ANI sending number example Caller s station number 12345 closed numbering ANI assigned data RT XX AT 0 0 STA ATT 1 not assigned special ATT number CC 1 0 Main Central 1 Satellite Central COC 826 Remote Office Code Skip 4 Number of digits to be skipped from the top of the...

Page 854: ... from an Attendant and ANI data is unassigned KP 1 ST c Outgoing call from station Attendant of Remote office and call termination to a TIE Line of Main Office KP 2 ST 5 An independent route is required for Enhanced 911 interface 6 After caller s number is sent out to the remote office by Enhanced 911 ANI it takes some time before a speech path is established 7 Enhanced 911 ANI CCIS service data a...

Page 855: ...30 PAD 4 43 BT 1 82 RSAX 13 84 CSEG 15 70 TCMN 1 STEP 2 ATRK Assign trunk LENs RT 905 TK1 LEN dependent on register location RT 905 TK2 LEN dependent on register location RT 904 TK1 LEN dependent on register location RT 904 TK2 LEN dependent on register location STEP 3 AAND Assign ANI data RT 0 AT 0 0 Station 1 Individual Attendant KT 0 0 1 OFF ON expansion of station number lengths CC 1 0 Main Ce...

Page 856: ...ormation on how to accommodate C O line on a Dterm line feature key STEP 1 ASYD System Data 1 Index 241 Bit 6 0 1 When the length of Caller ID exceeds the limit only the former latter part of data appears on the LCD System Data 1 Index 390 Bit 0 Caller ID display pattern on the LCD 0 1 Calling Number Calling Name has priority System Data 1 Index 390 Bit 2 when using Dterm 2 line LCD the lower LCD ...

Page 857: ...lows SFI 14 to stations allowed STATION MESSAGE DETAIL RECORDING S 10 STEP 3 ARTD Assign route class data for the C O trunk 15 LSG 3 50 DPLY 1 When Calling Number is output to SMDR 10 SMDR 1 Assign Route Class Expansion Data CI ISDN transmitting information 29 TELP 1 16 Digit Caller Number Service Attribute Information Notification Service and Calling Sub Address Transfer Service When My Line is P...

Page 858: ...endant Console illuminate 3 The Attendant dials the number for Station b receives busy tone 4 The Attendant presses the BUSY VERIFICATION key the Attendant and both STN a and STN b receive Warning Tone STN a STN b and the Attendant are connected in a 3 Way Connection 5 The Attendant presses the CANCEL key and can now handle other calls Service Conditions 1 This service may be used during Station t...

Page 859: ...V 2 g In a Modem Pooling connection h In a Data Call through a Data Adapter i In a Data Call through a Data Module In each of the above instances the Attendant will receive reorder tone 5 Before the Attendant is added to an existing connection a tone burst 08 seconds is applied to alert the calling parties of the attendant s presence 6 BUSY VERIFICATION CCIS and ATTENDANT LOCKOUT A 5 are mutually ...

Page 860: ... station line that has a DATA LINE SECURITY D 12 Class of Service If BUSY VERIFICATION CCIS is attempted the Attendant will hear reorder tone 9 DATA PRIVACY ON DEMAND CCIS D 68 An ATTENDANT cannot busy verify a busy station line that has PRIVACY ON DEMAND CCIS D 68 set If BUSY VERIFICATION CCIS is attempted the Attendant will hear reorder tone 10 DICTATION ACCESS D 3 BUSY VERIFICATION CCIS will be...

Page 861: ...T CAMP ON WITH TONE INDICATION A 45 SFI 3 must be allowed for the attendant s Service Feature Class normally SFC 0 at all locations allowing the attendant to use this feature STEP 3 ATRK Assign the LEN as Route 909 Digital Conference Trunk A LEN consists of the following Group and Level numbers for the Digital Conference Trunk are 210 213 216 221 224 227 232 and 235 STEP 4 ARSC When a station is c...

Page 862: ...n Module are used if between 40 and 52 destinations are required One of the 16 buttons on each Dterm must be assigned as a MY Line One of the remaining 15 buttons on the Dterm s must be assigned as a RELEASE key Therefore a total of 52 BROKERAGE HOTLINES CCIS can be used to access distant destinations 3 An AC Adapter is required for the 24 button Add On Module 4 A BROKERAGE HOTLINE cannot be assig...

Page 863: ... a PA 16LC circuit the following data TN Tenant Number STN Station Number LENS Line Equipment Number 6 digits TEC Telephone Class 1 31 1 DP 10pps 2 PB 3 DP PB 11 VMM 12 Dterm 13 Data Terminal via Dterm 14 Hotline 15 CAS Line 16 Data Terminal via Data Module 18 Virtual Circuit 19 TMM 20 PSM 23 ISDN Terminal 27 Eight Conference Equipment RSC Route Restriction Class 0 15 SFC Service Feature Class 0 1...

Page 864: ...ndex 0 Key Not Used 1 Feature Key 2 Multi line Key KD 0 RG Ringing Assignment per Multi line Appearance 0 No Ringing 1 Ringing in Day Mode Only 2 Ringing in Night Mode Only 3 Ringing Day and Night STEP 4 ASPD Assign the tenant Abbreviated Digit Code ADC and Digit Code DC STEP 5 ASFC Primary station and Hotline must be allowed access to ASPD SFI 12 ...

Page 865: ...handset receive dial tone 2 Dial the CALL BACK CCIS cancellation code receive service set tone To set from an 8 button or 16 button Dterm or a Dterm Executive Terminal 1 Dial the desired telephone number receive busy tone 2 Press the CALL BACK line feature key receive service set tone The LCD will display 3 Hang up 4 When the called station becomes idle the calling and called stations will ring si...

Page 866: ... BACK CCIS can originate and receive calls while this feature is active 11 Reorder tone will be returned to a station attempting to set CALL BACK CCIS if a The calling or called station has set CALL BACK CCIS OUTGOING TRUNK QUEUING O 2 O 12 or has a call waiting or camped on b The calling or called station is activating CALL HOLD C 6 12 If the calling party waits off hook after setting CALL BACK C...

Page 867: ...n a per tenant basis 0 1 No Yes System Data 2 Index 4 bit 0 Are CALL BACK CCIS and OUTGOING TRUNK QUEUING CCIS O 12 access codes the same or separate 0 1 Separate Same System Data 3 Index 3 bit 5 Enable Ringer pattern 5 for CALL BACK CCIS See DISTINCTIVE RINGING D 10 System Data 3 Index 7 Assign data 42H for four seconds on two seconds off STEP 2 ANPD Reserve a number level for feature access and ...

Page 868: ...nsferred station respectively belong to a different PBX in the CCIS network Operating Procedure When setting Call Forwarding All Calls Service 1 Station A goes off hook receives dial tone 2 Station A dials the Access Code for CALL FORWARDING ALL CALLS receives special dial tone 3 Station A dials the number for the designated Station B receives service set tone 4 Station A hangs up DT DT STN a STN ...

Page 869: ...es ringback tone Station B is rung 6 Station B answers Stations B and C are connected with each other When cancelling Call Forwarding All Calls Service 1 Station A goes off hook receives dial tone 2 Station A dials the Cancel Code of Call Forwarding All Calls receives service set tone 3 Station A hangs up STN a STN b Node B Node A CCIS CCIS Node C RBT RBT STN c RG STN a STN b Node B Node A CCIS CC...

Page 870: ...m placing any calls except to the Attendant This is an optional programmable feature ASYD System Data 2 Index 6 Bit 4 5 When the operator answers a FORWARDED call System Data programming can provide a called telephone number display on the ATTENDANT CONSOLE A 3 6 CALL FORWARDING ALL CALLS CCIS is assigned to a station via CLASS OF SERVICE INDIVIDUAL C 15 programming 7 When CALL FORWARDING ALL CALL...

Page 871: ...Station D If Station C is idle Station C will ring c A Central Office call is directed to Station B Station B is set to CALL FORWARDING ALL CALLS CCIS to Station C Station C is set to CALL FORWARDING ALL CALLS to Station D CALL FORWARDING ALL CALLS occurs to Station D D Node B Node A C B A CALLING STATION CALL FORWARDING ALL CALLS SET IDLE CALL FORWARDING IS SET BUT FORWARDING DOES NOT OCCUR CCIS ...

Page 872: ...oup the call hunts for an idle station If all stations in the Hunt Group are busy the call is camped on to the forwarded to station 14 CALL FORWARDING ALL CALLS CCIS can be overridden allowing the forwarded to station to initiate or transfer calls to the forwarding station a The idle forwarding station can be reached by the forwarded to station using CALL FORWARDING OVERRIDE CCIS C 49 b A busy for...

Page 873: ...he forwarded to station If the forwarded to station is busy the calling station will receive busy tone 24 If a station in a UCD group sets CALL FORWARDING ALL CALLS CCIS it is temporarily removed from the group 25 When a call is forwarded the telephone number recorded in the STATION MESSAGE DETAIL RECORDING S 10 is the forwarded to station Interactions 1 Users are unaccustomed to hearing ringback ...

Page 874: ...ign NND in accordance with a predetermined numbering plan STEP 3 ASPA Assign an access code to CALL FORWARDING ALL CALLS CCIS entry SID 8 and to CALL FORWARDING ALL CALLS cancel SID 9 Assign Connection Status Index CI for Normal N service STEP 4 ASFC Assign a Service Feature Class that allows SFI 7 to the stations that activate CALL FORWARDING ALL CALLS CCIS STEP 5 AKYD For Dterm sets CALL FORWARD...

Page 875: ...CCIS network Operating Procedure When setting call Forwarding Busy Line Service 1 Station A goes off hook receives dial tone 2 Station A dials the Access Code for Call Forwarding Busy Line receives special dial tone 3 Station A dials the number for the designated Station B receives service set tone 4 Station A hangs up 5 Station A is engaging in a call with Station C through a CCIS line STN b Node...

Page 876: ...tion B which Station A has designated as the call destination Station D receives ringback tone Station B is rung 7 When Station B answers Stations B and D are connected with each other When cancelling CALL FORWARDING BUSY LINE service 1 Station A goes off hook receives dial tone STN b Node B CCIS Node A STN a STN c CCIS Node C STN d RG RBT STN d CCIS Node C STN b Node B CCIS Node A STN a STN c STN...

Page 877: ... LINE CCIS is used the following conditions exist a Station A calls station B Station B is call forwarded to Station C Station C is call forwarded to Station D Call forwarding does occur to Station D CALL BACK CCIS C 44 CALL WAITING TERMINATING C 12 or EXECUTIVE RIGHT OF WAY CCIS E 8 can be set from Station A to Station C STN b Node B CCIS SST SST Node A STN a CCIS NETWORK CALLING STATION CALL FOR...

Page 878: ...WAITING TERMINATING C 12 or EXECUTIVE RIGHT OF WAY CCIS E 8 can be set from Station A to Station C c A Central Office call is directed to Station B Station B is call forwarded to Station C Station C is call forwarded to Station D Call forwarding does occur to Station D If Station C is idle Station C will ring If Station C is busy Station D will ring D Node B Node A C B A CALLING STATION CALL FORWA...

Page 879: ... When the pilot station of a Pilot Hunt Group activates CALL FORWARDING BUSY LINE to a station not a member of a hunt group and system parameters specify that call hunting will be activated at the forwarded station the NEAX2400 IPX will send busy tone if the forwarded station is busy If the system parameters specify hunting at the forwarding station and the forwarded station is busy the call will ...

Page 880: ... activates BUSY VERIFICATION CCIS B 9 CALL BACK CCIS C 44 CALL WAITING TERMINATING C 12 or EXECUTIVE RIGHT OF WAY CCIS E 8 these services will be activated to the forwarded to station 21 If any of the following restrictions are in effect at a forwarded to station incoming trunk calls to the forwarding station will not be call forwarded intercept arrangements will apply a Fully Restricted Station b...

Page 881: ...INE CCIS and CALL FORWARDING DON T ANSWER CCIS C 47 are the same only one key needs to be assigned in AKYD 2 When CALL WAITING C 12 31 ATTENDANT CAMP ON WITH TONE INDICATION A 45 or CALL BACK C 44 is directed toward Station A with call forwarding set to Station B Station B will receive Call Waiting Tone 3 A non controlling UCD station is allowed to activate CALL FORWARDING BUSY LINE CCIS When this...

Page 882: ...re key Assign Type Function CALL FORWARDING BUSY LINE 1 STEP 6 ADSL Assign FDB key Assign SN 1 Originating DT Connection and FKY 1 Call Forwarding Busy Line This command is used for assigning a function to each soft key STEP 7 ATNR Allow tenant to tenant connection for Inter and Intra tenant connections Assign Tenant Restriction Index TRI 1 For this feature to be set by the Attendant Console assig...

Page 883: ...nd the transferred station respectively belong to a different PBX in the CCIS network Operating Procedure When setting 1 Station A goes off hook receives dial tone 2 Station A dials the Access Code for CALL FORWARDING DON T ANSWER receives special dial tone 3 Station A dials the number for the designated Station B receives service set tone 4 Station A hangs up STN b Node B CCIS Node A STN a DT DT ...

Page 884: ...nswer the call within a predetermined amount of time The ringing at Station A stops and the call is automatically transferred to Station B which A has designated as the transfer destination Station B is rung 7 Station B answers the call Stations B and C are connected with each other STN c Node C CCIS CCIS STN a Node A Node B STN b RBT RG STN c Node C CCIS CCIS STN a Node A Node B STN b RG RBT STN ...

Page 885: ... service set tone 3 Station A hangs up Service Conditions 1 When CALL FORWARDING DON T ANSWER CCIS is used the following conditions exist a Station A calls Station B Station B is call forwarded to Station C Station C is call forwarded to Station D Call forwarding does occur to Station D STN b Node B CCIS Node A STN a DT DT STN b Node B CCIS Node A STN a SST SST CCIS NETWORK CALLING STATION CALL FO...

Page 886: ... C is idle it will ring beyond the Don t Answer timer c A Central Office call is directed to Station B Station B is call forwarded to Station C Station C is call forwarded to Station D Call forwarding does occur to Station D D Node B Node A C B A CALLING STATION CALL FORWARDING DON T ANSWER SET IDLE CALL FORWARDING IS SET BUT FORWARDING DOES NOT OCCUR CCIS NETWORK NEAX2400 NEAX2400 B C D Node B No...

Page 887: ...e set from any number of stations to the same forwarded to station 9 The display of the forwarded to telephone number on the LCD panel of the forwarding Dterm can be allowed or denied in system programming on a system wide basis 10 If a station transfers a call to another station that has set CALL FORWARDING DON T ANSWER CCIS and releases from the call recall service will override CALL FORWARDING ...

Page 888: ...pad or SPEED CALLING ONE TOUCH S 26D If this feature is accessed via the dial pad it must also be cancelled via the dial pad 21 When an Attendant extends a call to a station in the same node which has set CALL FORWARDING DON T ANSWER CCIS the called station will ring for 30 seconds If the call is not answered it will forward across CCIS Interactions 1 If access codes for CALL FORWARDING BUSY LINE ...

Page 889: ...L FORWARDING DON T ANSWER CCIS via Attendant Console Transfer STEP 2 ANPD Reserve a number level for feature access and cancel Assign for Normal N Hooking H and Busy B Assign NND in accordance with a predetermined numbering plan STEP 3 ASPA Assign an access code to CALL FORWARDING DON T ANSWER CCIS entry SID 12 and to CALL FORWARDING DON T ANSWER CCIS cancel SID 13 Assign Connection Status Index C...

Page 890: ...his feature is provided on a per tenant basis 5 Calls to restricted numbers will receive reorder tone 6 Only one common message can be provided for all intercept conditions 7 The following call conditions are routed to CALL FORWARDING INTERCEPT CCIS Vacant level Unassigned telephone number Interactions 1 The trunk number will only be required when a multiple connection is assigned 2 The COT trunk ...

Page 891: ...t to the CO Therefore calling party will not be billed for the call M Multiple Connection 0 1 Single Connection Multiple Connection See the requirements of the announcement equipment UNUSED NUMBER Assign TN Tenant Number EQP Announcement Equipment Number 1 Unused Number Example If ext 7836 is not in the system the announcement is heard instead of reorder tone RT TK Route Trunk number of the trunk ...

Page 892: ...00 IPX Feature Programming Manual NDA 24297 Issue 1 Page 849 Call Forwarding Intercept CCIS C 48 Programming cont d STEP 7 ARSC Assign RSC 0 for the Attendant Allow stations to access the announcement trunks ...

Page 893: ...G BUSY LINE CCIS C 46 to the calling station Station A the calling station will receive busy tone and can activate CALL BACK CCIS C 44 Operating Procedure No manual operation is required Service Conditions 1 This service feature is allowed to all stations in the CCIS network except the ATTENDANT CONSOLES A 3 2 Any station that has set CALL FORWARDING ALL CALLS C 5 can activate any feature if the s...

Page 894: ... ALL CALLS when the transferring station and the transferred station respectively belong to a different PBX in the CCIS network Operating Procedure 1 Station A and C are in connection on a station to station call 2 Station A switch hook flashes receives special dial tone Station C receives Hold Tone STN c Node C STN a Node A Node B STN b CCIS STN c Node C STN a Node A CCIS Node B STN b Hold Tone H...

Page 895: ...A cannot access Station B for some other reasons When Station B does not answer the call 4 Station B answers the call Note 2 Stations B and A are connected with each other Station A tells Station B that a call is being transferred to B Note 2 i If Station A hangs up before Station B answers the call Station B is rung continuously Station C receives ringback tone ii Station B answers the call Stati...

Page 896: ...When TRUNK TO TRUNK CONNECTION T 10 is provided an incoming or outgoing network or TIE Line call may be transferred to an outgoing network trunk provided that the trunk is ground start The user who transfers the call gives line control to the two remaining parties upon hanging up Therefore if the trunk is loop start CALL TRANSFER ALL CALLS CCIS from trunk to trunk will not function STN c Node C ST...

Page 897: ...nswer supervision may be transferred immediately after the call answered no time delay 8 Outgoing calls with no answer supervision can be transferred only after the time periods assigned in ASYD Indexes 156 or 157 have elapsed since the last digit was dialed 9 If a station is in CONSULTATION HOLD C 58 or in an established THREE WAY connection any attempt to override the connection using one of the...

Page 898: ...ing to the conditions of the forwarding feature set 9 A CALL TRANSFER to a station in a station Hunt S 7 8 9 group will hunt according to the conditions of the Hunt group 10 A CALL TRANSFER to a Dterm that has DO NOT DISTURB D 21D set will receive reorder tone or follow CALL FORWARDING BUSY LINE or ALL CALLS if set 11 A CALL TRANSFER call may be answered by CALL PICKUP GROUP DIRECT C 7 30 Programm...

Page 899: ...t or press the SPEAKER key and dial the desired station The LCD display indicates the status of the called station Service Conditions 1 If the called station is idle the display flashes its number until the call is answered 2 If the called station is busy the LCD displays 3 If the called station is in DO NOT DISTURB D 21D the LCD displays 4 If the calling station encounters a restricted station th...

Page 900: ...ion calls an Attendant the telephone number is displayed on the Console Called Number Display Operating Procedure Calling Number Display 1 The Attendant in Node A dials the number for Station B in Node B through a CCIS line the Attendant receives ringback tone and Station B is rung 2 Station B goes off hook and answers the call the Attendant and Station B are connected the number of Station B is d...

Page 901: ...s is not applicable to Inter office telephone number display in the above case 4 Even if the communicating party has changed during a call the display of the telephone number remains unchanged 5 As stated in the preceding paragraph the telephone number display is made only for the station that has first engaged in a call with the Attendant For the Dterm 1 Call origination The called number is disp...

Page 902: ...he ATTENDANT CONSOLE A 3 is equipped with six dedicated switched loop keys Each loop key has five associated indicator lamps HOLD ATND BUSY RING ANSWER which display the status of the call on that loop The indicator lamps may be on off or flashing 400 ms On and 400 ms Off 3 When the ATTENDANT LOOP RELEASE A 6 feature is activated the status of the call is removed from the ATTENDANT CONSOLE A 3 unt...

Page 903: ... 4 When a HOTLINE CCIS H 12 set is equipped with a dial the user can switch hook flash to get the special dial tone then dial 0 Ringback tone is provided and the Attendant Console is notified of the call 5 This feature cannot be used when NIGHT CONNECTION FIXED CCIS N 15 or NIGHT CONNECTION FLEXIBLE CCIS N 16 is activated In this case CALL TRANSFER ALL CALLS CCIS C 50 would be used to transfer a c...

Page 904: ... set will receive reorder tone or follow CALL FORWARDING BUSY LINE or ALL CALLS if set Programming STEP 1 ASYD System Data 2 Index 1 Bits 0 1 Assign data 11 to allow CONSULTATION HOLD C 58 for all types of connections STEP 2 ATNR Allow tenant to tenant connection for Inter and Intra tenant connections Assign Tenant Restriction Index TRI 0 and 4 on an Inter and Intra tenant basis ...

Page 905: ...hrough multiple FCCS groups networks where multiple NEAX2000 IVS2 s are connected via FCCS link and the NEAX2400 IPX using CCIS link Note NEAX2400 IPX NEAX2000 IVS2 connection is available only if the NEAX2000 IVS2 is the satellite office requires NEAX2000 IVS2 Series 2000 or later software Operating Procedure 1 Station A in Node A Main Node dials Station C in Node C Station A receives ringback to...

Page 906: ... each other in conversation 3 Stations A and C go on hook SMDR information is sent out to the CENTRALIZED BILLING CENTER 4 Station B dials Station C in Node C Station B receives ringback tone and Station C is rung STN c STN a Node A Node B STN b CCIS CCIS Node C Centralized Billing Center Node A Main Node RS 232C SMDR Message STN c STN a Node A Node B STN b CCIS CCIS Node C RG RBT RBT ...

Page 907: ...s service is provided in the network through FCCS groups and NEAX2000 IVS2 1 For general information of this network refer to Network Through FCCS Groups and NEAX2000 IVS2 in the NEAX2400 IPX No 7 CCIS System Manual 2 When the 7 or 8 digit telephone number assigned in AELGN command is used in the network for the NEAX2000 IVS2 it is output to station number field and the office code field of the or...

Page 908: ...e Center Office DPC 0 System 1 Index 288 Designation of RS 232C non procedure output port SMDR System 2 Index 3 Bit 0 SMDR Service 1 Bit 7 SMDR Station to Station Connection Data 1 STEP 2 ASFC With respect to SFC of the billing subject stations clear the restriction of SFI 14 SMDR Trunk Basis and if necessary SFI 58 SMDR STN to STN STEP 3 ARTD With respect to the Route Class of Outgoing and Incomi...

Page 909: ... Nodes 1 Press the NIGHT key on the Attendant Console for each Tenant the NIGHT lamp illuminates The mode of Satellite Node for each Tenant changes from Day mode to Night mode Note To confirm Night Mode see Night Connection Fixed CCIS N 15 Service Conditions 1 A Main Node can control DAY NIGHT mode changeover for a maximum of 16 remote nodes Node A Main Node CCIS CCIS CCIS CCIS ATT TN 2 TN 3 TN 4 ...

Page 910: ...ndex 18 Bit 7 Day Night change is executed by the Main Node for Satellite Node only Assign data 1 at the Satellite Node whose Day Night mode is to be changed in accordance with key operation at the Main Node System Data 1 Index 19 Bits 0 3 Tenant Number TN1 15 of the Main Node to which the Satellite Node belongs for Satellite Node only System 1 Index 75 Bit 0 Route Restriction Pattern ARSC Bit 1 S...

Page 911: ...at MJ MN alarm at a local office is to be displayed on the Display Panel at the Center Office an MJ MN alarm that is generated in Node B is indicated as an MJ MN alarm on the Display Panel in Node A and the corresponding system message is given out Service Conditions 1 When the fault information cannot be sent from the Satellite Node to the Main Node fault information buffer capacity is 64 message...

Page 912: ...rammed time 6 The table below shows the controllability of fault information received from the NEAX2000 IVS2 Note Available when the alarm grade is changed by ASYD SYS 1 Index 188 bit 1 1 and the ALMG command 7 The fault information of NEAX2000 IVS2 received at Center Office is cleared by the RALM RALMN command 8 When the information of faults occurred at all the FCCS groups and the connected NEAX...

Page 913: ... of the buffer memory for use in the centralized System Management Report CCIS 0 1 Not necessary necessary System 1 Index 188 Bit 1 MJ MN lamp on the Display Panel in the Center Office is controlled per fault information from a local office 1 STEP 2 AIOC Assign the function and attribute data of the IOC ports FCCS Programming Set the data for the Centralized MAT following programming of CENTRALIZE...

Page 914: ... System Manual Centralized MAT MAT IPX 1 IPX IPX IPX IPX IPX IPX IPX FUG B FUG A FPC 1 DPC FPC n DPC FPC 1 DPC PC 2 DPC PC 3 DPC FPC 0 DPC FPC 12 DPC FPC 12 DPC FPC 12 DPC PC 5 DPC FPC 1 PC 2 PC 3 FPC 12 FPC 11 PC 5 Center FUG 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 DPC for Centralized Maintenance FCCS ASYDL SYS1 Index 532 PC n DPC DPC for Centralized Maintenance CCIS ASYD SYS1 Index 184 185 ALARM ALARM ALARM ALARM FPC 1 D...

Page 915: ... the calling station will automatically be returned to the original call 3 If the originating station switch hook flashes a THREE WAY CALL T 2 will be established To hold the original call and place a second call from a Dterm 1 Press the TRANSFER key receive special dial tone 2 The original call is placed on hold 3 Dial the second telephone number receive ringback tone 4 The second station answers...

Page 916: ...LLING INDIVIDUAL Entry S 21 TRUNK ANSWER FROM ANY STATION TAS T 27 All other features may be activated as long as the user s line CLASS OF SERVICE INDIVIDUAL C 15 allows that feature 6 If the user receives busy or reorder tone instead of ringback tone upon establishing a CONSULTATION HOLD ALL CALLS CCIS connection and dialing a third party the user flashes once to disconnect the tone and reconnect...

Page 917: ... be used for a value of 2 seconds if CALL TRANSFER ALL CALLS C 50 is to be used immediately after connecting to the trunk This is the time between trunk connection and when switch hook flash is allowed on a senderized trunk connection It is also used to determine when SMDR billing will begin System Data 2 Index 1 bits 0 1 CONSULTATION HOLD allowed or denied 00 Denied 01 Originating and Terminating...

Page 918: ...e of the transferring station and the telephone number of the transferring station 5 Attendant dials the telephone number of the target station Note 6 Attendant dials receives service set tone 7 Attendant presses the RELEASE key Note When the transfer target station is in the CCIS network dial the office code including access code and the station number of the target station To cancel Call Forward...

Page 919: ...ttendant Number but the call is not transferred to the designated target station Programming STEP 1 ASYD System 2 Index 15 bit 4 The office which determines the target number 0 1 Service executing office office accommodating the transferring station STEP 2 ASAT Assign an individual Attendant access number for each Attendant Console STEP 3 ANPD Assign the minimum necessary number of digits for the ...

Page 920: ...e sent or received via IPTRK card 4 The port assignable for CCIS signaling is only the 1st LEN of each HW block Other ports are to be used for speech channels 5 A D channel assigned on an IPTRK card can control the B channels of the same card and also those of a maximum of 7 other IPTRK cards 6 Tandem Path through function is not provided 7 This feature supports QoS Quality of Service function 8 W...

Page 921: ...47 Call Forwarding Don t Answer CCIS Provided C 50 Call Transfer All Calls CCIS Provided C 54 Call Transfer Attendant CCIS Provided C 55 Centralized Billing CCIS Provided C 57 Centralized System Management Report CCIS Provided D 68 Data Privacy on Demand CCIS Provided D 71 Dial Access to Attendant CCIS Provided D 74 Direct Termination CCIS Provided D 75 Distinctive Ringing CCIS Provided independen...

Page 922: ...tiple interfaces which vary from a single point code taking CCIS and CCIS network via IP services together within one network CIC numbers and CICG CIC Group must be assigned on the same interface For further information see the IPTRK Circuit Card System Manual STEP 2 AGIP Assign the IP addresses of IPTRK card and connected router Kind IPTRK CCIS IPTEN Assign the 1st LEN of IPTRK accommodated HW bl...

Page 923: ...quired for transmitting the 1 mbyte data 1 block of Data Memory is 2 hours at 64 kbps data speed 1 hour at 128 kbps data speed 15 minutes at 512 kbps data speed 4 The number of MATs to be installed may vary depending on the customer specification one or two MATs can be used to centralize the MAT operation and three or more MATs can be used to separate the MAT operation 5 By user ID and password wr...

Page 924: ...e FUGs in duplicate When a number other than 0 is entered to CON_FUG 0 cannot be entered to the corresponding NCN_FPC A single FUG is to be designated as the Center FUG in one network through FCCS groups and a NEAX2000 IVS2 STEP 2 AEXFN Assign the Point Code data for connecting to each FPC in FUG FUG Destination FUG number connected to self FUG 1 4 FPC Fccs network Point Code assigned at CON_FUG 1...

Page 925: ...e NEAX2000 IVS2 for data programming on the NEAX2000 IVS2 side To connect a NEAX2400 IPX and a NEAX2400 IPX NEAX2400 IPX stands for the FCCS node working alone in an FCCS network Center FUG FPC 1 PC 1 FUG 1 FPC 3 PC 3 NCN FPC 2 PC 2 CCIS NEAX2000 IVS2 Center FUG FPC 1 NCN PC 4 FPC 4 PC 1 CCIS CCIS CCIS CCIS NEAX2000 IVS2 FUG 2 FUG 3 PC 3 NCN FPC 3 PC 2 NCN FPC 2 PC 5 FPC 5 NEAX2000 IVS2 ...

Page 926: ...ing the MODEM Pooling or a DST card Operating Procedure When transmitting data from Data Adapter 1 Press the DATA key on Dterm a the LCD displays 2 Dterm a dials the number for Dterm b the LCD displays 3 Dterm b is being rung the LCD displays 4 Dterm b answers the LCD displays 5 Data communication ends DATA NEC NE C Data Terminal Dterm a with DA Node A CCIS Node B Dterm b with DA Data Terminal DAT...

Page 927: ...ds if installed is necessary 2 A data call originated from a DTE via the digital data line is valid only when the call is an LCR call This is also applicable to a tandem connection 3 For 56 kbps synchronous data a separate T1 channel with no voice capability is required Programming STEP 1 AMND The communication lineup to the office concerned is set up on an office code basis Note When originating ...

Page 928: ...en if the Dterm station is in the DO NOT DISTURB CCIS D 76 mode Interactions 1 DATA INTERFACE AUTOMATIC ANSWER for a Data Module is set via switch settings on the outside of the Data Module 2 DATA INTERFACE AUTOMATIC ANSWER may be programmed from the Dterm via attribute data thus saving a programmable line feature key 3 When a Data Module is used between a Data Terminal and the PBX certain charact...

Page 929: ...anual Page 886 NDA 24297 Issue 1 D 65 Data Interface Automatic Answer CCIS Programming cont d KYI Service Index 0 Key Not Used 1 Feature Key 2 Multi line Key KD Not assigned for Feature Key FKY Feature Key Number FKY 30 AUTOMATIC ANSWER ...

Page 930: ... be received 2 This feature is activated through system data programming see CLASS OF SERVICE INDIVIDUAL C 15 Interactions 1 This feature is usually programmed on a per station basis 2 The DATA LINE SECURITY feature functions both when calls are originated and when calls are terminated 3 CALL PICK UP C 7 C 30 Calls directed to a station assigned a DATA LINE SECURITY feature can be picked up by ano...

Page 931: ...WITH TONE INDICATION A 1 A 45 BUSY VERIFICATION B 3 B 9 EXECUTIVE RIGHT OF WAY E 1 E 8 If these features are attempted a reorder tone will be received 2 DATA PRIVACY CCIS cannot prevent disruptions in data transmission generated from outside the CCIS network 3 When the data call disconnects DATA PRIVACY CCIS is automatically cancelled 4 When DATA PRIVACY CCIS is activated the circuit cannot be acc...

Page 932: ...rn to the original connection or wait 30 seconds to return automatically Service Conditions 1 The following connections are restricted when DATA PRIVACY ON DEMAND CCIS is active as transmitted tones are involved in their operation BUSY VERIFICATION CCIS B 9 ATTENDANT CAMP ON WITH TONE INDICATION CCIS A 45 EXECUTIVE RIGHT OF WAY CCIS E 8 If these features are attempted a reorder tone will be receiv...

Page 933: ...PD Reserve a number level for feature access and cancel Assign for Normal N Hooking H and Busy B Assign NND in accordance with a predetermined numbering plan STEP 2 ASPA Assign an access code to DATA PRIVACY ON DEMAND SRV SSCA Service Code Appendix SIDA 48 DATA PRIVACY cancel with a Connection Status Index CI of Hooking H ...

Page 934: ...red Service Conditions 1 Upon data call origination or termination using a Data Module equipped DTE certain character string sequences relating to status are exchanged over the CCIS network during call set up 2 After the data connection is established the Data Module looks for a disconnect request from the DTE which consists of the ESC character followed immediately by RELEASE 3 An asynchronous tr...

Page 935: ...s on calls outside the CCIS network 4 Route Restriction is used to restrict a call based on the caller s restriction class and the selected route 5 Numbering Restriction is used to restrict a call based on the number dialed The following three types of Numbering Restrictions are used Toll Restriction Toll Restriction 3 6 Digit Unauthorized Code Restriction 6 The following additional restriction fe...

Page 936: ...n the Night mode a station dialing 0 can be answered by the assigned ATTENDANT NIGHT TRANSFER A 19 station if provided However when the ASAT number is dialed in the Night mode reorder tone is returned No connection is allowed to the ATTENDANT NIGHT TRANSFER A 19 or telephone number 5 A remote station in TN 2 will ring the ATTENDANT CONSOLE of TN 2 in the MAIN NODE 6 A remote station in TN 2 will r...

Page 937: ...PX Feature Programming Manual Page 894 NDA 24297 Issue 1 D 71 Dial Access to Attendant CCIS Programming cont d STEP 3 ATNR Allow tenant to tenant connection for Inter and Intra tenant connections TRI 0 and TRI 4 ...

Page 938: ...runk Route Restriction Class and or tenant number are not single digits refer to Examples 2 and 3 3 If the station dialed by the Attendant Console is busy or in LINE LOCKOUT L 3 mode only the telephone number will be displayed 4 The DIGITAL DISPLAY is limited to six digits Since the CLASS OF SERVICE C 15 and Trunk Route displays are in numerical form a list must be provided for the Attendant to ex...

Page 939: ...tendant Console extends a call to a busy telephone in a Hunt group The terminating telephone number is indicated on the DIGITAL DISPLAY STATION rather than the called telephone number 3 DIGITAL DISPLAY STATION feature will occur whenever the Attendant performs any of the following actions a Extends an incoming call to a user b Originates a call to a user c Answers a recall or call forwarding call ...

Page 940: ...tion number 3 If the Trunk Route number is three digits the tenant number is not displayed 4 The DIGITAL DISPLAY is limited to six digits Because the Class Of Service and Trunk Route displays are in numerical form a list must be provided for the Attendant giving an explanation of each Class Of Service and Trunk Identification number 5 The DIGITAL DISPLAY TRUNK CCIS feature displays either Trunk Ro...

Page 941: ... calls Intercept calls Outgoing CO type DOD WATS FX calls Outgoing TIE Line calls Reenters held trunk calls 4 By pressing the loop key of a camped on call the Attendant can determine both the trunk and telephone numbers of the camped on call See ATTENDANT CAMP ON WITH TONE INDICATION CCIS A 45 Programming STEP 1 ASYD System Data 1 Index 68 bit 1 Type of INDIVIDUAL TRUNK ACCESS 0 1 Route and Trunk ...

Page 942: ...y to order special DID trunks as is required with DIRECT INWARD DIALING D 8 However care should be exercised in the application of central office trunk hunting 3 If the called party is busy the following conditions apply a When the call is directly terminated the call will ring until the called station becomes idle or the call is forwarded to an attendant according to the system data b In case of ...

Page 943: ...inate elsewhere in the night mode 9 DIRECT IN TERMINATION must be assigned as Ground Start Programming STEP 1 ASYD System 1 Index 72 bit 6 Distinctive ringing only for DIT and DID calls System 2 Index 11 bit 7 Disposition of DIT call when station is busy STEP 2 ACSA CSIA 3 assign for Direct In Termination Outside STEP 3 ACSI Assign Direct In Termination Outside data CSI 6 Night Connection Outside ...

Page 944: ...ant dials the number for Station b receives ringback tone Station c receives Hold Tone and Station b is rung Distinctive Ringing Service Conditions 1 Ring for Incoming Internal Calls on CCIS network 2 seconds on 4 seconds off 2 seconds ring 4 seconds off 2 Ring for Incoming External Calls on CCIS network 1 second on 2 second off or 2 second on 4 second off 3 This feature may be assigned to individ...

Page 945: ...tem 3 Index 1 Assign the timer values of the ringer used at the time of station call ringer pattern 1 System 3 Index 3 Bit 0 2 burst 0 4 sec ON 0 2 sec OFF 0 4 sec ON ON Timer for Ringer Pattern 0 0 1 Not Required Required System 3 Index 3 Bit 1 2 burst 0 4 sec ON 0 2 sec OFF 0 4 sec ON ON Timer for Ringer Pattern 1 0 1 Not Required Required STEP 2 ASFC Allow Burst Ringing SFI 48 to the SFC of the...

Page 946: ... to ring will not do so while DND is set 3 While DND is set outgoing calls can be made from the My Line Incoming calls can be answered on all lines except the My Line 4 DND is not displayed on a calling Dterm s LCD when the called station is in DND mode ASFC SFI 114 1 and reorder tone is sent to the calling party No indication will appear when the called station is a HOTLINE H 12 in the DO NOT DIS...

Page 947: ...on Number TP Type of Dterm 0 1 RING 0 No Ringing 1 Ringing All Lines 2 Ringing on Prime Line Only 3 Flexible Ring Assignment enables RG parameter KYN Key Number 1 40 KYI Service Index 0 Key Not Used 1 Feature Key 2 Multi line Key KD Not assigned for Feature Key FKY Feature Key Number FKY 50 DO NOT DISTURB STEP 2 ADSL Assign DND key Assign SN 0 Idle and FKY 50 Do Not Disturb This command is used fo...

Page 948: ...eady DTR via a Data Adapter a Activate Equipment Ready ER or DTR from the data terminal equipment b The Dterm will display the following 4 Activation of DTR via Keyboard Dialing a Activate ER or DTR from the Data Terminal Equipment Service Conditions The following hardware supports this feature Dterm PA 4DLCC issue 14A PA 8DLCH PA 4DLCE issue 1A PA 16ELCD when set in DLCH mode PA 4DLCF Data Module...

Page 949: ... Data Transfer DTX STEP 3 ATNR Assign Connection Restriction for tenant RES 0 Restricted 1 Allowed STEP 4 AEFR Assign Connection Restriction for RSC RSC1 Calling Restriction Class 0 15 RSC2 Calling Restriction Class 0 15 RES Restriction Data 0 Restricted 1 Allowed STEP 5 ADA1 Assign DTE Attribute Data 1 CDN Counter Display Number 1 MEDIA 1 15 2 Data CDN Counter Display Number 2 MEDIA 0 15 0 2400 P...

Page 950: ... Hotline CCIS D 86 Programming cont d STN Hotline Station Number TYPE Connection Type 2 ADC ADC Speed Calling Code 2 or 3 digits STEP 8 ADA2 Assign Terminal Attribute Data 2 HL 1 Hotline terminal connection CDN Counter Display Number 13 HL Hotline Terminal HL 0 1 1 Hotline ...

Page 951: ...n the Recall is answered from Route and Trunk to Dialed Number Operating Procedure 1 Subscriber a and the Attendant in Node A are engaging in a call through a DID line 2 The Attendant dials the number for Station b receives ringback tone Subscriber a receives Hold Tone and Station b is rung Distinctive Ringing 3 The Attendant presses the RELEASE key Subscriber a receives ringback tone ATT Node A C...

Page 952: ...e in Node A and it answers Press the DEST key the dialed number of Station b is indicated Station b continues to ring until the Attendant presses CANCEL Key Service Conditions If the called party answers after the Attendant has answered the recall the display changes from dialed number to the answering telephone number A three way conference is made Programming No programming is needed ATT Node A ...

Page 953: ...esses the HOLD button and places the CCIS connection in a DUAL HOLD condition To answer a call 1 The Dterm user goes off hook and presses the held line If MUSIC ON HOLD M 7 is heard if provided the other Dterm has placed the connection on hold MUSIC ON HOLD M 7 will be heard until the connected Dterm presses the held line and enters the call Service Conditions 1 While the call is in DUAL HOLD AUTO...

Page 954: ...d B are engaging in a call Station C goes off hook and receives dial tone 2 Station C dials the number for Station B and receives busy tone 3 Station C switch hook flashes and receives special dial tone 4 Station C dials the Executive Right of Way access Code Stations A B and C receive Warning Tone Station C is added to the connection between Stations A and B making it a 3 Way connection Node A CC...

Page 955: ...L CALLS C 5 CALL HOLD C 6 CALL TRANSFER CCIS C 50 54 CONSULTATION HOLD ALL CALLS CCIS C 58 CALL PARK C 29 CALL WAITING TERMINAL C 12 THREE WAY CALLING T 2 In any of the above instances the calling station will receive reorder tone 3 If after the 3 Way bridge is established one party disconnects the remaining two parties will still be connected 4 The maximum number of simultaneous EXECUTIVE overrid...

Page 956: ...nt Camp On SFI 11 to the SFC of the station to which Executive Right of Way is set At the remote node assign SFI 3 4 and 11 to SFC 0 STEP 5 ATRK Assigns the trunk for 3 Way Calling assigned at RT 909 STEP 6 MBTK Make the above trunk idle STEP 7 AKYD Assigns Override key on a Dterm if necessary Type Function EXECUTIVE RIGHT OF WAY 3 STEP 8 ADSL Assign Override key Assign SN 3 Called Station Busy an...

Page 957: ...f 9 hours 59 minutes and 59 seconds after which the clock returns to zero 3 A continuous time display will occur during CONSULTATION HOLD ALL CALLS CCIS C 58 THREE WAY CALLING T 2 EXCLUSIVE HOLD Dterm E 4D and NON EXCLUSIVE HOLD Dterm N 7D 4 When a call is transferred the elapsed time of the party receiving the transfer begins at zero 5 When the Dterm returns to the original call from CALL TRANSFE...

Page 958: ...g number by E911 ANI CCIS is NXX XXXX which is the same as that by the previous E911 ANI service 4 Method of obtaining ANI sending number example Caller s station number 12345 closed numbering ANI assigned data RT XX AT 0 0 STA ATT 1 not assigned special ATT number CC 1 0 Main Central 1 Satellite Central COC 826 Remote Office Code Skip 4 Number of digits to be skipped from the top of the STN Add 3...

Page 959: ... ST c Outgoing call from station Attendant Console of Remote office and call termination to a TIE Line of Main office KP 2 ST 6 An independent route is required for E911 interface 7 After caller s number is sent out to the remote office by E911 ANI it takes some time until a speech path is established 8 E911 ANI CCIS service data are assigned only at Main office no specific data are assigned at th...

Page 960: ...3 84 CSEG 15 70 TCMN 1 STEP 2 ATRK Assign trunk LENs RT 905 TK1 LEN dependent on register location RT 905 TK2 LEN dependent on register location RT 904 TK1 LEN dependent on register location RT 904 TK2 LEN dependent on register location STEP 3 AAND Assign ANI data RT 0 AT 0 0 Station 1 Individual Attendant KT 0 0 1 OFF ON expansion of station number lengths CC 1 0 Main Central 1 Satellite Central ...

Page 961: ... programmed in the example the system will be equipped with just one two digit station and one three digit station Programming STEP 1 ASYD System Data 1 Index 16 Enable one to five digit station numbering for the system Assign 1FH System Data 1 Index 92 Bit 3 Must be assigned as data 1 STEP 2 ANPD Reserve an access code for station numbering For the NND parameter assign the NND equal to the smalle...

Page 962: ...ne key to answer the call 2 Press feature key and 1 the MIC LED lights 3 Press feature key and 5 to select hands free operation 4 Replace the handset respond to the call hands free To answer a VOICE CALL CCIS V 7 1 Press feature key and 1 the MIC LED lights 2 Press feature key and 5 to select hands free operation 3 Respond to the call hands free Service Conditions 1 The MIC may be left ON at all t...

Page 963: ...5 SPEED CALLING SYSTEM S 3 is used for HOUSE PHONE CCIS calling if the Attendant is in another office Interactions 1 The AHLS command is not needed if the House Phone Hotline is in the same node as the Attendant Console When a station is programmed as TEC 14 HOTLINE it will automatically be connected to the Attendant Console 2 If the House Phone is to be used for outgoing calls via the Attendant C...

Page 964: ...LING SYSTEM codes are available 5 OUTGOING TRUNK QUEUING CCIS O 12 is not provided for a HOTLINE CCIS call 6 A HOTLINE CCIS station can be assigned as a line feature key on a Dterm See TRUNK LINE APPEARANCE T 23 7 The MY Line of a Dterm cannot be assigned as a HOTLINE CCIS Interactions 1 The connecting station does not have to be a HOTLINE station If the connecting station is busy the HOTLINE stat...

Page 965: ...amming STEP 1 ASDT Assign the station as a TEC 14 for Hotline STEP 2 AHLS Assign the station number programmed above for the following parameters HOT TN HOTLINE Tenant STN HOTLINE Station TYP 2 ADC Abbreviated Digit Code STEP 3 ASPD Assign tenant Abbreviated Digit Code ADC and Digit Code DC ...

Page 966: ... INCOMING CALL IDENTIFICATION lamp can be lit at the same time on the Attendant Console The Attendant can select any incoming call by pressing the associated key 6 Calls can be answered via the ANSWER key for first in first out priority 7 The Attendant Console is limited to 12 unique INCOMING CALL IDENTIFICATION indications However more than one incoming trunk route can be programmed for the same ...

Page 967: ... 2 Index 9 Bit 0 3 can be assigned different meaning via the AAKP command STEP 2 ARTD Flag the type of route in CDN 6 TCL Trunk Class Bit 0 Not used Bit 1 DDD Line LDN Bit 2 FX Line FX Bit 3 WATS Line WATS Bit 4 TIE Line TIE Bit 5 CCSA Line CCSA Bit 6 Toll Line Bit 7 CAS Line Bit 8 Paging Bit 9 Not used Bit 10 Not used Bit 11 general page Bit 12 Radio Page STEP 3 AAKP This command may be used to c...

Page 968: ...al operating procedure Service Conditions The Attendant Identification Number must be published for each attendant Interactions 1 The Attendant Consoles must first be programmed 2 The ASAT number should be the same number of digits as any other telephone number ASAT assigns a telephone number to each Attendant Console 3 An attendant is allowed to call the ASAT number of another Attendant Console f...

Page 969: ...ransfer a two party connection to another Attendant 4 An Attendant can extend an INTER POSITION TRANSFER CCIS call to any other destination 5 When NIGHT CONNECTION N 15 N 16 is active in one system an INTER POSITION TRANSFER from the Attendant of another system can be answered by the Night station Interactions 1 The Attendant Console must first be programmed 2 An Attendant is allowed to call the A...

Page 970: ...on with LEAST COST ROUTING 3 6 DIGIT L 5 4 Stations may be restricted from using this feature by CLASS OF SERVICE INDIVIDUAL C 15 5 The maximum number of adjacent CCIS links for each system is 32 Interactions LEAST COST ROUTING L 5 is used in conjunction with outgoing C O calling The seven system limitation of LOOK AHEAD ROUTING CCIS is based on the eight route advances available in the AOPR comma...

Page 971: ...and that station is forwarded to a station in Office A the link will become idle between Office A and B after the station in A answers If a station in Office A calls a station in Office B and then transfers the call to Station C which is also in Office A Office B disconnects and the link which goes to Office A drops The call becomes an in house station to station call ...

Page 972: ... that LDN Operating Procedure 1 Attendants 1 2 in Node A set into Night mode using the NITE key the Night lamp illuminates indicating that Night mode has been set for handling incoming calls 2 Station C dials the LDN number of Attendant Console 1 Station C is automatically connected to night connection Station B preset for Attendant Console 1 Station C receives ringback tone and Station B is rung ...

Page 973: ...or LDN Night Connection and LDN Night Connection Outside 3 Valid connections with this service feature are shown below 4 If the transfer destination is busy restricted etc the call is routed to busy tone or reorder tone even when the transfer destination is a CCIS line 5 In the cases listed below the next ranked Night Connection service becomes effective a Data assignment for this service feature ...

Page 974: ...ode STEP 2 ASPA Assign the transfer destination access code SRV OGC Outgoing Call OGCA Outgoing Call Advance LCR Least Cost Routing or LCRS Register Sender LCR STEP 3 ALDN Assign the transfer destination to the LDN TN Tenant Number of Listed Directly Number LDN Listed Directly Number TYPE Transfer Type Enter 2 STN Station number of transfer destination Enter Access Code Called Number When transfer...

Page 975: ...engaging in a call 2 Dterm C goes off hook and dials the number for Dterm B receives busy tone 3 Dterm C presses the MSG key and receives service set tone the LCD displays 4 On Dterm B the MESSAGE lamp illuminates indicating that the message has been set NE C NEC NEC Dterm a Node A Node B Dterm b CCIS Dterm c NEC NEC NEC Dterm a Node A Node B Dterm b CCIS Dterm c BT BT MESSAGE SET XXXX Note MESSAG...

Page 976: ...ne 7 Dterm B presses the MSG key and receives ringback tone Redial is automatically made to Dterm C and Dterm C rings From a single line Station to a Dterm 1 Dterm s A and B are engaging in a call NEC NEC NEC Dterm a Node A Node B Dterm b CCIS Dterm c NEC NEC NEC Dterm a Node A Node B Dterm b CCIS Dterm c DT DT NEC NEC NEC Dterm a Node A Node B Dterm b CCIS Dterm c RBT RBT RG NEC NEC Dterm a Node ...

Page 977: ...one The MESSAGE lamp on Dterm B illuminates indicating that the message has been set 5 Dterm B hangs up 6 While the message lamp illuminates Dterm B goes off hook or presses the SPEAKER key and receives dial tone NEC NEC Dterm a Node A Node B Dterm b CCIS STN c BT B T Note MESSAGE lamp can be programmed to any Line Feature Access keys on a Dterm NEC NEC Dterm a Node A Node B Dterm b CCIS STN c SST...

Page 978: ...is reset the message is cleared 7 A message cannot be cleared by the message sender 8 If the second message is sent out from the same Dterm it is memorized as the second unique message 9 If Call Transfer All Calls service is set a message is also transferred to the designated transfer destination 10 Messages are memorized in any Dterm on which the feature key has been programmed as Message Reminde...

Page 979: ...r of digits for the first number of the Access Code of Message Reminder service STEP 3 ASPA Assign the Access Code of the Message Reminder service CI H Hooking SRV SSCA Service Code Appendix CI B Busy SIDA 42 STEP 4 ASFC With respect to SFC of the stations which sets Message Reminder service cancel the restriction of SFI 53 SFI 53 Message Reminder service ...

Page 980: ...ivating a VOICE CALL 1 Lift the handset receive dial tone 2 Dial the desired Dterm at the distant office receive ringback tone 3 Dial the VOICE CALL V 2 access code VOICE CALL is activated The LCD displays 4 Press MSG key receive service set tone The LCD displays At the called Dterm the MESSAGE LED will light to indicate a message has been left To review the message 1 Press MSG key while idle The ...

Page 981: ...ets MESSAGE REMINDER CCIS to the station setting CALL FORWARDING ALL CALLS C 5 C 45 BUSY LINE C 2 C 46 while hearing ringback tone MESSAGE REMINDER is set to the dialed station not the forwarding destination 10 If the called Dterm answers the call while the calling station is dialing the MESSAGE REMINDER CCIS access code the calling and called stations will be connected 11 Messages can be sent onl...

Page 982: ...ameters TN 1 STN Station Number TP Type of Dterm 0 1 RING 0 No Ringing 1 Ringing All Lines 2 Ringing on Prime Line Only 3 Flexible Ring Assignment enables RG parameter KYN Key Number 1 40 For the 4 button Dterm use keys 13 16 only KYI Service Index 0 Key Not Used 1 Feature Key 2 Multi line Key KD Not assigned for Feature Key FKY Feature Key Number FKY 6 MESSAGE REMINDER RG Ringing Assignment per M...

Page 983: ...dant presses the RELEASE key and returns to an idle state To cancel MW Indication 1 The Attendant presses an idle loop key then enters the MW cancel code maximum 3 digits receives special dial tone 2 The Attendant dials Station B which is equipped with an MW lamp The Attendant receives service set tone The MW lamp on Station B goes out 3 The Attendant presses the RELEASE key and returns to an idle...

Page 984: ...ecessary number of digits for the first number of the access code and connection index for MW service STEP 2 ASPA Assign the access code and connection index for MW service To Set CI N Normal SRV SSCA Service Code Appendix SIDA 54 To Cancel CI N Normal SRV SSCA Service Code Appendix SIDA 55 STEP 3 ASFC Allow MW Lamp Control SFI 74 to the SFC of the station ...

Page 985: ...ift the handset or press the Speaker key receive dial tone 2 Press the MESSAGE WAITING LAMP SETTING SET line feature key receive special dial tone 3 Dial the desired telephone number receive service set tone 4 MESSAGE WAITING indication is set To cancel from a Dterm 1 Lift the handset or press the Speaker button receive dial tone 2 Press the MESSAGE WAITING LAMP SETTING CANCEL line feature key rec...

Page 986: ...l line feature key the display will indicate Interactions An external power source is required to light a lamp for a single line telephone Programming STEP 1 ANPD Reserve a number level for feature access and cancel Assign for Normal N Hooking H and Busy B Assign NND in accordance with a predetermined numbering plan STEP 2 ASPA Assign an access code to MESSAGE WAITING LAMP SETTING activate SRV SSC...

Page 987: ... or LEAST COST ROUTING 3 6 DIGIT L 5 are being used refer to these feature descriptions as these services may require programming steps not listed Programming STEP 1 ARTD Refer to the feature listing for the type of trunk route to be accessed STEP 2 ATRK Assign the LEN Route Number Trunk Number and Tenant Number STEP 3 MBTK Assign the Make Idle status to the trunks STEP 4 ANPD Assign a level for t...

Page 988: ...going calls via the Attendant Console the user can dial 0 for Attendant assisted trunk calls 5 MISCELLANEOUS TRUNK RESTRICTION CCIS can change for a particular station when the system is in the Night mode 6 If a restricted station calls another station the called station cannot use CALL TRANSFER ALL CALLS C 11 C 11D C 50 to connect the calling station to a trunk route from which it is restricted 7...

Page 989: ...ata transparency path is established 8 Key in ESC DM ENTER to disconnect 9 ACK is sent back Key in RLS ENTER 10 RELEASED is sent back when the path is disconnected Data Terminal connected to a Dterm Data Adapter Key Pad Dialing 1 Lift the handset or press the SPEAKER key and receive dial tone 2 Dial the desired terminal number 3 Receive remote modem Answer Tone 4 Press the DTX key on the Dterm The...

Page 990: ...TA INTERFACE AUTOMATIC ANSWER D 18 DATA TRANSPARENCY D 19 CLASS OF SERVICE INDIVIDUAL C 15 LEAST COST ROUTING L 5 and TOLL RESTRICTION 3 6 DIGIT T 7 Any of these features programmed incorrectly may cause MODEM POOLING to operate incorrectly Take special precautions when programming Attribute Data to the data terminal This programming will determine which MODEM POOLING Route will be allowed to the ...

Page 991: ...STEP 2 ATRK To program the PA M20 MODEM POOLING Trunk Circuit Card assign the LEN Number MODEM POOLING Route Number 919 926 Trunk Number and Tenant Number Levels 0 2 4 6 of the corresponding group number where the PA M20 Circuit Card is mounted are used for the MODEM POOLING trunks MBTK Assign the Make Idle status to the MODEM POOLING Trunks ...

Page 992: ...B Station B is set for Call Forwarding All Calls to Station C Station C is set for Call Forwarding All Calls to Station D 2 When a call is directed to Station A it is forwarded first to Station B then to Station C and then to Station D The calling party receives ringback tone and ringing starts at Station D 3 Station D lifts the handset to answer and is connected to the calling party Service Condi...

Page 993: ...WARDING BUSY LINE OUTSIDE C 60 CALL FORWARDING DON T ANSWER OUTSIDE C 74 4 When a call is forwarded to the calling party by CALL FORWARDING ALL CALLS CCIS M 40 the calling party hears a busy tone Ringing CF A CCIS or CF A Outside CCIS or Not CCIS CCIS CF A CCIS Call Originating Station CF A CF A CF A CF A LEGEND CF A Call Forwarding All Calls CF A CCIS Call Forwarding All Calls CCIS CF A Outside C...

Page 994: ...ll Forwarding service through CCIS link However when the node that accommodates the station operating the service first has not been programmed the number of times is decided at the node that accommodates the destination of the first Call Forwarding CCIS service 9 When Multiple Call Forwarding CCIS is activated and the last intermediate party forwards returns the call to the first calling party th...

Page 995: ...f times data or the service restriction data the call is terminated to the station that is restricted Multiple Call Forwarding CCIS service Example 1 Multiple Call Forwarding CCIS is restricted because the service has already been activated the preassigned maximum number of times A maximum of three times is available for Call Forwarding through CCIS 2nd C F All Calls Busy 1st C F All Calls Node A ...

Page 996: ...ding for 5 times five times of Call Forwarding are executed as Call Forwarding 1 to Call Forwarding 2 to Call Forwarding 3 to Call Forwarding 2 to Call Forwarding 3 12 The following services set to the forwarded destination are not available with Multiple Call Forwarding CCIS services except when the services below are activated through CCIS link CALL FORWARDING ALL CALLS OUTSIDE C 28 CALL FORWARD...

Page 997: ...onditions below The maximum number of times to activate the service is three programmed in Office A and Office B The last call forwarding is operated by Call Forwarding All Calls Don t Answer service Any kind of Dterm ISDN terminal PHS etc is available to be used for the calling intermediate party Any kind of Call Forwarding service All Calls Busy Line Don t Answer is available to be set at the ca...

Page 998: ...umber of times the service is activated is decided by Office B three times are effective in this example Note that Call Forwarding service from Office A to Office B is included in the number of times service is activated a Office A Office B Office C Office D Office E CCIS CCIS CCIS CCIS b 1st C F UNAVAILABLE 4th C F 2nd C F 3rd C F Office B Office A Office C CCIS CCIS 4th C F UNAVAILABLE CCIS 3rd ...

Page 999: ...so applied when the call is forwarded from Office A to Office B through FCCS link f This service is restricted when a call from the CCIS line is forwarded to other lines except CCIS for example C O line Office A Office B Office C Office D Office E CCIS CCIS CCIS CCIS Office F FCCS 1st C F C F 2nd C F 3rd C F a When a call terminates through FCCS link the number of times is decided by Office A the ...

Page 1000: ... The service is invalid to station D a When Station B is in busy status Busy Verification CCIS B 9 and Executive Right of Way CCIS E 8 are activated b When Station B is in idle status Station B is rung 2 In the case of Message Reminder CCIS M 34 34D service is performed to Station B in Office B The service is invalid to station D Office A Office B Office C Office D Originating Party Station A Stat...

Page 1001: ... setting Call Forwarding All Calls 0 1 Required Not Required SYS 1 Index 486 bit 0 2 The maximum number of times for activating Call Forwarding CCIS service 0 to 7 times 01Hex 07Hex When assigning 0 default the call forwarding is activated between CCIS nodes only one time ASFC Release SFI 7 restriction with regard to SFC of station allowing Call Forwarding All Calls SFI 7 Call Forwarding All Call ...

Page 1002: ...l Calls CCIS M 40 Programming cont d STEP 3 ASPA Sets the access codes for Call Forwarding All Calls For setting CI N Normal SRV SSC Service Code SID 8 For Cancel CI N Normal SRV SSC Service Code SID 9 STEP 4 ATNR Assign the allowable data into the corresponding items of Tenant Restriction Index ...

Page 1003: ... Busy Line to Station C Station C sets Call Forwarding Busy Line to Station D 2 Stations A B and C are busy when an incoming call is directed to Station A The call is forwarded to Station B first then to Station C and on to Station D The calling party receives ringback tone and ringing starts at Station D 3 Station D lifts the handset to answer and is connected to the calling party Service Conditi...

Page 1004: ...USY LINE OUTSIDE C 60 CALL FORWARDING DON T ANSWER OUTSIDE C 74 4 When a call is forwarded to the calling party by CALL FORWARDING BUSY LINE CCIS M 41 the calling party hears busy tone Busy CF B CCIS or CF B Outside CCIS CF B CCIS Call Originating Station CF B CF B CF B CF B LEGEND CF B Call Forwarding Busy Line CF B CCIS Call Forwarding Busy Line CCIS CF B Outside Call Forwarding Busy Line Outsid...

Page 1005: ...through CCIS link However when the node that accommodates the station operating the service first has not been programmed the number of times is decided at the node that accommodates the destination of the first Call Forwarding CCIS service 9 When Multiple Call Forwarding CCIS is activated and the last intermediate party forwards returns the call to the first calling party the calling party may he...

Page 1006: ... Call Forwarding service is effective as shown in the example below When Office A selects the number of times for Call Forwarding for 5 times five times of Call Forwarding are executed as Call Forwarding 1 to Call Forwarding 2 to Call Forwarding 3 to Call Forwarding 2 to Call Forwarding 3 12 The following services set to the forwarded destination are not available with Multiple Call Forwarding CCI...

Page 1007: ...er of times to activate the service is three programmed in Office A and Office B The last call forwarding is operated by Call Forwarding All Calls Don t Answer service Any kind of Dterm ISDN terminal PHS etc is available to be used for the calling intermediate party Any kind of Call Forwarding service All Calls Busy Line Don t Answer is available to be set at the calling intermediate terminal a Th...

Page 1008: ...umber of times the service is activated is decided by Office B three times are effective in this example Note that Call Forwarding service from Office A to Office B is included in the number of times service is activated a Office A Office B Office C Office D Office E CCIS CCIS CCIS CCIS b 1st C F UNAVAILABLE 4th C F 2nd C F 3rd C F Office B Office A Office C CCIS CCIS 4th C F UNAVAILABLE CCIS 3rd ...

Page 1009: ... FCCS link Office A Office B Office C Office D Office E CCIS CCIS CCIS CCIS Office F FCCS 1st C F C F 2nd C F 3rd C F a Call Forwarding All Calls Busy Line When the station that forwards an incoming call first the station in Office B is set Call Forwarding All Calls Busy Line the number of times is decided by the data in Office A the node has the calling party Office A Office B Office C Office D O...

Page 1010: ...ve Right of Way CCIS E 8 the service is effective to Station B in Office B The service is invalid to station D a When Station B is in busy status Busy Verification CCIS B 9 and Executive Right of Way CCIS E 8 are activated b When Station B is in idle status Station B is rung 2 In the case of Message Reminder CCIS M 34 34D service is performed to Station B in Office B The service is invalid to stat...

Page 1011: ...amming STEP 1 ASYD System 1 Index 5 Bit 0 Access Code for Call Forwarding Busy Line and Call Forwarding Don t Answer service 0 1 Same Separate System 1 Index 5 Bit 1 2 3 Number of Multiple Call Forwarding jumps b3 b2 b1 0 0 0 1 Jump 0 0 1 1 Jump 0 1 0 2 Jumps 0 1 1 3 Jumps 1 0 0 4 Jumps 1 0 1 5 Jumps Office A Office B Office C Office D Originating Party Station A Station B Station C Station D Busy...

Page 1012: ...07Hex When assigning 0 default the call forwarding is activated between CCIS nodes only one time STEP 2 ASFC Allow Call Forwarding Busy SFI 9 to the SFC of the stations STEP 3 ANPD Assign minimum necessary number of digits for the first number of the access code for Call Forwarding Busy STEP 4 ASPA Assign the access code for Call Forwarding Busy To set CI N SRV SSC Service Code SID 10 To cancel CI...

Page 1013: ...tation C sets Call Forwarding Don t Answer to Station D 2 A call is directed to Station A The calling party receives ringback tone and ringing starts at Station A 3 The call is not answered within a predetermined amount of time and is forwarded to Station B Ringing stops at Station A and starts at Station B 4 The call is not answered within a predetermined amount of time and is forwarded to Statio...

Page 1014: ... CALL FORWARDING is performed in a CCIS network the following services are not available at a forwarded to station CALL FORWARDING ALL CALLS OUTSIDE C 28 CALL FORWARDING BUSY LINE OUTSIDE C 60 CALL FORWARDING DON T ANSWER OUTSIDE C 74 Last Ringing CF D CCIS or CF D Outside CCIS or Not CCIS CCIS CF D CCIS Call Originating Station CF D CF D CF D CF D LEGEND CF D Call Forwarding Don t Answer CF D CCI...

Page 1015: ...h CCIS The number of times is selected in the range of 1 time to 7 times ASYD SYS1 Index 486 bit 0 2 0 means the enhanced feature is not available 9 The number of times for activating this service between CCIS nodes is decided by system data programmed at the node that has the station operating the first Call Forwarding service through CCIS link However when the node accommodating the station oper...

Page 1016: ...triction data the call continues to ring at the station that has restricted the service Example 1 Multiple Call Forwarding CCIS is restricted because the service has already been activated the preassigned maximum number of times A maximum of three times is available for Call Forwarding through CCIS Calling Party Intermediate Party 2nd C F service 1st C F service Multiple Call Forwarding Don t Answ...

Page 1017: ...l Forwarding 3 13 The following services set to the forwarded destination are not available with Multiple Call Forwarding CCIS services except when the services below are activated through CCIS link CALL FORWARDING ALL CALLS OUTSIDE C 28 CALL FORWARDING BUSY LINE OUTSIDE C 60 CALL FORWARDING DON T ANSWER OUTSIDE C 74 14 The following services are activated within one node The maximum number of tim...

Page 1018: ... t Answer service Any kind of Dterm ISDN terminal PHS etc is available to be used for the calling intermediate party Any kind of Call Forwarding service All Calls Busy Line Don t Answer is available to be set at the calling intermediate terminal a The service is restricted because the terminating Office B is unavailable for enhanced Call Forwarding CCIS service The node that decides number of time...

Page 1019: ...number of times the service is activated is decided by Office B three times are effective in this example Note that Call Forwarding service from Office A to Office B is included in the number of times service is activated a Office A Office B Office C Office D Office E CCIS CCIS CCIS CCIS b 1st C F UNAVAILABLE 4th C F 2nd C F 3rd C F Office B Office A Office C CCIS CCIS 4th C F UNAVAILABLE CCIS 3rd...

Page 1020: ...gh FCCS link Office A Office B Office C Office D Office E CCIS CCIS CCIS CCIS Office F FCCS 1st C F C F 2nd C F 3rd C F a Call Forwarding All Calls Busy Line When the station that forwards an incoming call first the station in Office B is set Call Forwarding All Calls Busy Line the number of times is decided by the data in Office A the node has the calling party Office A Office B Office C Office D...

Page 1021: ...ive Right of Way CCIS E 8 the service is effective to Station B in Office B The service is invalid to station D a When Station B is in busy status Busy Verification CCIS B 9 and Executive Right of Way CCIS E 8 are activated b When Station B is in idle status Station B is rung 2 In the case of Message Reminder CCIS M 34 34D service is performed to Station B in Office B The service is invalid to sta...

Page 1022: ...ation D Programming STEP 1 ASYD System 1 Index 5 Bit 0 Access Code for C F Busy Line and C F Don t Answer service 0 1 Same Separate System 1 Index 5 Bits 1 2 3 Number of Multiple Call Forwarding jumps b3 b2 b1 0 0 0 1 Jump 0 0 1 1 Jump 0 1 0 2 Jumps 0 1 1 3 Jumps 1 0 0 4 Jumps 1 0 1 5 Jumps Office A Office B Office C Office D Originating Party Station A Station B Station C Station D Busy 1st C F 2...

Page 1023: ...e access code for C F Don t Answer service STEP 4 ASPA Assign the access code for C F Don t Answer service To set CI N SRV SSC Service Code SID 12 To cancel CI N SRV SSC Service Code SID 13 STEP 5 ATNR Assign allowable data into the corresponding item of the tenant restriction index SYS 1 Index 486 bit 0 2 The maximum number of times for activating Call Forwarding CCIS service 0 to 7 times 01Hex 0...

Page 1024: ... maximum number of consoles allowed per system is 16 for 1 IMG and 60 for 4 IMGs IPX U 7 Each incoming call is displayed on a console whether idle or busy If all Attendants are involved in processing calls when another Central Office call arrives the Call Waiting Lamp will light on all consoles This is Switched Loop Attendant Operation 8 If one of the consoles enters the Night mode all calls addre...

Page 1025: ... into Night tenant goes into Night STEP 2 ATRK To assign the ATTENDANT CONSOLE A 3 LEN LP and UNIT The Line Group is always 20 and the Level is either 0 or 1 Assign as Route 901 Also assign a Service Feature Class SFC 0 and a Route Restriction Class RSC 0 to the ATTENDANT CONSOLE A 3 STEP 3 ASAT Assign a specific Attendant Number to the ATTENDANT CONSOLE A 3 See INDIVIDUAL ATTENDANT ACCESS I 6 STE...

Page 1026: ...rwarding service is possible Control of MWLs is based on data from the external CPU Procedures Feature 1 1 When the attendant answers a call the PBX transmits a call handling record to the MCI The external CPU based on the received data will display a profile of the station trunk being handled by the attendant on the monitor 2 MWL control is based on data from the external CPU Through the external...

Page 1027: ...T ANSWER CCIS C 47 from Internal Call CALL FORWARDING DON T ANSWER CCIS C 47 from External Call CALL FORWARDING BUSY LINE C 2 from Internal Call CALL FORWARDING BUSY LINE C 2 from External Call CALL FORWARDING BUSY LINE CCIS C 46 from Internal Call CALL FORWARDING BUSY LINE CCIS C 46 from External Call CALL FORWARDING ALL CALLS C 5 from Internal Call CALL FORWARDING ALL CALLS C 5 from External Cal...

Page 1028: ...record to the MCI 4 If the Host CPU malfunctions and stops collecting call records the PBX can store up to 16 call records If the maximum of 16 call records is stored and a 17th is generated the system will overwrite the oldest stored record thus giving the stack the most recently generated call records 5 The PBX connected to a Message Center CPU in a CCIS network forms a Message Center Node In th...

Page 1029: ...imer for MCI Guard timer data value 128 ms Bit 5 MWL Control by MCI 0 1 Out In Service System 1 Index 29 Bits 0 7 Assign the port number for message output to the M C In the case of dual service two Bits are assigned System 1 Index 34 Bits 1 2 Specify the RS 232C Output Parity Code System 1 Index 70 Bit 0 1 Called Number Display in service PC 3 FUG 1 Center FUG FUG 2 IPX IVS2 IPX IPX IPX IPX IPX M...

Page 1030: ...when terminating the Attendant in this tenant 0 1 Out In Service STEP 2 AIOC Assign the function and attribute data of the IOC ports STEP 3 ASFC Allows MWL Control SFI 74 to the SFC of the station SFI 74 MW lamp setting station Called Party STEP 4 ARPC Assigns the Remote Point Code data for the Message Center FCCS Programming Set the data for the Centralized MAT following programming of CENTRALIZE...

Page 1031: ...her node through CCIS Operating Procedure 1 The Night lamp illuminates when the Attendant in Node A sets Night mode with the NITE key pressed 2 An incoming call from the CO RT to the Attendant in Night mode The CO RT is automatically connected to Station C for night connection and receives ringback tone Station C is rung ATT CO RT Node A CCIS Node B C NIGHT MODE NITE Key PUBLIC SWITCHED TELEPHONE ...

Page 1032: ...EXIBLE N 2 and TRUNK ANSWER FROM ANY STATION T 8 in the same system 4 If the NIGHT CONNECTION station is set for CALL FORWARDING ALL CALLS C 5 incoming Central Office trunk calls terminated to that station will be forwarded to the designated station 5 Incoming calls that will be routed to NIGHT CONNECTION stations are limited to Ring Down trunks 6 Such calls programmed in the ALDN command should u...

Page 1033: ...goes off hook to answer the incoming call Service Conditions 1 Destination stations are assigned on a flexible basis using CALL FORWARDING ALL CALLS CCIS C 45 2 For NIGHT CONNECTION FLEXIBLE CCIS to function a NIGHT CONNECTION FIXED CCIS N 15 station must be assigned to the trunk via the Maintenance Administration Terminal MAT 3 The NIGHT CONNECTION FLEXIBLE CCIS destination station can be in the ...

Page 1034: ... 5 Name display by both 8 digits and 16 digits at the call destination is made only for the My Line 6 ASCII characters can be displayed by this service 7 Name information for this service is assigned by ANDD command on each station number basis 8 The routes to the offices where this service is provided and the routes to the office where this service is not provided must be separated from each othe...

Page 1035: ...s follows Voice Call Call Forwarding All Calls CCIS Call Forwarding Busy Line CCIS Call Forwarding Don t Answer CCIS Camp On CCIS Ringing only Message Reminder Outgoing call only 15 The intra office services inclusive of CCIS trunks for which Name Display System CCIS can be valid are as follows Call Pickup Ringing for Call Hold Answering of Call Park Call Waiting Call Termination from UCD Queuing ...

Page 1036: ...400 IPX Feature Programming Manual NDA 24297 Issue 1 Page 993 Name Display System CCIS N 37 Programming cont d STEP 2 ARTD Assign route class data for CCIS trunk route RT 43 BT 1 50 DPLY 1 98 CI 0 112 IND 1 ...

Page 1037: ...ering plan 2 Only telephone numbers maximum of 8 digits are allowed to be used as extension numbers in the network 3 Telephone numbers used in the other FCCS groups and the connected NEAX2000 IVS2 are managed by the NDM Network Data Memory separately from telephone numbers used in the self FCCS group a Telephone number data in a NEAX2000 IVS2 is managed by the NDMs of NCNs Network Center Nodes wit...

Page 1038: ...AFUGN command TN and ADC to be assigned FUG FCCS group number of destination group 1 4 Note 1 Note 1 The self FUG cannot be entered TN Tenant number ADC Abbreviated Digit Code for the destination FUG maximum of 6 digits STEP 3 AELGN Assign telephone number must be a unique number in the network When assigning the data logging in to the NCN of Center FUG by using this command the data in NDM of all...

Page 1039: ...TYPE parameter enter the Line Equipment Number of the designated station Note 2 TN Enter the Tenant Number when STN is checked in the TYPE parameter Note 2 STN Enter the Station Number when STN is checked in the TYPE parameter Note 2 PC Enter the Point Code assigned to the CCIS network This parameter is required for the NEAX2000 IVS2 only 1 16367 CON_FUG display only FUG number connected to the se...

Page 1040: ...on with OUTGOING TRUNK QUEUING O 2 and OUTGOING TRUNK QUEUING CCIS O 12 4 If no queue slots are available the user will receive a Trunk Busy signal 5 The LCR Route Restriction Class can provide the OFF HOOK QUEUING CCIS option 6 OFF HOOK QUEUING CCIS and OUT GOING TRUNK QUEUING O 2 O 2D services are mutually exclusive 7 ACCOUNT CODE A 18 and FORCED ACCOUNT CODE F 7 information can be recorded on S...

Page 1041: ...one followed by a constant dial tone Programming STEP 1 ASYD System Data 2 Index 4 Bit 1 Enable AUTOMATIC OUTGOING QUEUING O 2 12 0 1 Off hook Queuing Automatic Outgoing Queue OFF HOOK QUEUING and AUTOMATIC OUTGOING QUEUING O 2 12 are mutually exclusive Assigning data 0 allows OFF HOOK QUEUING CCIS STEP 2 ASFC Assign a Service Feature Class that allows SFI 21 Off Hook OG Queuing to stations that w...

Page 1042: ... from a station in a PBX to another station in a different PBX in the CCIS network encounters an all C O Lines Busy Operating Procedure 1 Station b goes off hook receives dial tone 2 Station b dials the C O Line Outgoing Call Access Code receives second dial tone STN a Node A CCIS Node B STN b STN c CO Line All Busy ATT DT DT PUBLIC SWITCHED TELEPHONE NETWORK STN c CO Line STN a All Busy ATT Node ...

Page 1043: ...tion b dials Station c in the Center Office and receives a busy tone 4 Station b switch hook flashes and receives the special dial tone STN c CO Line STN a All Busy ATT Node A CCIS Node B STN b BT BT PUBLIC SWITCHED TELEPHONE NETWORK STN c CO Line STN a All Busy ATT Node A CCIS Node B STN b SPDT SPDT PUBLIC SWITCHED TELEPHONE NETWORK ...

Page 1044: ... the OGQ Access Code and receives a service set tone 6 Station b hangs up Outgoing Trunks become available for processing the call from Station b Station b is rung STN c CO Line STN a All Busy ATT Node A CCIS Node B STN b SST SST PUBLIC SWITCHED TELEPHONE NETWORK STN c RG Idle STN a ATT Node A CCIS Node B STN b PUBLIC SWITCHED TELEPHONE NETWORK ...

Page 1045: ... attempts will result in a Reorder tone 5 This feature is not available for an ATTENDANT CONSOLE A 3 6 The OGQ is common to all Central Office type groups DDD FX WATS etc in the system 7 The OGQ call back will return to the originating station not the CALL FORWARDING terminating station 8 OGQ is denied to a station line when the CALL BACK C 1 or CALL HOLD C 6 feature is already activated 9 If a us...

Page 1046: ...ndex 3 Bit 5 3 Burst on the time above Ringer Patter 0 1 Not Required Required System 3 Index 7 Assign OGQ Ring Back Pattern STEP 2 ANPD Assign minimum necessary number of digits for the first number of the OGQ access codes STEP 3 ASPA Assign the OGQ access codes To set CI B Busy SRV SSC Service Code SID 19 To cancel CI N Normal SRV SSC Service Code SID 20 STEP 4 ARTD Assign the OGQ service for ea...

Page 1047: ...ING ACCESS P 1 can be provided simultaneously in the same system 2 To directly answer PAGING ACCESS by the ATTENDANT CONSOLE A 3 the Paged party should use the INDIVIDUAL ATTENDANT ACCESS I 4 feature 3 Paging is limited to stations ATTENDANT CONSOLES A 3 or Tie Trunks Other parties CO trunk calls must have the ATTENDANT CONSOLE A 3 or user perform the PAGING operation 4 BUSY VERIFICATION B 3 EXECU...

Page 1048: ...ts 0 1 For PAGE function only assign data 00 STEP 2 ARTD Assign the Paging route as shown below RT 1 1 OSGS 2 2 ONSG 3 5 TF 1 6 TCL 11 7 L T 1 8 RLP 2 15 LSG 1 30 PAD 7 44 PRV 1 STEP 3 ATRK Assign the LEN Number Paging Trunk Route Number Trunk Number and Tenant Number STEP 4 MBTK Assign the Make Idle status to the Paging Trunks STEP 5 ANPD Assign a level for trunk access Assign for a Connection In...

Page 1049: ...particular station Day mode and Night mode restrictions can differ 8 Non restricted stations within the systems can CALL TRANSFER ALL CALLS C 11 outgoing calls to stations restricted by this feature 9 Station line access to a given trunk group is controlled by assigning a Route Restriction class RSC to each line There can be a maximum of 15 different RSCs per system each of which can be programmed...

Page 1050: ...ted to the ATTENDANT CONSOLE A 3 or receive Reorder tone Reorder Tone bit 4 0 5 0 ATTENDANT CONSOLE A 3 bit 4 1 bit 5 0 Route Restriction Class STEP 2 ARSC 16 different Route Restriction Classes may be constructed either allowing denying or Toll Restricting access to the various routes of the stem Assign the RSC using Route Restriction Indexes 2 Outgoing via the ATTENDANT CONSOLE A 3 and 3 Outgoin...

Page 1051: ...dure 1 Station c in the Public Switched Telephone Network places a call to Node A and receives ringback tone The Attendant in Node A receives an audible tone 2 The Attendant presses the ANSWER key and is connected with Station c The user at Station c asks the Attendant to set up a connection first with Station b1 and then with Station b2 in Node B STN c STN a ATT Node A CCIS Node B CCIS RBT RG PUB...

Page 1052: ... Station b1 is rung and Station c receives Hold Tone 4 The Attendant presses the Serial Call SC key and Station c receives ringback tone The HOLD and RING status are shown on the Attendant Console STN a ATT Node A CCIS Node B STN b1 STN b2 RBT HT RG HT RBT PUBLIC SWITCHED TELEPHONE NETWORK RBT STN c RG STN a ATT Node A CCIS Node B STN b1 STN b2 RBT PUBLIC SWITCHED TELEPHONE NETWORK ...

Page 1053: ...ck tone 7 The Attendant presses the loop key corresponding to the flashing lamps Station c and the Attendant are connected again The Attendant assists the connection to the next station Service Conditions 1 If the attendant enters a loop that is already set up for a SERIAL CALL the service is automatically cancelled 2 SERIAL CALL is not provided for Station to Station calling 3 SERIAL CALL can be ...

Page 1054: ...ections 6 The following services cannot be used while SERIAL CALL CCIS is activated ATTENDANT CAMP ON WITH TONE INDICATION CCIS A 45 BUSY VERIFICATION CCIS B 9 CALL HOLD CCIS CALL HOLD Dterm C 6 C 6D EXECUTIVE RIGHT OF WAY E 8 Programming ASYD System 1 Index 43 Bit 4 1 Allow ATT to reenter loop on serial call System 1 Index 186 Bit 4 At the time of serial call 0 1 ATT Loop Wait ATT Loop Release Sy...

Page 1055: ...Each display is automatically generated when a service feature is initiated Service Conditions 1 Each display is controlled by system data and is produced accordingly A display may be allowed or denied in system data programming on a per system basis 2 The contrast on the LCD display panel is controlled by the UP DOWN key of the Dterm Press the UP key for a darker image or the DOWN key for a light...

Page 1056: ...e DATA lamp and DTX lamp will light steadily The LCD displays To place a data call to a Data Adapter of Data Module when not connected to a voice call or to a different data station 1 Press the DATA key The DATA lamp lights steadily The LCD displays 2 Dial the desired number The DATA lamp will flash The LCD displays 3 When the data call is answered the DATA lamp will light steadily The LCD display...

Page 1057: ...s to be used for data transmission and the SFC or the data terminal should include SFI 11 0 Data Privacy 5 Only DTE to DTE direct internal connections are possible The DTE would then be set for AUTO answer and the DTX key could not be used 6 This programming description is limited only to the station programming Programming STEP 1 ASYD System Data 1 Index 16 bits 0 4 Place one to five digit statio...

Page 1058: ...sy B Assign NND in accordance with a predetermined numbering plan BLF is on STEP 4 ASPA For a Connection Index as Normal N and Hooking H assign the SRV STN Station assign Tenant TN BLF is on STEP 5 AKYD Assign the station according to the following parameters TN 1 STN Station Number TP Type of Dterm 0 1 RING 0 No Ringing 1 Ringing All Lines 2 Ringing on Prime Line Only 3 Flexible Ring Assignment e...

Page 1059: ...Numbers 2 Timing Start is not available with this feature Interactions 1 An entire number level is eliminated for each station with one digit access Do not plan to have more than one or two such phones in a system 2 The Attendant Console Busy Lamp Field BLF is not available for this feature Programming STEP 1 ASYD System Data 1 Index 16 Bit 0 Assign this Bit as data 1 enabling station numbers STEP...

Page 1060: ...The conference leader can dial 0 to lock out additional parties Dialing 0 again will allow more parties to be connected If the conference leader dials all conferences will be disconnected Otherwise the conference is terminated after all parties have hung up Service Conditions 1 Conference Units are designed to provide adequate amplification but the condition of the Central Office connections will ...

Page 1061: ...ue 1 S 56 Station Controlled Conference CCIS Programming ASHP Assign a Pilot hunting group using eight of the PA 16LCBE line circuits These ports are connected to an external conference unit MMCB Model 37008 Make sure that SFI 4 is denied to the conference stations ...

Page 1062: ...n a system basis 3 Inter node STATION TO STATION CALLING CCIS is based on the Route Restriction Class of the calling and called parties Interactions 1 The ATNR command is required for STATION TO STATION CALLING CCIS 2 The normal 5 dB PAD loss inserted for STATION TO STATION CALLING CCIS may be eliminated on a per station basis For these stations assign a Service Feature Class that allows SFI 50 Re...

Page 1063: ...ect the calling party to a fully restricted station 4 STATION TO STATION CALLING OPERATOR ASSISTANCE CCIS is based on the Route Restriction Class of the calling and called station Interactions 1 The ATNR command is required for STATION TO STATION CALLING OPERATOR ASSISTANCE CCIS 2 The normal 5 dB PAD loss inserted for STATION TO STATION CALLING OPERATOR ASSISTANCE CCIS may be eliminated on a per s...

Page 1064: ...2220 for Station b1 and receives busy tone 3 Station a2 dials the lowest digit of the number 5 of N 2225 of Station b2 and receives ringback tone while Station b2 is rung 4 Station b2 answers and is connected with Station a2 Service Conditions 1 This service feature can be provided for all stations and the ATTENDANT CONSOLE s A 3 2 STEP CALLING can be in any order 1 9 or 9 1 STN a1 STN a2 Node A N...

Page 1065: ... d 3 If the second selected station is also busy STEP CALLING can continue until a station rings 4 If a station is set for any type of CALL FORWARDING ALL CALLS BUSY LINE DON T ANSWER the CALL FORWARDING C 2 C 3 C 5 will take effect Programming ASYD System 1 Index 68 Bit 0 SHF method Step Call becomes effective ...

Page 1066: ... data call is received the DATA lamp flashes and the Dterm rings 2 Press the DATA key to answer the call 3 The DATA lamp lights steadily Note If the Data Adapter is set for AUTOMATIC ANSWER D 18 no manual operation is required Service Conditions 1 SYNCHRONOUS DATA SWITCHING CCIS supports transmission speeds of up to 56 Kbps 2 A Dterm or Data Module must be used 3 A synchronous data terminal connec...

Page 1067: ...proper data synchronization Also Zero Suppression ZCS using the 24DTI switch setting must be turned ON SW1 3UP CCIS a With CCIS switched speeds up to 56 Kbps can be provided when bit stealing is not used by the 24 DTI and associated T1 facilities b In order to have switched synchronous data at 56 Kbps with CCIS a 24DTI PA 24DTA B or higher circuit card is required Switched synchronous data at 56 K...

Page 1068: ... idle state enter 0 End while in Menu mode then move the TEST2 switch to the left OFF Programming STEP 1 ASDT Assign levels 4 5 6 7 of a PA 4DLC as a TEC 13 Data level 4 corresponds to voice level 0 level 5 to level 1 level 6 to level 2 level 7 to level 3 TN Tenant Number STN Station Number LENS Line Equipment Number 6 digits TEC Telephone Class 1 31 1 DP 10pps 2 PB 3 DP PB 11 VMM 12 Dterm V 13 Da...

Page 1069: ...nd CCIS routes STEP 5 ATNR Allow tenant to tenant connection for Inter and Intra tenant connections Assign Tenant Restriction Index TRI 1 STEP 6 ACFR Allow all incoming Call Class Index CCI for Transfer Service Feature Index TSFI 1 STEP 7 ADA1 The following attributes are assigned via the MAT using this command MEDIA 2 CNTP 0 TCP 0 FCY 0 PRI 0 REST 0 SRP 0 STEP 8 ADA2 It is possible to program Att...

Page 1070: ...lete MDM Group No 01 15 OG Modem Group No 03 MDM No 2 IC Modem 00 Delete MDM Group No 01 15 IC Modem Group No 04 Speed Set via Rotary Select Switch Speed 05 300 bps 06 600 bps 07 1200 bps 08 2400 bps 09 4800 bps 10 9600 bps 11 19 2 K 05 PRT Parity 00 No Parity 01 Parity 06 ASY ASYNC 00 Asynchronous 01 Synchronous 07 HDX H DUPLEX 00 Full Duplex 01 Half Duplex 08 STP Stop Bit 00 1 Stop Bit 01 2 Stop...

Page 1071: ...ion for Inter and Intra tenant connections Assign Tenant Re subtraction Index TRI 1 STEP 5 ACFR Allow all incoming Call Class Index CCI for Transfer Service Feature Index TSFI 1 STEP 6 ADA1 The following attributes are assigned via the MAT using this command MEDIA 2 CNTP 0 TCP 0 FCY 0 PRI 0 REST 0 SRP 0 STEP 7 ADA2 It is possible to program Attribute Data 2 3 and 10 from the MAT STEP 8 ARTD2 The C...

Page 1072: ... enters a loop that is already set up for a SUPERVISORY CALL CCIS the service is automatically cancelled and a three party connection is established 2 SUPERVISORY CALL CCIS is not provided for station to station intra node calling 3 SUPERVISORY CALL CCIS can be provided on a TENANT T 12 basis 4 A station at which SUPERVISORY CALL CCIS has been activated will automatically recall to the Attendant i...

Page 1073: ...anual Page 1030 NDA 24297 Issue 1 S 73 Supervisory Call CCIS Programming STEP 1 ASYD SYS2 Index 7 bit 3 Supervisory Call service 0 1 Out In Service SYS1 Index 43 bit 4 Attendant re enters loop on supervisory call 0 1 Restricted Allowed ...

Page 1074: ...n Toll Restriction is specified in ARRC all possible dialing patterns must be assigned in ATDP If office codes within an area code do not need to be restricted allow the area code only Always provide the system with the most economical configuration of digits when constructing TOLL RESTRICTION tables 2 In the ARRC command ARI A RES must be programmed to allow two trunks and a station in a conferen...

Page 1075: ...ection is Allowed 2 Connection is Toll Restricted STEP 3 AMND This command is used to tell the system the total number of digits to expect based upon the first few DIGITS DIALED 9 plus a local call will equal 8 digits 9 plus 1 plus an Area Code call will equal 12 digits Assign the DIALED DIGITS information and the corresponding MAXIMUM NECESSARY DIGITS MND data Flag this data as a Toll call data 1...

Page 1076: ...for translation Translation will begin with 555 Assign the following OGRT Outgoing Route Number RSC Route Restriction Class FLAG 1 3 Digits 2 6 Digits DC 555 RES Restriction Data 0 Restricted 1 Allowed Note Only 3 digits or 6 digits may be entered for the DC parameter of this command Examples Of Toll Restriction Listed below are several examples of the use of TOLL RESTRICTION For these examples re...

Page 1077: ...d DC 91914 TDI 1 Connection is Allowed This allows these specific Area Codes All Area Codes not assigned are Automatically restricted AARP Command Not Required Example 3 RSC 3 Assignment ATDP Command TDM OG O Outgoing Connection DAY NIGHT D Day OGRT 1 RSC 3 DC 92 TDI 1 Connection is Allowed Repeat these same assignments for Digit Codes DC 93 99 to allow all local office codes To allow Area Codes 7...

Page 1078: ...TDM OG O Outgoing Connection DAY NIGHT D Day RSC 3 OGRT 1 DC 917 TDI 2 Go to AARP Command NND 3 This tells the system to check AARP tables for restrictions for all Area Codes beginning with 9 and 7 AARP Command OGRT 1 RSC 3 FLAG 2 DC 914239 RES 1 Connection is Allowed DC 914465 RES 1 Connection is Allowed DC 914798 RES 1 Connection is Allowed OGRT 1 RSC 3 FLAG 2 DC 718623 RES 1 Connection is Allow...

Page 1079: ...s except those already assigned destination codes RES Restriction Data 0 1 0 Not assigned Area Codes are restricted 1 Not assigned Area Codes are allowed The above assignment allows all other dialing patterns Area Codes except 808 213 408 and 714 Example 5 RSC 5 Assignment ATDP Command TDM OG O Outgoing Connection DAY NIGHT D Day OGRT 1 RSC 3 DC 92 TDI 1 Connection is Allowed Repeat these same ass...

Page 1080: ... restricted 1 Alternate routing is allowed 2 Toll Restriction is required STEP 7 ATDP When TOLL RESTRICTION is required for trunk to trunk connections ATDP will provide all digit information Up to 11 digits may be listed as being allowed for a specific trunk to trunk connection TDI 2 should not be assigned because AARP cannot be used for Tandem connections Example 6 Trunk to Trunk Connection Allow...

Page 1081: ...e Programming Manual Page 1038 NDA 24297 Issue 1 T 26 Toll Restriction 3 6 Digit CCIS Programming cont d DC 91914 TDI 1 Allow This allows these specific Area Codes All Area Codes not assigned are automatically restricted ...

Page 1082: ...main node satellite nodes not equipped with an ATTENDANT CONSOLE A 3 can automatically be set to the Night mode by CENTRALIZED DAY NIGHT MODE CHANGE CCIS C 56 service 4 A TAS indicator can be provided for each node s incoming trunks 5 An incoming call terminating in the Night mode will have the following order of priority a NIGHT CONNECTION FLEXIBLE CCIS N 16 b NIGHT CONNECTION FIXED CCIS N 15 c T...

Page 1083: ...PD Reserve a number level for service feature access Assign for Normal N Hooking H and Busy B Assign NND in accordance with a predetermined numbering plan STEP 3 ASPA Assign an access code to TRUNK ANSWER FROM ANY STATION SRV SSC Service Code SID 16 TAS Connection Status CI N Normal N STEP 4 ASFC Assign station to receive TRUNK ANSWER FROM ANY STATION a Service Feature Class that allows SFI 13 STE...

Page 1084: ... five digit telephone number 3 The call is routed to another node according to programmed routing information and the called station rings 4 The called station answers and the parties are connected To call a station at another office using Numbering Plan 2 1 Lift the handset receive dial tone 2 Dial access code office code station code X XXX XX or X XXX XXX or X XXX XXXX 3 The call is routed to th...

Page 1085: ...13 AC 1 STEP 2 ATRK Assign the LEN of the CCIS voice data trunks Route Number Trunk Number and Tenant Number The trunk LENs will correlate to channels 8 31 of the sub highway in which the PA 24DTA 24CCTA is mounted when 1 5M DTI CCT is used The LEN corresponding to the last level of the last group is reserved for the CCIS signal link route STEP 3 MBTK Assign the Make Idle status to the CCIS voice ...

Page 1086: ...igits Do Not skip any digits Usually the LCR access code is the opposite system s station level This digit must be sent to the opposite PBX If dialing pattern 2 is being used from the final node send only the two three or four digit station number before the node dialed Pattern Number Location Digits to be added after translating the dialed digits in AFRS Go to AADC command This is usually not app...

Page 1087: ...ot answer Dterm a then presses the VOICE key and sends a tone to Dterm b The LCD on Dterm a displays Note If Dterm a turns on MIC key on the Dterm Dterm a can talk with Dterm b hands free 3 Dterm a talks with Dterm b via the speaker Note If Dterm b turns on MIC key on the Dterm Dterm b can talk with Dterm a hands free From a single line station to a Dterm 1 Station a places a call to Dterm b throu...

Page 1088: ...My line equals the extension called Programming Setting by VOICE button STEP 1 AKYD Assign data to Feature key FKY 14 STEP 2 ADSL Assign SN 2 Originating RBT Connection and FKY 14 Voice Call VOICE This command is used for assigning the function to each soft key STEP 3 ASFC With respect to SFC of the stations that set Voice Call cancel the restriction of SFI 52 SFI 52 Voice Call service SFI 93 Voic...

Page 1089: ...NEAX2400 IPX Feature Programming Manual Page 1046 NDA 24297 Issue 1 This page is for your notes ...

Search results

Summary of Contents for NEAX2400 ICS

Reviews:

Related manuals for NEAX2400 ICS

Brands by name

Popular brands

NEC NEAX2400 ICS, Programming Manual

Search results

Summary of Contents for NEAX2400 ICS

Reviews:

Related manuals for NEAX2400 ICS

Brands by name

Popular brands